Руководство по эксплуатации гладильного катка GO 20

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GO 20TM
Gas Heated
Flatwork Ironer
Chicago Dryer Company
©
Instruction Manual #3011-096b
CHICAGO DRYER COMPANY
2200 N. Pulaski Road, Chicago, Illinois USA 60639-3737
Telephone: (773) 235-4430 Fax: (773) 235-4439 www.chidry.com
GO 20
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MANUAL
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Chapter 2 - Installation
Chapter 3 - Operating Guidelines
Chapter 4 - Preventive Maintenance
Chapter 5 - Operating Principles
Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
Chapter 7 - Repair
PICTURE PARTS LIST
SCHEMATICS
APPENDIX
Floor Plans
Technical Speciﬁcations
Manufacturer’s Bulletins
Torque Speciﬁcations
Operating Standard
INDEX
TOC
INDEX
i
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
ii
GO 20
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Warranty .................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2
Scope of the Manual ............................................................................... 1-2
1.3
Safety ...................................................................................................... 1-3
Safe Work Habits .................................................................................... 1-3
Safety Features ....................................................................................... 1-4
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
2.1
Site and Utility Requirements .................................................................. 2-2
2.2
Installation Procedures ............................................................................ 2-3
Inspection ................................................................................................ 2-3
Uncrating and Positioning ....................................................................... 2-4
Exhaust Blower Installation ..................................................................... 2-5
Electrical Connection .............................................................................. 2-7
Gas Connection .................................................................................... 2-10
Receiving Shelf Set-Up ......................................................................... 2-13
Protective Wrapper Removal ................................................................ 2-14
2.3
Pre-Operational Checkout ..................................................................... 2-14
Security of Hardware ............................................................................. 2-15
Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield Check ...................................................... 2-16
Electrical Connection Checkout ............................................................ 2-17
Safety Device and Control Function Checkout ..................................... 2-19
Ironing Cylinder Paper Removal ........................................................... 2-21
Gas Connection Checkout .................................................................... 2-22
Checkout Completion ............................................................................ 2-27
Cleaning the Unit ................................................................................... 2-27
TOC
INDEX
iii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 3
iv
GO 20
OPERATING GUIDELINES
3.1
Safety Features ....................................................................................... 3-2
Main Disconnect Switch .......................................................................... 3-2
Safety Stop Buttons ................................................................................ 3-2
Safety Guards ......................................................................................... 3-2
Safety Interlock Switches ........................................................................ 3-3
Safety Labels .......................................................................................... 3-3
3.2
Operating Controls .................................................................................. 3-4
Right Endframe Controls ......................................................................... 3-4
Left Endframe Controls ........................................................................... 3-6
3.3
Daily Operating Procedures .................................................................... 3-8
Start-Up ................................................................................................... 3-8
Waxing .................................................................................................... 3-9
Flatwork Handling ..................................................................................3-11
Clearing a Jam Safely ........................................................................... 3-12
Shut-Down ............................................................................................ 3-13
3.4
Operating Techniques ........................................................................... 3-13
Conditioning Flatwork Before Ironing ..................................................... 3-13
Unit Settings .......................................................................................... 3-15
Processing Standards ........................................................................... 3-16
Maximum Productivity ........................................................................... 3-16
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PM Task Tables .................................................................................................. 4-1
Daily, Weekly Tasks ................................................................................. 4-1
Monthly, Semi-Annual Tasks ................................................................... 4-2
4.1
Daily PM (8 Hours) .................................................................................. 4-3
Watch and Listen for Anything Abnormal ................................................ 4-3
General Cleanliness ................................................................................ 4-3
Clean Combustion Blower Air Filter ........................................................ 4-4
Check Guide Tapes ................................................................................. 4-4
Check Safety Equipment ......................................................................... 4-5
Wax Ironing Cylinder ............................................................................... 4-5
4.2
Weekly PM (50 Hours) ............................................................................ 4-5
Check Compression Roll Cover .............................................................. 4-6
Check Ironing Cylinder ............................................................................ 4-6
Clean Behind Service Panels .................................................................. 4-7
Check Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt (Type R Unit) ..................................... 4-7
Check and Clean Inverter ....................................................................... 4-8
Grease “Weekly” Bearings ...................................................................... 4-9
Oil Roll Bearing Pivots ...........................................................................4-11
Clean Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield ....................................................... 4-12
Check and Clean Motors ....................................................................... 4-13
Check and Clean Sail Switch and Exhaust Blower Wheel .................... 4-13
Check and Clean Combustion Blower Wheel ....................................... 4-14
Check Ribbon Condition ....................................................................... 4-15
4.3
Monthly PM (200 Hours) ....................................................................... 4-15
Grease Bearings ................................................................................... 4-16
Check Setscrews................................................................................... 4-16
Clean Touchless Temperature Sensors and UV Flame Scanner .......... 4-17
Oil Drive Chain and Tension Springs..................................................... 4-18
Check Compression Roll Pressure ....................................................... 4-18
4.4
Semi-Annual PM (1000 Hours) ............................................................. 4-19
Check Gas Regulator Vent .................................................................... 4-19
Check Gas Pressure ............................................................................. 4-20
Change Oil in Delivery Drive Gear Reduction Unit (Type R Unit) ......... 4-20
Check and Clean Spark Plug and Pilot Assembly ................................. 4-21
Check Mechanical and Electrical Connections ..................................... 4-23
TOC
INDEX
v
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 5
GO 20
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Safety ................................................................................................................ 5-2
vi
5.1
Electrical System ..................................................................................... 5-2
Disconnect Switch and Fuses ................................................................. 5-3
Main Electrical Panel ............................................................................... 5-4
Additional Electrical Components ........................................................... 5-6
5.2
Mechanical System ................................................................................. 5-7
Ironer Drive System................................................................................. 5-7
Delivery Drive System ............................................................................. 5-7
Ribbon Sets ............................................................................................. 5-8
5.3
Exhaust System ...................................................................................... 5-9
Exhaust Blower ....................................................................................... 5-9
Sail Switch ............................................................................................... 5-9
5.4
Heating System ....................................................................................... 5-9
Burner System........................................................................................5-11
Flame Safeguard ................................................................................... 5-12
Temperature Control ............................................................................. 5-14
Touchless Temperature Sensors and UV Flame Scanner..................... 5-15
5.5
Sequence of Operation ......................................................................... 5-16
Stand-By Stage ..................................................................................... 5-16
JOG Operation Stage ............................................................................ 5-16
Mechanical Start-Up Stage ................................................................... 5-17
Burner Normal Operation Stage ............................................................ 5-18
Burner Fail-Safe Protection Stage ........................................................ 5-19
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting Symptoms ............................................................................... 6-2
6.1
Electrical .................................................................................................. 6-4
6.2
Mechanical System ................................................................................. 6-7
6.3
Ironing Quality ....................................................................................... 6-10
6.4
Heating System ..................................................................................... 6-13
Flame Safeguard Operation .................................................................. 6-13
Pilot Ignition ........................................................................................... 6-15
Burner Ignition ....................................................................................... 6-18
Burner Operation ................................................................................... 6-20
6.5
Exhaust System .................................................................................... 6-24
TOC
INDEX
vii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 7
GO 20
REPAIR
7.1
Safety Considerations ............................................................................. 7-2
7.2
Parts Availability ...................................................................................... 7-3
7.3
Feed Section ........................................................................................... 7-4
Feed Ribbon Tension Adjustment............................................................ 7-4
Feed Ribbon Replacement ..................................................................... 7-6
Feed Ribbon Drive Roll Friction Material Replacement .......................... 7-8
Guide Tape Replacement ...................................................................... 7-10
Doffer Roll Cover Replacement............................................................. 7-13
Feed Table Alignment and Positioning .................................................. 7-15
7.4
Compression Roll .................................................................................. 7-17
Compression Roll Pressure Check ....................................................... 7-18
Compression Roll Pressure Adjustment ................................................ 7-19
Compression Roll Cover Replacement ................................................. 7-19
7.5
Ironing Section ...................................................................................... 7-24
Drive Chain Tension Adjustment ........................................................... 7-25
Ironing Cylinder Reconditioning ............................................................ 7-26
Ironing Cylinder Hardened Ring Replacement ...................................... 7-28
7.6
Burner System....................................................................................... 7-30
Pilot Gas/Air Mixture Check and Adjustment ........................................ 7-30
Burner Gas/Air Mixer Check and Adjustment ........................................ 7-33
Burner Gas/Air Mixer Cleaning ............................................................. 7-37
Gas Burner Removal/Replacement ...................................................... 7-39
Burner Tip Maintenance ........................................................................ 7-45
Heat Shield Replacement ..................................................................... 7-46
UV Flame Scanner Alignment Check/Adjustment ................................. 7-47
UV Flame Scanner Replacement .......................................................... 7-50
Touchless Temperature Sensor Replacement....................................... 7-51
Temperature Control Replacement ....................................................... 7-52
Repair topics continued on the next page...
viii
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Table of Contents
7.7
Return Section ...................................................................................... 7-53
Return Ribbon Tension Adjustment ....................................................... 7-53
Return Ribbon Replacement ................................................................. 7-55
Return Ribbon Drive Roll Friction Material Replacement ...................... 7-57
7.8
Delivery Section–Type R Unit ............................................................... 7-60
Delivery Ribbon Tension Adjustment ..................................................... 7-60
Delivery Ribbon Replacement ............................................................... 7-62
Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt Tension Adjustment .................................... 7-64
Delivery Ribbon Drive Roll Tracking Tape Replacement ....................... 7-64
7.9
Machine Speed Sensor ......................................................................... 7-66
Machine Speed Sensor Adjustment ...................................................... 7-66
Machine Speed Sensor Replacement ................................................... 7-67
TOC
INDEX
ix
GO 20
Introduction
Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the following sections:
1.1
Warranty
1.2
Scope of Manual
1.3
Safety
The GO 20TM Gas-Heated Flatwork Ironer (Figure 1-1) is a one-piece unit that dries and irons sheets,
pillowcases, table linen, and other types of ﬂatwork. The unit processes polyester/cotton blends, VISA®,
or all-cotton fabrics. The units are available with ironing cylinder lengths from 60” to 136” (1,525 mm
to 3,455 mm). Type F units discharge linen to a front receiving shelf. Type R models can be switched to
discharge linen to either the front or rear receiving shelf. This unit is not designed to process anything
other than ﬂatwork.
Like the rest of the CHICAGO® product line, the GO 20 is designed, manufactured, and assembled
in Chicago, Illinois. Before the CHICAGO® nameplate is afﬁxed to any machine, a ﬁnal inspection is
performed, including thorough testing under load conditions.
Any questions concerning the installation, operation, or repair of the GO 20 ironer should be directed
to your local authorized CHICAGO® dealer or:

Chicago Dryer Company
2200 North Pulaski Road
Chicago, Illinois 60639-3737

(773) 235-4430
Fax
(773) 235-4439
E-mail [email protected]
Figure 1-1: The GO 20 provides high quality ﬂatwork ﬁnishing.
TOC
INDEX
1-1
Introduction
GO 20
Chapter 4 - Preventive Maintenance
1.1 Warranty
A full page warranty statement is located at
the front of this instruction manual. Please take
the time to review this warranty and understand
its provisions.
1.2 Scope of the Manual
This instruction manual will help you keep
your CHICAGO ® product operating safely,
efﬁciently, and with minimum expense. Individual
chapters in this manual provide the necessary
information required for safe installation,
operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, and
repair of the GO 20 ironer.
Updates
Occasionally, new information about the unit
becomes available after the publication of this
manual. If you receive a CHICAGO® FYI Service
Bulletin pertaining to your unit, insert the bulletin
in the front of the manual.
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Provides an overview of the unit and its key
features, of this manual, and of important safety
features.
Chapter 2 - Installation
Describes recommended procedures for
determining a suitable location for the unit and
connecting the utilities. This chapter also includes
checkout procedures to ensure all systems are
working properly. Local requirements often vary,
so follow local codes at all times.
Chapter 3 - Operating Guidelines
Gives recommendations for operating the unit
at maximum efﬁciency. This chapter includes
instructions for operators and suggestions for
work organization.
1-2
TOC
Contains procedures for Daily, Weekly,
Monthly, and Semi-Annual maintenance.
Follow these procedures to keep the unit
operating safely and at maximum efﬁciency. A
Preventive Maintenance Schedule is located at
the front of this chapter.
Chapter 5 - Operating Principles
Describes the operation of the unit in detail. A
good understanding of this chapter will help avoid
operation errors and assist with troubleshooting
and maintenance.
Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
Contains issues, possible causes, and solutions
in all areas of operation.
Chapter 7 - Repair
Contains procedures for making adjustments,
repairs and parts replacement for the unit. Please
follow all safety recommendations carefully.
Parts List
Contains detailed drawings and part
speciﬁcations to assist in ordering replacement
parts. It is divided into views in which the parts
are grouped by function.
Schematics
Contains electrical drawings showing power
and motor circuits, control and interlock circuits,
gas control and safety circuits, and other relevant
drawings, including part speciﬁcations.
Appendix
Contains Technical Speciﬁcations, a Floor
Plan, and may also have manufacturer’s bulletins
for the unit.
INDEX
GO 20
Introduction
Maintenance and Repair
1.3 Safety
Safe operation and maintenance of the unit
must be the first priority of all supervisors,
operators, and maintenance personnel. Safety
begins with safe work habits. In addition, the
unit is equipped with built-in safety features for
protection.
WARNING
Always use extreme caution
when performing any
repairs that require the unit
to be operating.
Keep hands and loose
clothing from coming into
contact with any of the
moving parts.
Serious injury could result.
Safe Work Habits
During Daily Operation
•
Take the ﬂatwork only after it has
cleared the unit. Do not pull on the
ﬁnished ﬂatwork while it is still in the
machine.
•
Post the “Operator Safety” reminders
in a place where everyone will see it.
Read these reminders and follow the
recommendations.
•
Read and follow all safety labels.
•
Keep hands and clothing away from the
moving parts of the ironer while it is
operating.
•
•
•
Always turn off the unit before clearing
a jam.
Operate the unit only with all guards and
endframe doors in place and all safety
features operating correctly. Never
operate the unit with any safety features
bypassed.
When the unit is running,
one person should be ready
at a red safety STOP button
at all times to
stop the unit if necessary.
Before attempting any repair work, review
these safety steps and precautions to protect
yourself and the machine.
•
Safety should be the primary concern
of anyone performing corrective
maintenance.
•
Except where speciﬁcally directed, make
sure that the main disconnect switch to
incoming power is OFF and the machine
completely COOL.
•
It is recommended that all maintenance
procedures be handled by at least two
qualiﬁed persons. Using the “buddy
system” facilitates a quicker procedure
and decreases the risk of an accident.
•
Your site should have procedures that
comply with government regulations and
standards for equipment lockout/tagout
during maintenance and repair. Ask your
supervisor for speciﬁc information. It
is the users’ responsibility to make sure
they comply with all safety procedures.
Never stand, sit, or kneel on a receiving
shelf.
TOC
INDEX
1-3
Introduction
GO 20
Safety Features
WARNING
Know the proper
procedure for locking out
and tagging equipment
during repair procedures.
There are six categories of safety features:
Follow the rules of your work
site. Failure to do so could
result in serious injury.
Make sure the power is
disconnected before
servicing the unit.
•
Main Disconnect Switch
•
Safety Stop Buttons
•
Safety Guards
•
Safety Interlock Switches
•
Safety Labels
•
Safety Messages in this Manual
Main Disconnect Switch
The main disconnect switch is located on the
outside of right endframe door. When turned to
OFF, the main disconnect switch shuts off the
incoming electrical power to the unit.
Do not repair or correct any
condition without reading
and understanding the
REPAIR chapter.
Unless otherwise indicated, turn the main
disconnect switch to OFF before performing any
maintenance or repair work.
Only qualiﬁed personnel
should troubleshoot and
repair this unit.
For more information on operating the main
disconnect switch, refer to the INSTALLATION
chapter, Installation Procedures section,
Electrical Connection procedure.
Safety Stop Buttons
The preferred method of stopping the operation
of the unit is by pressing any of the four red
safety STOP buttons located at each corner of
the unit.
Pressing any of these buttons immediately
stops the heating system and all rotating parts.
1-4
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Introduction
Safety Guards
Safety Labels
A red safety ﬁnger guard covers the moving
parts at the front of the unit. It runs the entire
length of the unit’s working area and physically
restricts hands from coming into contact with
moving and heated parts. Pushing the safety
ﬁnger guard immediately stops the heating system
and all rotating parts.
WARNING (orange) and CAUTION (yellow)
labels (Figure 1-2) are placed at locations around
the unit to keep operators and maintenance
personnel alert in particular areas.
Both endframes and the rear of the unit are
covered with protective doors and panels to
prevent ﬁngers or hands from coming into contact
with moving and heated parts. Opening a door or
removing a panel immediately stops the heating
system and all rotating parts.
Safety Interlock Switches
WARNING labels alert personnel that
personal injury may result from not following
recommended procedures.
CAUTION labels alert personnel the unit
may be damaged if conditions, practices, or
procedures are not observed.
When training operators, take the time to
locate, review, and understand all areas where
labels are posted.
Safety interlock switches are located inside each
endframe and behind the protective backplate. If
any of these is opened or removed, the interlock
switch at that location is disconnected, all rotating
parts stop moving, and the heating system shuts
off.
NOTE: Do not remove safety
labels at any time. If a label
needs to be replaced, contact
Chicago Dryer Company for free
replacements.
The safety interlock switches are not intended
to lockout the unit. Site management is responsible
for developing and implementing lockout/tagout
procedures that comply with government
standards for use when servicing the unit.
Figure 1-2: Safety labels remind operators and maintenance personnel that care must be taken when working near
these areas.
TOC
INDEX
1-5
Introduction
GO 20
Safety Messages in this Manual
WARNING and CAUTION messages appear
in this manual to highlight essential safety
information.
WARNING messages alert personnel that
personal injury may result from not following
recommended procedures.
WARNING
Never operate the unit
unless all safety systems
are working correctly and all
access panels are in place.
BLACK BOX WARNING messages alert
personnel of the operating condition a unit
must be in before performing any procedure.
Personal injury may result from not following
recommended procedures.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
CAUTION messages alert personnel that the
unit may be damaged if conditions, practices,
or procedures are not observed.
CAUTION
Never use compressed air
on or around electronic
components.
1-6
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
Chapter 2
INSTALLATION
This chapter contains installation instructions for the GO 20TM and includes the following sections:
2.1
Site and Utility Requirements
2.2
Installation Procedures
2.3
Pre-Operational Checkout
The unit was tested under load conditions at the factory and inspected to ensure proper operation. It
was shipped in working condition and is completely assembled except for the receiving shelves and the
exhaust blower assembly. Sufﬁcient strapping, blocking, and bracing were provided to give reasonable
assurance that no shipping damage would occur.
NOTE:
If the unit is received in damaged condition, notify the carrier at once.
Chicago Dryer Company’s responsibility for shipping damage, other than the standard warranty,
ceases upon delivery to the carrier. For more information on the warranty, see the full page warranty
statement at the front of this manual.
TOC
INDEX
2-1
Installation
GO 20
2.1 Site and Utility
Requirements
Figure 2-1 shows the clearance requirements
for the unit. These are the minimum dimensions
recommended for efﬁcient production, service,
and maintenance access.
NOTE: The location of the unit
is extremely important.
It is strongly recommended that sufﬁcient
clear space be provided to allow for removal of
the gas burner assembly from the left endframe
for service, if necessary. If this clearance is not
possible, additional clearance to the front or rear
of the unit should be provided so the unit can be
rotated.
The site should have a relatively level,
sturdy floor capable of supporting the unit’s
weight without signiﬁcant ﬂexing. For weight
speciﬁcations, refer to the APPENDIX, Technical
Speciﬁcations.
Shimming of the endframes is generally
needed to level the unit. No special foundation,
floor grouting, or installation of anchors is
required. However, ﬂoor grouting or installation
of anchors may be required to comply with local
codes or aboard a ship.
A short run of 10” (254 mm) diameter vent
ducting must be supplied locally for the exhaust
blower and canopy. Adequate ventilation is
required. For more information within this chapter,
refer to the Installation Procedures section,
Exhaust Blower Installation procedure.
18”
(460 mm)
Ironing Cylinder Length
plus 24” (610 mm)
18”
(460 mm)
Front (Type F Unit)
60”
(1525 mm)
18”
(460 mm)
Ironing Cylinder Length
plus 24” (610 mm)
Front (Type R Unit)
Figure 2-1: Recommended clearances for installation.
2-2
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
The electrical requirements of the unit are
shown on the nameplate (Figure 2-2), located
on the back of the left endframe. Wiring and a
separate, fused disconnect switch of suitable size
must be locally supplied if local codes require
one.
Check local codes for clearance requirements
to any electrical box. For more information, refer
to the APPENDIX, Technical Speciﬁcations.
Each unit has speciﬁc gas requirements; verify
the local gas supply matches the gas requirements
specified on the unit’s nameplate. For more
information, refer to the APPENDIX, Technical
Speciﬁcations.
2.2 Installation
Procedures
Installation procedures of the unit include the
following.
•
Inspection
•
Uncrating and Positioning
•
Exhaust Blower Installation
•
Electrical Connection
•
Gas Connection
•
Receiving Shelf Set-Up
•
Protective Wrapper Removal
Inspection
Carefully inspect all shipments before they
are accepted from the carrier. Upon delivery,
make sure all items listed on the bill have been
received.
Any shortage, breakage, or damage noticed at
the time of delivery should be indicated on the
carrier’s freight bill and signed by the driver or
carrier’s representative.
Figure 2-2: The nameplate contains important
information.
Damage noticed after delivery should be
reported to the carrier at once. Request their
inspection of the shipment, and fill out a
concealed damage inspection report.
NOTE: N o t i f y t h e c a r r i e r
immediately if any damage has
been done to the unit during
shipment.
TOC
INDEX
2-3
Installation
GO 20
5. The endframes of the unit should rest
ﬁrmly on the ﬂoor. If necessary, add shims
to level the unit. Secure the unit to its
foundation if required by local codes or
conditions. For use aboard a ship, the unit
may be welded at the foot pads.
Uncrating and Positioning
Required Tools
Crowbar
Forklift
Screwdriver
Sledgehammer
Wire cutter/knife
Wrenches:
9/16” or 3/4”
6. After the unit is placed and secured, remove the plastic covers from the unit. Do
not remove the guide tapes or the brown
paper on the ironing cylinder.
1. Before unpacking the unit, make sure the
proposed site is acceptable and necessary
foundations have been prepared. For more
information within this chapter, refer to the
Site and Utility Requirements section.
7. Open both endframe doors. Remove the
following items (Figure 2-4):
• One grease gun (A)
• One Instruction Manual (B)
2. Remove the crating, strapping, and other
packaging materials except guide tapes
(Figure 2-3), the protective plastic cover
and the brown paper on the ironing cylinder. These protective coverings should
be left in place so the unit remains clean
until it is ready to use.
• One 14 oz. (400 g) cartridge of high
temperature grease (C)
• One 1 lb. (450 g) can of powdered
wax (D)
• One gas pressure regulator (E)
3. Remove the exhaust blower assembly
from the crate and set aside.
• One manual gas shut-off valve (F)
• One roll of Nomex tie tape (G)
4. Carefully remove the unit from the skids.
Be careful not to drop or twist the unit.
Lift the unit from the end only. Never lift
in the middle.
D
C
B
A
G
F
E
Figure 2-3: Don not remove the guide tapes when
removing the shipping materials.
Figure 2-4: Several items are supplied with each
unit.
2-4
INDEX
TOC
GO 20
Installation
Exhaust Blower Installation
The exhaust canopy includes a blower to expel
excess heated air and moisture. This system
contributes to the safety and comfort of operating
personnel, proper operation of the unit, and
reduction of maintenance time.
All labor and materials required for venting the
unit are a local responsibility. Comply with local
codes and regulations for proper installation.
The exhaust blower is designed for vertical
installation directly on top of the exhaust canopy
(Figure 2-5). Remote mounting is possible if there
are height limitations or to reduce noise.
It is particularly important that a straight
section of ductwork be attached directly to the
blower discharge (Figure 2-6, A).
When installed, a blower can be rotated up to
45° to the left or right of vertical to help make
this conﬁguration.
Ductwork
NOTE: Exceeding a 45° rotation
from vertical for the blower may
not maintain proper air movement
and may cause the sail switch to
operate incorrectly.
The 10” (254 mm) diameter ductwork for the
exhaust blower and all associated hardware for
the exhaust system must be locally supplied.
Follow local codes and good engineering
practice to design the exhaust system. Every
effort should be made to keep the ductwork as
short and straight as possible.
B
Check the canopy nameplate for the maximum
length of ductwork. For longer runs, a booster
blower may be required. Do not use elbows
greater than a 45° angle in the exhaust ducting.
If the blower vent ducting is to be connected
to a larger duct for outside venting, consult a
ventilation expert to ensure proper installation
and operation.
Locating the Exhaust Blower
Figure 2-5: Position each blower so that its input
is directly in line with the canopy
exhaust opening (B).
NOTE: Proper installation is
required for all warranties and
applicable certiﬁcation labels to be
valid. Call the factory if you have
any questions.
CAUTION
Do not change the mounting
position of the sail switch
and do not reverse the
blower housing.
TOC
C
A
A
B
Figure 2-6: The exhaust blower assemblies are
mounted on top of the exhaust canopy.
INDEX
2-5
Installation
GO 20
Ventilating the Work Area
Installing the Exhaust Blower
Required Tools
WARNING
The room housing the unit
must be provided with
adequate make-up air to
ensure operator safety as
well as the proper operation
of the ironing section and
other fuel-burning equipment
in the area.
Wrench: 9/16”
1. Remove the four bolts by the 10” (255
mm) opening at the center of the canopy
(Figure 2-5, A).
2. Position the exhaust blower so that its
input (Figure 2-6, B) directly aligns with
the canopy exhaust opening (Figure 2-5,
B). Secure the blower in place with the
bolts removed in Step 1.
3. For remote installation:
a) The exhaust blower assembly must be
mounted VERTICALLY within 15 ft
(5 m) of the unit to maintain proper
air movement.
b) Mount the exhaust blower assembly
using heavy anchors or mountings
screws.
c) Extend 10” (255 mm) round exhaust
ducting from the canopy discharge to
the exhaust blower inlet.
4. Extend the 10” (255 mm) round exhaust
ducting from the exhaust blower output
to the outside discharge point, making
the length of the run as short and straight
as possible.
A permanent fresh air supply or natural air
ventilation is required for the unit. In general, one
square inch is required for each 4,000 BTU/H up
to 400,000 BTU/H, plus one square inch for each
10,000 BTU/H in excess of 400,000 BTU/H.
Based on these standards, the makeup air
required for the unit is approximately as
follows:
•
60” cylinder: 53 sq. in. (340 cm2)
•
100” cylinder: 96 sq. in. (620 cm2)
•
120” cylinder: 102 sq. in. (660 cm2)
•
136” cylinder: 108 sq. in. (695 cm2)
However, local requirements may differ.
Check local regulations to determine the exact
makeup air requirements. Follow local codes at
all times.
The discharge must be properly designed to
maintain the required air ﬂow:
•
To ensure proper operation of the
exhaust canopy sail switch and the
correct removal of by-products, it is
recommended that the unit be connected
to a separate exhaust system.
•
The discharge must be protected from
backdrafts and precipitation.
•
No screen or ﬁlter should be connected
at the discharge unless it is connected to
a commercial lint collector.
2-6
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
Electrical Connection
Sail Switch and Exhaust Blower Motor
CAUTION
The incoming electric
power service must match
the speciﬁc electrical
requirements shown
on the nameplate.
The nameplate (Figure 2-2), located on the
back of the left endframe, shows the electrical
requirements of the unit. All labor and materials
required to bring the electrical service to the unit
are a local responsibility.
All electrical wiring must comply with local
codes, and a qualiﬁed electrician should size the
wiring.
Refer to the nameplate to determine the power
supply requirements. If high or low voltage
is suspected, check the electrical service to
determine the actual voltage conditions.
Required Tools
Screwdriver
Wire cutter/stripper
1. Open wiring box cover to the exhaust
blower (Figure 2-7, A).
2. Bring the wires from the exhaust blower
greenﬁeld (Figure 2-5, C) into the wiring
box and attach the greenﬁeld to the box.
3. Connect the three motor power wires and
grounding wire (Figure 2-7, B). Use the
provided wire nuts (C) to secure the connections.
4. Connect the two red sail switch wires
(Figure 2-7, D). Use the provided wire
nuts to secure the connections.
5. Replace the wiring box cover.
Improper or ﬂuctuating voltage will cause
the safety systems to interrupt the burner system
operation, possibly damage motors and other
electrical system components, and void the
factory warranty.
NOTE: A fused, main disconnect
switch has been incorporated into
the right endframe door. Check
local regulations to determine
whether a separate external fused
disconnect switch is still required.
Follow local codes at all times.
TOC
A
B
D
C
Figure 2-7: Both the exhaust blower motor and the
sail switch must be connected in the
wiring box.
INDEX
2-7
Installation
GO 20
6. The main disconnect switch is located on
the right endframe door. Turn it to the OFF
position (Figure 2-8, A).
10. Bring the greenﬁeld down the back of the
right endframe and secure to the connection point (Figure 2-10, B).
7. Turn the door latch (Figure 2-8, B) on the
right endframe door and open the door.
11. The electrical connections for the exhaust
blower motor are made in the terminal box
at the rear of the right endframe:
8. Remove the terminal box cover at the rear
of the right endframe (Figure 2-9).
9. The greenﬁeld for the sail switch and exhaust blower motor combination is routed
through clips on the top rear of the canopy
(Figure 2-10, A). If the exhaust blower
has been mounted remotely, the electrical
wires must be extended from the remote
location to the unit through conduit or
Greenﬁeld.
a) Connect the power wires for the exhaust blower motor to terminals L16,
L17, and L18 and the green fourth wire
to the grounding terminal G on the left
side of the strip (Figure 2-11, A).
b) Remove the jumper wire connected to
terminals 10 and 11 (B) and connect the
two red wires for the exhaust blower
sail switch.
B
A
C
A
B
Figure 2-8: The main disconnect switch is located
on the right endframe door.
Figure 2-10: Bring the exhaust blower greenﬁeld to
the right rear endframe.
C
A
B
Figure 2-9: Remove the terminal box cover to
wire the exhaust blower and incoming
power.
Figure 2-11: Terminal box connections.
2-8
INDEX
TOC
GO 20
Installation
Main Power Connection
WARNING
Only a qualiﬁed electrician
should make the electrical
connections to the unit.
Improper installation could
result in serious injury.
Required Tools
5. Remove the temporary wires and connect
the three power supply wires to terminals
L1, L2, and L3 and the green fourth wire
to the grounding terminal G on the right
side of the strip (Figure 2-11, C).
WARNING
The machine must be
properly grounded to ensure
operator safety.
6. Make sure the other end of the ground wire
is connected to a proper earth ground.
Screwdriver
Wire cutter/stripper
1. Bring the supply lines to the connection
point at the rear of the right endframe
(Figure 2-10, C). Use three wires for the
power supply and a green fourth wire for
ground.
7. After all electrical connections have been
made, replace the terminal box cover.
8. Close and secure the right endframe
door.
2. Extend the lines through conduit or greenﬁeld.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to start the
machine at this time. Leave
the disconnect switch OFF.
3. Temporary wires can be seen extending
from the connection point. Pull these
wires back through the hole and out of
the way.
4. Pull the external wiring through the hole
and secure the conduit or greenﬁeld to the
endframe.
TOC
INDEX
2-9
Installation
GO 20
Gas Connection
WARNING
Only qualiﬁed personnel
should make the gas
connections to the unit.
Improper installation could
result in serious injury.
CAUTION
The gas supply must
match the speciﬁc gas
requirements shown on
the nameplate.
The nameplate (Figure 2-2), located on the
back of the left endframe, specifies the gas
requirements of the unit. The unit requires gas
supplied at the correct pressure.
If the incoming gas pressure is too high or too
low, the unit will work improperly or not at all.
Conﬁrm the pressure of the gas supply meets the
requirements shown on the nameplate.
If a high pressure gas supply is used, an
additional regulator is required. For natural or
manufactured gas only, a high pressure gas supply
measures more than 11” (280 mm) of pressure
using a water column manometer connected
upstream of the supplied pressure regulator.
The gas connection to the unit is made at
the back of the left endframe, above the ﬂame
safeguard. A 1” (25 mm) gas inlet connection
(Figure 2-12) is provided to connect the incoming
gas line. The gas pressure regulator and manual
gas shut-off valve are supplied with the unit.
Other components must be locally supplied.
NOTE: Pipe thread compound is
required on all gas line connections
to ensure a leakproof installation.
Comply with local codes.
For more information on checking the pressure
of the gas supply within this chapter, refer to
the Pre-Operational Checkout section, Gas
Connection Checkout procedure, Gas Supply.
All labor and materials required for the gas
connection to the unit, except those items shipped
with the unit, are a local responsibility. Local
codes and regulations must be followed for proper
installation.
Figure 2-12: The 1” gas supply connection is at the
rear of the left endframe.
2-10
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
4. Connect a short nipple (C) to the inlet of
the regulator (B). Connect the female half
of union (D) to the nipple.
Regulator and Valve Installation
Required Tools
Pipe thread compound
Pipe wrench
The gas line to the unit should be routed so it
does not interfere with any service panel or block
access to the back of the unit.
1. Check all internal gas connections in the
unit. Tighten any unions that became loose
during shipment.
5. Connect short nipples (E and G) on either
side of gas valve (F). Connect the male
half of union (D) to one of the nipples, and
connect the branch of the tee (H) to the
other nipple. Install the tee vertically.
6. Attach a dirt leg nipple (I) with a cap (J)
to the lower run of the tee (H).
NOTE: A d i r t l e g i n t h e
gas line upstream of the gas
pressure regulator helps prevent
malfunctions resulting from rust,
grit, dirt, and other solid particles
in the gas supply.
2. Connect the short nipple (Figure 2-13,
A) to the coupling at the back of the left
endframe (Figure 2-12).
CAUTION
The regulator must be
installed so that the ﬂow of
gas is in the same direction
as the arrow on the regulator.
7. Connect the two halves of union (D).
The regulator must not be
installed upside down. The
regulator must be installed
horizontally.
9. Extend the gas supply line to the top of
the tee (H).
8. Make sure the manual gas valve (F) is
closed by rotating the handle to a 90° angle
from the direction of the gas pipe.
NOTE: If possible, extend the
gas supply line directly from the gas
meter to the unit without any other
equipment connected to this line.
3. Carefully note the direction of the arrow
on the regulator (Figure 2-13, B). At the
point of the arrow, connect the discharge
side of the regulator to nipple (A).
CAUTION
Do not open any gas
valves at this time.
Figure 2-13: Install the hardware for the gas
connection as shown.
TOC
INDEX
2-11
Installation
GO 20
Venting the Installed Regulator
Required Tools
The top of the gas regulator must “breathe” in
order to operate properly and safely. The regulator
is designed to have a small amount of air in the
top section.
Pipe thread compound
Pipe wrench
A vent restrictor (Figure 2-14, B) is provided
on the vent of the regulator to allow it to breathe
and limit any escape of gas if the regulator fails.
Depending on local codes, a vent pipe or tube may
be required in place of the vent restrictor.
Safety requires the diameter of the vent pipe
to vary depending upon its length. A short run of
pipe can have a smaller diameter than a longer
pipe. The pipe size should never be smaller than
3/8” (10 mm). Follow local code requirements
and good engineering practices.
The discharge end of the vent pipe must be
protected. A hood is needed to keep out rain,
snow, and ice, and a screen must be provided to
keep out insects that could clog the discharge.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Lockout the gas supply.
3. Remove the vent restrictor (Figure 2-14,
B) from the regulator (A).
4. Thread in any adapters required to increase
the diameter of the pipe.
5. Connect the rest of the piping to the discharge point.
6. Install a hood over the discharge of the
vent to keep out rain, snow, and ice.
7. Install a screen to prevent insects and
debris from clogging the discharge of the
vent.
Carefully consider the route the vent pipe
will have to follow from the back of the left
endframe to the ﬁnal discharge point. Make this
run as short and straight as possible. Be sure the
pipe is protected from any mechanical damage
or restriction.
Generally accepted codes require the discharge
to be placed away from windows and other
openings. Follow local codes for maximum
safety.
B
A
NOTE: R e p l a c e t h e v e n t
restrictor only if local codes require
a pipe vented to the outside.
Figure 2-14: The provided gas supply pressure
regulator (A) has a vent restrictor (B)
located on top for easy access.
2-12
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
Receiving Shelf Set-Up
The unit is shipped with the shelf in a down
position.
NOTE: This procedure should
be handled by at least two
qualiﬁed people as the receiving
shelf is awkward to handle. Using
the “buddy system” facilitates a
quicker procedure and decreases
the risk of an accident.
B
A
Required Tools
Wrench: 9/16”
1. Remove the bolts which hold the receiving shelf in position for shipping (Figure
2-15, A), and the second set of mounting
bolts (B).
Figure 2-15: The front receiving shelf must be
repositioned during installation.
2. Position the receiving shelf in its operating
position (Figure 2-16, A).
B
3. Secure in place using the bolts removed
in Step 1 (Figure 2-16, B).
4. For Type R units, repeat Steps 1 to 3 at the
rear of the unit.
B
A
Figure 2-16: Installing the receiving shelf in
operating position.
TOC
INDEX
2-13
Installation
GO 20
Protective Wrapper Removal
1. Carefully remove any remaining plastic
protective coverings from the unit.
2.3 Pre-Operational
Checkout
2. Remove any wooden wedges used to
hold the ironing cylinder in place during
shipment, and save the wedges for maintenance and repair work.
3. The brown paper covering the ironing
cylinder will be removed after machine
phasing is veriﬁed, and safety and control
functions have been checked.
NOTE: For more information
about the controls mentioned in
the following procedures, refer to
the OPERATING GUIDELINES
chapter, Operating Controls
section.
Before the unit can be placed into full
operation, perform the following procedures:
•
Security of Hardware
•
Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield Check
•
Electrical Connection Checkout
•
Safety Device and Control Function
Checkout
•
Ironing Cylinder Paper Removal
•
Gas Connection Checkout
•
Checkout Completion
•
Cleaning the Unit
WARNING
Do not put the unit into
service until all controls
are functioning properly.
Failure to do so may result in
serious injury to operators or
maintenance personnel.
2-14
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
Security of Hardware
Required Tools
Allen wrench set
Shim: 1 or 1.5 mm
Wrench set
1. Open both endframe doors.
2. In the right endframe, locate the machine
speed sensor (Figure 2-17). It is mounted
on a bracket very close to the teeth of the
ironing cylinder sprocket.
3. The unit will shut down after ﬁve seconds
if this sensor has moved from the correct
position.
Figure 2-17: The machine speed sensor must be
correctly positioned near the teeth of
the ironing cylinder sprocket.
4. Make sure the sensor is 0.04” to 0.06” (1 to
1.5 mm) from the teeth of the sprocket. For
information on adjusting the position of
the sensor, refer to the REPAIR chapter,
Machine Speed Sensor section Machine
Speed Sensor Adjustment procedure.
5. Check all hardware connections and tighten as necessary. Make sure all setscrews
are sufﬁciently tightened to hold their
respective components in position.
NOTE: To a l l o w f o r h e a t
expansion, bearings in the left
endframe (Figure 2-18) do not
have setscrews. Do NOT put
setscrews into these bearings.
However, any shaft collars do
have setscrews that must be
secured.
Figure 2-18: Do NOT put setscrews into left
endframe bearings.
6. Make sure all protective wrappers and
wooden wedges holding the ironing cylinder are removed. For more information,
refer to the Installation Procedures section, Final Protective Wrapper Removal
procedure.
7. Close and secure both endframe doors.
TOC
INDEX
2-15
Installation
GO 20
Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield Check
The heat shield must be placed properly
to allow the touchless temperature sensors to
measure the heated cylinder temperature without
being affected by the high heat energy radiating
from the burner ﬂame above.
NOTE: This procedure requires
at least two qualiﬁed personnel
to handle the backplate, which is
heavy and awkward to handle.
Required Tools
Flashlight
Wrench: 7/16”
1. Open the left endframe door.
2. Remove the protective backplate at the
rear of the unit. Make sure at least two
workers are available to handle the piece,
as it is heavy and awkward to handle.
3. Make sure that:
• The shield hangs freely and does not
rub or touch the inside of the ironing
cylinder (Figure 2-19).
Figure 2-19: The heat shield is located inside the
ironing cylinder.
• The clearance between the shield and
the cylinder wall measures approximately 3/8” to 1/2” (10 mm to 13
mm).
• The shield is suspended securely, and
the retainers are in place.
4. Replace the protective backplate and secure with the bolts removed in Step 2.
5. Close and secure the left endframe door.
2-16
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
Electrical Connection Checkout
After all utility connections are completed,
the unit can be energized and checked for proper
electrical operation.
All maintenance procedures should be handled
by at least two qualified persons. Using the
“buddy system” facilitates a quicker procedure
and decreases the risk of an accident.
Combustion Blower Motor Rotation
Checkout
Follow these steps to check for proper rotation
of the combustion blower motor. This will ensure
the ironer properly phased.
CAUTION
Do not use the feed ribbon
direction of travel to
indicate correctness of
the electrical connection.
The AC frequency inverter
controls direction. Use the
combustion blower motor
rotation as the indicator.
Required Tools
Screwdriver
1. Remove the combustion blower air ﬁlter
(Figure 2-20). Place in a safe location.
2. Make sure the gas supply to the unit is
turned OFF.
3. For Type R units, make sure the DELIVERY switch is in the center/off position.
4. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
Figure 2-20: The air ﬁlter for the combustion
blower motor is located on inside wall
of the left endframe.
5. Start the unit by pressing the green START
button in the right endframe control
panel.
6. IMMEDIATELY press a red safety STOP
button.
7. Note the combustion blower motor rotation as it slows down to a complete stop.
Verify the blower is turning clockwise, as
indicated by the arrow in Figure 2-21.
8. As appropriate:
• If the motor is rotating in the correct
direction, go to Step 17.
• If motor is not rotating in the correct
direction, go to the next step.
Figure 2-21: Combustion blower rotation should be
clockwise.
TOC
INDEX
2-17
Installation
GO 20
Exhaust Blower Motor Rotation
Checkout
WARNING
Only a qualiﬁed electrician
should make or correct any
electrical connections in or
to the unit.
Follow these steps to verify the correct rotation
of the exhaust blower motor.
1. For Type R units, make sure the DELIVERY switch is in the center/off position.
9. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
10. Make sure power is OFF upstream of the
ironer.
11. Open the right endframe door.
12. Remove the terminal box cover at the rear
of the right endframe.
13. Disconnect and interchange any two of
the three incoming electrical supply wires
(Figure 2-22, A).
2. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Start the unit by pressing the green START
button.
4. IMMEDIATELY press a red safety STOP
button.
5. Look at the vented cap of the exhaust
blower motor as it slows down. The rotation direction should be clockwise (Figure
2-23).
6. As appropriate:
NOTE: Make sure the electrical
supply wires are securely
connected.
• If the motor is rotating in the correct
direction, go to the next procedure.
• If the rotation of the motor is not in the
correct direction, go to the next step.
14. Replace the terminal box cover.
15. Close and secure the right endframe
door.
16. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to make sure the
combustion blower motor is rotating in
the correct direction.
17. Re-install the combustion blower air ﬁlter
removed in Step 1.
A
B
Figure 2-23: The exhaust blower motor should be
turning in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-22: Terminal box connections.
2-18
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
WARNING
Only a qualiﬁed electrician
should make or correct any
electrical connections in or
to the unit.
Safety Device and Control Function
Checkout
The machine can now be checked for proper
safety device and control function operation.
After that, the brown paper covering the ironing
cylinder can be removed.
7. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
NOTE: W o r k w i t h a n o t h e r
person. The “buddy system” is
the safest system.
8. Open the right endframe door.
9. Remove the terminal box cover at the rear
of the right endframe.
10. Disconnect and interchange any two of
the three exhaust blower electrical supply
wires connected to left side of the terminal
block (Figure 2-22, B).
All test procedures should be handled by at
least two qualiﬁed people. Using the “buddy
system” facilitates a quicker procedure and
decreases the risk of an accident.
WARNING
Do not place the machine
into service until all controls
are functioning properly.
Failure to follow this rule
may cause serious injury
to operators or
maintenance personnel.
NOTE: Make sure the electrical
supply wires are securely
connected.
11. Replace the terminal box cover.
12. Close and secure the right endframe
door.
13. Repeat Steps 2 to 5 to make sure the
exhaust blower motor is rotating in the
correct direction.
TOC
INDEX
2-19
Installation
GO 20
Safety Device Check
Control Function Check
1. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
1. For Type R units, make sure the DELIVERY switch is in the center/off position.
2. For Type R units, make sure the DELIVERY switch (Figure 2-24, F) is in the
center/off position.
2. Press the green START button.
3. Press the green START button (Figure
2-24, E). All rotating and conveying elements of the machine should operate.
4. There are four red safety STOP buttons on
the unit, one on each endframe of the machine (Figures 2-24, D).
• With the unit running, test each button
in turn to make sure the unit comes to
a complete stop.
• Restart the unit after each red safety
STOP button test.
5. Restart the unit.
G
4. Make sure the ironing cylinder, feed ribbons, and return ribbons change speed
as the knob is turned. The unit display
(Figure 2-24, A) will show the increase
in speed.
5. Turn the SPEED knob counterclockwise
to decrease the speed.
6. Make sure the ironing cylinder, feed ribbons, and return ribbons change speed as
the knob is turned. The unit display will
show the decrease in speed.
7. Set the ironer to its slowest setting.
6. Test the red safety ﬁnger guard at the front
of the ironer (Figure 2-24, G) by pushing
in on it. Make sure that all moving elements stop.
A
3. Turn the SPEED knob (Figure 2-24, B)
clockwise to increase the speed.
C
B
8. Press a red safety STOP button.
WARNING
Make sure the SPEED control
knob is turned to the slowest
speed before using the JOG
switch. Failure to do so may
result in unsafe conditions or
damage to the unit.
9. Turn the JOG switch (Figure 2-24, C) to
JOG FWD for a few seconds and release
it. JOG FWD causes the rotating elements
to move forward slowly. When released,
the JOG switch springs back to the center
position and the rotating elements of the
unit stop.
D
E
F
Figure 2-24: All rotating parts should stop when
you press the red safety ﬁnger guard.
2-20
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
10. Turn the JOG switch to JOG REV for a few
seconds and release it. JOG REV causes
the rotating elements to move slowly in
reverse. When released, the JOG switch
springs back to the center position and the
rotating elements of the unit stop.
Ironing Cylinder Paper Removal
11. For Type R units, make sure the DELIVERY switch is in the center/off position.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp objects
to remove the brown paper
protecting the ironing
cylinder. Avoid scratching
the cylinder surface during
paper removal.
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and COOL.
Use extreme caution.
12. Press the green START button. Make sure
the delivery ribbons are not moving.
13. Turn the DELIVERY switch to the
FRONT position. Make sure the delivery
ribbons (Figure 2-25) move toward the
front of the unit.
14. Turn the DELIVERY switch to the REAR
position. Make sure the delivery ribbons
move toward the rear of the unit.
1. Remove the brown paper from the ironing
cylinder. Tear away a strip across the full
length at the front of the cylinder, under
the feed table.
15. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
2. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Turn the SPEED knob fully counterclockwise to set the machine to its slowest
speed.
4. For Type R units, make sure the DELIVERY switch is in the FRONT position.
5. Press the green START button.
WARNING
Never attempt to remove
debris from the cylinder
while it is moving.
6. Allow the paper to discharge onto the front
receiving shelf. Wait until it is clear of the
machine before removing.
Delivery
Ribbons
7. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
Figure 2-25: The delivery ribbons should rotate
in the correct direction when the
DELIVERY switch is turned to the
FRONT or REAR position.
TOC
8. Check to make sure that all paper has been
removed.
9. Repeat Steps 2 to 8 as necessary.
INDEX
2-21
Installation
GO 20
Gas Connection Checkout
For Natural or Manufactured Gas:
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Gas Supply
Required Tools
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
Water column manometer
The burner system requires gas supplied at
the correct pressure. If the gas pressure supplied
to the unit is either too high or too low, the
burner system will work improperly or not at all.
Conﬁrm the gas pressure meets the requirements
shown on the nameplate of the unit.
WARNING
Do not adjust or test gas
components unless you are
qualiﬁed to do so.
2. Connect a U-tube or other water column
manometer upstream of the supplied pressure regulator, and measure the static gas
pressure.
WARNING
Only a qualiﬁed and
experienced Combustion
Service Technician should
install and adjust any gas
components.
3. If the pressure is:
• Less than 5” (130 mm): Burner may
not work reliably. Correct the gas pressure before proceeding.
The gas supply must
match the speciﬁc gas
requirements shown on
the nameplate.
• 5” - 11” (130 - 280 mm): Proper operating range.
It is important to check the available gas
pressure to the unit during periods of peak
demand by other gas-heated equipment in the
laundry room or elsewhere at the facility. Gas
pressure to the unit may be reduced signiﬁcantly
at these times, which will interfere with the proper
operation of the burner.
• More than 11” (280 mm): This is a
high pressure gas supply. Installation of
an additional regulator is necessary:
a) The additional regulator must be
mounted horizontally.
b) Connect the manometer between
the two regulators.
c) Measure the incoming gas pressure
to the supplied regulator to make
sure it is now in the proper range.
Follow the procedure below for the type of
gas being used—natural/manufactured gas, or
liqueﬁed petroleum gas.
• For information on the maximum operating inlet pressure, refer to the APPENDIX, Technical Speciﬁcations.
2-22
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
Inspect Gas Piping
For Liqueﬁed Petroleum Gas
(Propane, Butane):
Required Tools
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Make sure the gas tank used to feed the
unit has sufﬁcient capacity to meet demand. For speciﬁc requirements, refer
to the APPENDIX, Technical Speciﬁcations.
Leak detection equipment or
soap & water solution
Pipe wrench
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
WARNING
Only qualiﬁed personnel
should adjust or service gas
controls or components.
It is essential to check all
internal and external gas
connections for leakage
before proceeding.
1. Make sure the external manual gas supply
valve is turned off and the power is turned
OFF at the main disconnect switch.
2. Prepare to inspect the piping using combustible gas leak detection equipment or
a soap and water solution.
CAUTION
Be sure to check all unions
which may have loosened
during shipment.
3. Check and tighten all connections that may
have loosened during shipment or were not
properly secured during installation.
4. Turn on the gas supply. Check all internal
and external connections with combustible
gas leak detector, or apply a soap and water
solution to all joints to make sure there
are no leaks.
5. If a leak is found, turn off the gas supply.
Tighten the leaky connection.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until all joints are
tight and veriﬁed leak free.
TOC
INDEX
2-23
Installation
GO 20
Operating Gas Pressure Check and
Ignition Test
Required Tools
Allen wrench: 3/16”
Pipe thread compound
Screwdriver
Water column manometer
1. Make sure the external manual gas supply
valve is turned off.
2. Make sure the GAS switch on the left
endframe control panel is turned to OFF
(Figure 2-26, A).
3. Make sure power is turned OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
5. The ironer will not operate while a safety
microswitch is open. As a temporary
measure during this work, defeat the
door interlock switch by pulling out on
the plunger.
6. Remove the upstream plug at the back of
the ﬁrst gas valve at the pilot Tee ﬁtting
(Figure 2-27).
4. Open the left endframe door.
7. Connect a water column manometer to the
gas valve with a 1/8” pipe ﬁtting.
NOTE: The manometer will
now be able to indicate the gas
pressure immediately downstream
of the installed regulator.
D
E
8. After the manometer is connected,
turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
F
B
C
A
G
Figure 2-27: The gas tap for operating pressure is
on the back side of the ﬁrst gas valve.
Figure 2-26: Left endframe control panel.
2-24
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
NOTE: If the external manual
gas valve is opened too quickly, a
higher initial pressure reading will
be observed.
14. Immediately check the manometer
pressure indication.
During ignition and burner operation,
there must be a sufﬁcient, steady gas pressure of 3 1/2” to 5 1/2” (90 mm to 140
mm) for natural gas, or 10” to 11” (250
mm to 280 mm) for LP gas as indicated
on the manometer downstream from the
regulator.
9. Open the external manual gas supply
valve slowly. After a short while, the
downstream pressure at the manometer
should equalize and indicate the same gas
pressure as that measured earlier upstream
of the installed regulator. For more information within this section, refer to the Gas
Supply sub-section.
• If the gas pressure is not within
these limits, recheck the supply
pressure. For more information,
refer to the Gas Supply subsection
within this section.
10. Press the green START button and turn the
SPEED knob to the slowest speed.
• If needed, adjust the downstream
gas pressure from the installed
regulator using the procedure in
Step 15.
11. Turn the GAS switch to ON. The indicator lamp (Figure 2-26, B) above the GAS
switch lights.
12. Set the TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(Figure 2-26, C) to 300º F (150º C). The
combustion blower should already be
blowing air into the burner system.
• If the gas pressure is within limits,
go to Step 16.
15. To adjust the gas pressure allowed by the
installed regulator:
13. After a few seconds, the IGNITION
indicator lamp (Figure 2-26, D) should
light; and, after a brief delay, the PILOT
and MAIN VALVE indicator lamps (E, F)
should light. There may be a click as the
pilot and main valves open.
NOTE: The regulator pressure
setting should only be adjusted
after the upstream gas pressure
is acceptable.
a) Turn the GAS switch to OFF.
A
b) Press a red safety STOP button.
B
c) Turn power OFF at the main disconnect switch.
d) Remove the cap on the installed regulator (Figure 2-28, A) to access the adjustment screw (B).
e) Turn the adjustment screw clockwise/
in to increase pressure or counterclockwise/out to decrease pressure.
f) Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch and repeat Steps 10 to 14 of the
main procedure.
Figure 2-28: The gas pressure adjustment screw is
located inside the installed regulator.
TOC
INDEX
2-25
Installation
GO 20
20. After the burner ﬂame is successfully lit,
the IGNITION and PILOT indicator lamps
turn off.
NOTE: During installation, it is
common for the pilot ﬂame to not
appear due to excess air in the
gas line. This air is purged through
successive ignition attempts.
21. Immediately check the manometer pressure indication.
16. Within ﬁve seconds after the valves open,
there should be a ﬂame at the end of the
burner.
17. If the ﬂame is not present, the FLAME
SAFEGUARD indicator lamp (Figure
2-26, G) lights, the ﬂame safeguard SYSTEM ERROR indicator lamp lights, and
the heating system shuts down.
18. Reset the ﬂame safeguard by pressing the
ﬂame safeguard RESET button (Figure
2-29).
19. Wait one minute and then repeat Steps 10
to 18 until the ﬂame is present.
22. There must be sufﬁcient, steady gas pressure of 3 1/2” to 5 1/2” (90 mm to 140
mm) for natural gas, or 10” to 11” (250
to 280 mm) for LP gas as indicated on
the manometer. If the gas pressure is not
within limits, go to Step 15 to adjust the
installed regulator.
NOTE: I f i g n i t i o n o f t h e
burner is not successful after
several attempts, refer to the
TROUBLESHOOTING chapter.
If the problem cannot be solved,
contact a local CHICAGO ®
distributor or Chicago Dryer
C o m p a n y ’s f a c t o r y s e r v i c e
department.
WARNING
The burner ﬂame needs to
be adjusted if the following
unsafe conditions exist, and
be prepared to reduce gas
ﬂow immediately if:
• Flames are unsteady
Figure 2-29: The RESET button is located on the
ﬂame safeguard.
• Flames are below brass
burner tips
• Lines of blue ﬂame
throughout width of
ironing cylinder
Figure 2-30: A normal burner ﬂame should extend
to the top of the ironing cylinder and
mushroom slightly.
2-26
TOC
23. Observe the appearance of the flames
along the burner once the burner ﬂame
is maintained. A normal ﬂame extends to
the top of the inside of the cylinder and
mushrooms slightly (Figure 2-30).
INDEX
GO 20
Installation
24. If the ﬂame does not match the above description, or if there are gas vapor ﬂames
away from the burner, such as below the
burner, the gas/air mixer needs to be adjusted. For more information, refer to the
REPAIR chapter, Burner System section,
Gas/Air Mixer Adjustment procedure.
25. When the burner is operating correctly,
turn the GAS switch to OFF. The burner
ﬂames go out.
26. Press any of the red safety STOP buttons
to stop the unit.
27. Turn off the gas supply at the external
manual gas valve.
28. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
29. Disconnect the manometer from the gas
valve (Figure 2-27). Reinstall the plug
removed in Step 6 into the pilot Tee ﬁtting.
Use pipe thread compound to avoid leaks.
Teﬂon tape is not recommended.
30. Push in the interlock switch plunger.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
Checkout Completion
If any of the checkout steps are unsuccessful,
refer to the TROUBLESHOOTING chapter for
additional information.
If the problem cannot be determined/solved,
contact your local CHICAGO® distributor or
Chicago Dryer Company’s factory service
department.
Cleaning the Unit
During shipment and installation of the unit,
dirt or other contaminants may accumulate that
will soil or mark processed ﬂatwork.
Clean the unit by running old pieces of ﬂatwork
using the entire width of the unit.
For information on processing ﬂatwork, refer
to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter,
Daily Operating Procedures section, Flatwork
Handling.
After completing all checkout procedures,
the ironing cylinder can be waxed. For more
information, refer to the OPERATING
GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating
Procedures section, Waxing procedure.
31. Close and secure the left endframe door.
TOC
INDEX
2-27
GO 20
Operating Guidelines
Chapter 3
OPERATING GUIDELINES
In order to operate the GO 20TM safely and with maximum efﬁciency, it is necessary to become familiar
with the following guidelines.
3.1
Safety Features
3.2
Operating Controls
3.3
Daily Operating Procedures
3.4
Operating Techniques
NOTE: It is extremely important that the daily operation of the unit be properly
supervised at all times. All operating and maintenance personnel must read,
understand, and adhere to the Operator Safety Reminders for CHICAGO® Flatwork
Ironer bulletin (Figure 3-1). This bulletin must be posted at the operating site.
Figure 3-1: The Operator Safety Reminders for CHICAGO® Flatwork Ironer bulletins must be read by all
personnel.
TOC
INDEX
3-1
Operating Guidelines
GO 20
Safety Stop Buttons
3.1 Safety Features
The unit is manufactured with several built-in
features to promote safety and proper operating
procedures.
WARNING
Never bypass any of the
safety devices.
Serious Injury Could Result.
Safety Guards
There are ﬁve general categories of safety
features:
•
Main Disconnect Switch
•
Safety Stop Buttons
•
Safety Guards
•
Safety Interlock Switches
•
Safety Labels
The preferred method of stopping the operation
of the unit is by pressing any of the four red safety
STOP buttons located at each corner of the unit
(Figure 3-3, A). Pressing any of these buttons
immediately stops the heating system and all
rotating parts.
A red safety finger guard (Figure 3-3, B)
covers the moving parts at the front of the unit.
It runs the entire length of the unit’s working area
and physically restricts hands from coming into
contact with moving and heated parts. Pushing the
safety ﬁnger guard immediately stops the heating
system and all rotating parts.
Main Disconnect Switch
CAUTION
The main disconnect switch
must be set to “O” (OFF)
when opening and closing
the endframe door.
The main disconnect switch (Figure 3-2) is
located on the right endframe door. When turned
to “O” (horizontal position), the main disconnect
switch is off, and shuts off the incoming electrical
power to the unit.
Figure 3-2: The main disconnect switch is located
on the right endframe door.
B
Unless otherwise indicated, turn the main
disconnect switch to off before performing any
maintenance or repair work.
For more information on operating the main
disconnect switch, refer to the INSTALLATION
chapter, Installation Procedures section,
Electrical Connection procedure.
A
Figure 3-3: The red safety STOP buttons (A) and
red safety ﬁnger guard (B) provide
immediate shut-down capability.
3-2
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Guidelines
Both endframes and the rear of the unit are
covered with protective doors and panels to
prevent ﬁngers or hands from coming into contact
with moving and heated parts. Opening a door or
removing a panel immediately stops the heating
system and all rotating parts.
Safety Interlock Switches
Safety interlock switches (Figure 3-4) are
located inside each endframe and behind the
protective backplate. If any of these is opened
or removed, the interlock switch at that location
is disconnected, all rotating parts stop moving,
and the heating system shuts off.
Figure 3-4: Never operate the unit unless all
safety interlock switches are working
correctly.
These switches are not intended to lockout
the unit. Site management is responsible for
developing and implementing procedures that
follow government standards for lockout/tagout
when servicing the unit.
Safety Labels
WARNING (orange) and CAUTION (yellow)
labels are placed at locations around the unit to
keep operators and maintenance personnel alert
in particular areas (Figure 3-5).
WARNING labels alert personnel that
personal injury may result from not following
recommended procedures.
CAUTION labels alert personnel the unit
may be damaged if conditions, practices, or
procedures are not observed.
When training operators, take the time to
review, understand, and locate all areas where
labels are posted.
NOTE: Do not remove safety
labels at any time. If a label
needs to be replaced, contact
Chicago Dryer Company for free
replacements.
Figure 3-5: Safety labels remind operators and
maintenance personnel that care must be
taken when working near these areas.
TOC
INDEX
3-3
Operating Guidelines
GO 20
SPEED display (A):
3.2 Operating Controls
All operating controls are externally mounted
on the front of the endframes and clearly marked
with functional names. References to these
functions are capitalized in this instruction manual
for easy identiﬁcation. Detailed descriptions are
given in the following paragraphs.
Right Endframe Controls
The following operating controls (Figure 3-6)
are located at the front of the right endframe:
Shows the approximate speed, in feet per
minute, of ﬂatwork traveling through the unit.
MOTOR PROTECTOR indicator lamp
(B):
Lights when there power is supplied through
the motor protectors and main drive motor’s
internal temperature limit.
LEFT SIDE INTERLOCKS & STOP
BUTTONS indicator lamp (C):
•
SPEED display (A)
•
MOTOR PROTECTOR indicator lamp
(B)
•
LEFT SIDE INTERLOCKS & STOP
BUTTONS indicator lamp (C)
•
RIGHT SIDE INTERLOCKS & STOP
BUTTONS indicator lamp (D)
RIGHT SIDE INTERLOCKS & STOP
BUTTONS indicator lamp (D):
•
SPEED knob (E)
•
JOG switch (F)
•
STOP button (G)
•
START button (H)
Lights when power is supplied through the
interlock switches and stop buttons on the right
endframe and protective panel on the rear of the
unit.
•
DELIVERY FRONT/REAR switch
(Type R units) (I)
Lights when power is supplied through the
interlock switches and stop buttons on the left
endframe and to the safety guard on the front of
the unit.
B
A
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Figure 3-6: Right endframe control panel.
3-4
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Guidelines
SPEED knob (E):
STOP button (G):
Controls the speed of the unit. Turning the
SPEED knob clockwise causes ﬂatwork to be
processed at a faster speed. Turning the SPEED
knob counterclockwise causes ﬂatwork to be
processed at a slower speed.
Provided to help ensure operator safety and
to prevent damage to the unit. There are four red
safety STOP buttons—one on the front and back
of each endframe.
For more information within this chapter on
determining the proper operating speeds for
different types of ﬂatwork, refer to the Operating
Techniques section, Processing Standards
procedure.
JOG switch (F):
CAUTION
Turn the SPEED knob to the
slowest speed before using
the JOG switch. Failure to
do so may result in unsafe
conditions or damage to
the unit.
Moves the ironing cylinder and all ribbons
forward and backward in small increments.
Turning the JOG switch to JOG FWD will move
these elements forward a few inches.
Turning the JOG switch to JOG REV will
move these elements in reverse a few inches.
When released, the JOG switch will spring back
to the center position for normal start-up and
operation.
This feature should only be used in the
following situations:
•
To clear jams
•
For maintenance at the slowest speed
•
For repair at the slowest speed
TOC
Pressing any of the four red safety STOP
buttons immediately stops the heating system
and all rotating parts, leaving the unit in the
standby state.
START button (H):
Begins the start-up and operation of the unit.
A green indicator lamp, located under the switch
surface, lights when the green START button
is pushed.
This indicates that power is connected to the
motors. All rotating parts, including the ironing
cylinder, feed ribbons, return ribbons, and
delivery ribbons (Type R units) begin to move.
DELIVERY FRONT/REAR switch (Type R
units) (I):
Used to direct the dried and ironed ﬂatwork
to the front or rear of the unit. Finished ﬂatwork
can be delivered to the front receiving shelf for
hand folding by setting the DELIVERY switch
to FRONT.
If a separate automatic folding unit has been
installed at the rear of the unit, the folder is fed
by setting the DELIVERY switch to REAR.
To prevent delivery ribbons from moving,
turn the DELIVERY switch to the center/off
position.
INDEX
3-5
Operating Guidelines
GO 20
Left Endframe Controls
IGNITION indicator lamp (A):
The following operating controls and indicator
lamps are located at the front of the left endframe
(Figure 3-7).
Lights when the pilot valve and ignition are
powered.
•
IGNITION indicator lamp (A)
•
PILOT VALVE indicator lamp (B)
•
MAIN VALVE indicator lamp (C)
•
EXHAUST AIR FLOW indicator lamp
(D)
•
COMBUSTION AIR FLOW indicator
lamp (E)
•
HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT
ALARM indicator lamp (F)
PILOT VALVE indicator lamp (B):
•
HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT RESET
button (G)
•
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (H)
Lights when the pilot gas valve opens and
begins supplying gas to the pilot; and the ignition
transformer is energized.
•
GAS ON/OFF switch with indicator
lamp (I)
•
FLAME SAFEGUARD ALARM
indicator lamp (J)
•
STOP button (K)
NOTE: The Ignition, Pilot Gas
valve and Main valve indicators all
light at the same time. The Ignition
and Pilot Gas valve indicators go
out after the burner is lit, while the
Main valve indicator stays lit while
the burner is ﬁring.
MAIN VALVE indicator lamp (C):
Lights when the main gas valve opens and
begins supplying gas to the burner.
EXHAUST AIR FLOW indicator lamp (D)
Lights when the exhaust air ﬂow is proved.
A
B
COMBUSTION AIR FLOW indicator lamp
(E)
C
Lights when the combustion air flow is
proved.
D
E
G
F
HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT ALARM
indicator lamp (F):
Lights if the temperature in the ironing cylinder
exceeds the maximum set in the high temperature
limit switch, approximately 425° F (220° C).
J
H
As a safety precaution, when the HIGH LIMIT
indicator lamp is lit, the gas system shuts down
and will not function.
I
K
Figure 3-7: Left endframe control panel.
3-6
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Guidelines
HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT RESET
button (G):
GAS ON/OFF switch with indicator lamp
(I):
Resets the high limit control after an overtemperature has caused the gas system to shut
down and not function.
Turning the GAS switch to ON starts the
ignition cycle and enables the thermostat to
control the heating process. When the GAS
switch is turned to ON, the indicator lamp above
the switch lights.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (H):
Sets the desired operating temperature of the
burner system which heats the ironing cylinder.
When power is turned ON at the main disconnect
switch, the display will light, and the ON indicator
will be lit.
To set the desired temperature, ﬁrst turn the GAS
switch ON. Then, use the increase (▲) or decrease
(▼) buttons on the TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
The display shows the SET temperature in
green, and the ACTUAL temperature of the unit,
measured by the touchless temperature sensor,
in red.
The HEAT indicator will light when the
ACTUAL temperature is lower than the SET
temperature. The TEMPERATURE CONTROL
operates from 0 to 400° F. The SEL button is not
operative.
For more information within this chapter on
determining the proper operating temperatures for
different types of ﬂatwork, refer to the Operating
Techniques section, Processing Standards
procedure.
TOC
Turning the GAS switch to OFF disables the
heating process and closes the open gas valve.
This should be done during a faulty ignition cycle
or to manually shut off the burner ﬂame.
FLAME SAFEGUARD ALARM indicator
lamp (J):
Lights if the ignition sequence is faulty and
the ﬂame safeguard goes into “fail-safe” mode.
As a safety precaution, when the FLAME
SAFEGUARD indicator lamp is lit, the gas
system will not function.
STOP button (K):
Functions the same as the red safety STOP
buttons on the right endframe. For more
information within this section, refer to Right
Endframe Controls.
INDEX
3-7
Operating Guidelines
GO 20
Start-Up
3.3 Daily Operating
Procedures
In the daily operation of the unit, it is desirable
to follow consistent operational procedures.
By training operators to follow the same set of
guidelines for daily procedures, operator safety
and efﬁciency are maximized.
Daily routines include:
•
Start-Up
•
Waxing
•
Flatwork Handling
•
Clearing a Jam Safely
•
Shut-Down
The following steps are suggested for starting
the unit at the beginning of each day.
1. Perform all of the daily preventive maintenance procedures, except for waxing the
ironing cylinder. For more information,
refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Daily PM section.
2. Have ﬂatwork fully washed and extracted,
sorted, and ready to process.
3. Make sure the GAS switch is turned to
OFF.
4. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
For information on processing speciﬁc types
of flatwork within this chapter, refer to the
Operating Techniques section, Processing
Standards procedure.
WARNING
Never run a unit when
ribbons are missing or
broken. Serious damage and
injury could result.
5. Press the green START button. The
button’s green lamp should light and the
rotating elements begin moving.
6. Turn the SPEED knob to the slowest
speed.
7. Make sure the ironing cylinder, feed, return, and delivery ribbons (Type R units)
are moving, and the EXHAUST AIR
FLOW and COMBUSTION AIR FLOW
indicator lamps are lit.
8. Perform a safety check:
• Press a red safety STOP button. All
moving parts should stop.
• Restart the unit.
• Test each of the 3 remaining red safety
STOP buttons in the same manner.
• Restart the unit.
• Press the red safety ﬁnger guard at
the front of the unit (Figure 3-3, B).
All moving parts should stop and an
error message should display in the
unit display.
9. Restart the unit.
3-8
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Guidelines
10. Turn the GAS switch to ON.
Waxing
11. Adjust the TEMPERATURE control to
waxing temperature, approximately 300°
F (150° C).
12. After 4 seconds, listen for sounds indicating the pilot and main valve are energized
and the main burner is igniting. Ignition
and ﬂame proving should be accomplished
within 5 seconds.
13. If ignition is not accomplished within ﬁve
seconds and the FLAME SAFEGUARD
indicator lamp lights:
NOTE: Ironers with chrome
cylinders do not need waxing.
Daily waxing of the ironing cylinder ensures it
is coated correctly, allowing the ﬂatwork to slide
easily across the cylinder surface.
This produces the best flatwork finish,
eliminates creases, prolongs return ribbon life,
and protects the ﬂatwork from sticking to the
ironing cylinder.
a) Turn the GAS switch to OFF.
Required Tools
b) Reset the ﬂame safeguard by pressing
the flame safeguard RESET button
(Figure 3-8).
Chicago Dryer Company powdered
wax or pure Karagami equivalent
Waxing cloth
c) Wait one minute and then retry.
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and HOT.
Use extreme caution.
14. Wait approximately 5-10 minutes for the
ironing cylinder to reach proper waxing
temperature.
NOTE: If a folder is attached to
the unit, turn OFF the static bar.
1. If the unit is not running, perform the
Start-Up procedure at the beginning of
this section.
2. For Type R units, turn the DELIVERY
switch to FRONT.
3. Turn the SPEED knob to a low speed.
4. Set the ironer temperature to 300° F (150°
C).
NOTE: Use only a standard
sheet or table cloth dedicated
solely to waxing the ironing
cylinder.
Figure 3-8: The RESET button is located on the
ﬂame safeguard.
TOC
INDEX
3-9
Operating Guidelines
GO 20
5. Check the condition of the waxing cloth.
If the waxing cloth feels:
• Stiff when it is cool, it is sufﬁciently
waxed. Skip to Step 7.
• Limp when it is cool, more wax is
needed. Go to the next step.
WARNING
The waxing cloth will be hot
when it comes out of the unit
and may burn your hands.
Protect your hands.
7. Holding the waxing cloth tight from side to
side, feed the folded end into the ironer.
CAUTION
Abrasive chest type cleaners,
pads, and paste wax can
permanently damage the
ironing cylinder and return
ribbons, and void the factory
warranty.
• While feeding, lift the cloth off of the
feed ribbons to keep them as wax free
as possible.
• Also hold the trailing edge of the waxing cloth so wax does not drop onto the
canvas feed ribbons.
• Run it through the ironer two or three
times.
Never sprinkle wax directly
on ribbons, compression
roll, or ironing cylinder. This
will shorten the expected life
of the return ribbons.
WARNING
The waxing cloth must
always be cool when it is
stored. A hot, folded waxing
cloth can catch ﬁre by
spontaneous combustion.
DO NOT over wax. The return
ribbon drive roll cover will
become smooth and the
return ribbons will slip.
6. Use a waxing cloth the width of the ironer
and 90” (230 cm) long:
8. When done with waxing, hang up the waxing cloth to cool. Extend it completely; do
not fold it up.
a) Make a fold in the middle of the piece
but do not complete the fold.
9. After the waxing cloth is completely cool,
store it in an appropriate manner.
b) On the inside section of the sheet, apply powdered wax, using from 1/4 to
1/2 lb (115-230 g). Use only Chicago
Dryer Company powdered wax (or
pure Karagami equivalent).
c) Spread the wax in a thin, uniform
layer.
d) Complete the fold, laying the unwaxed
portion over the waxed portion.
3-10
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Guidelines
Flatwork Handling
Ironing Cylinder
It is very important how operators use the unit.
By following these guidelines, operators can
increase productivity, extend the life of the unit,
and most importantly-promote safety.
•
Use the entire length of the heated ironing
cylinder. This is especially important
when ﬁnishing pillowcases.
•
Work from side to side to prevent dirt
and heat buildup at the ends of the
ironing cylinder. This preserves padding
life.
•
Rewax the ironing cylinder before
ironing thicker ﬂatwork such as
tablecloths. This will result in a better
ﬁnish quality.
Safety
•
Remove the ﬂatwork only after it has
cleared the unit. Do not pull on the
ﬁnished ﬂatwork while still in the unit.
•
Parts of the unit can be hotter than 300°
F (150° C). Severe burns can result.
Maximum Efﬁciency
•
Follow the posted standards for the type
of ﬂatwork being processed.
•
Place the ﬂatwork straight and square on
the feed ribbons.
•
Stretch the ﬂatwork slightly to the sides
when feeding the ﬂatwork into the unit.
•
Do not process ﬂatwork with frayed
edges or loose threads as these can cause
jams.
•
Feed pillowcases lengthwise with the
closed end ﬁrst.
•
Leave a small gap between each item
being processed when feeding ﬂatwork.
•
Two operators should feed and receive
ﬂatwork. While one operator is manually
folding ﬂatwork, the other can prepare
the next piece of ﬂatwork for processing.
TOC
INDEX
3-11
Operating Guidelines
GO 20
5. Turn the GAS switch to OFF.
Clearing a Jam Safely
6. If the jammed linen can be removed easily,
clear the jam.
WARNING
The ironing cylinder will burn
you on contact. Never reach in,
on, or near the ironing cylinder.
7. If the jammed ﬂatwork cannot be removed
easily:
If a piece of ﬂatwork becomes jammed, use the
following procedure to clear the jam safely:
1. Stop feeding ﬂatwork.
2. Wait for ﬂatwork already in the unit to
exit.
3. Turn SPEED knob to the slowest speed.
WARNING
DO NOT attempt to remove
jammed linen while unit is
jogging or moving.
Serious Injury Could Result.
b) Turn the JOG switch forward or backward and jog the unit briefly, then
pause 2-3 seconds before jogging the
unit again.
c) Continue jogging the unit forward or
backward in brief increments until the
jammed ﬂatwork can be safely and
easily removed.
d) Do not start the unit until the jam is
cleared.
4. Stop the unit by pressing a red safety
STOP button.
3-12
a) Announce the unit is being started.
Make sure everyone is a safe distance
away from the unit.
TOC
NOTE: I f j a m m i n g o c c u r s
regularly, tell the maintenance or
service people so they can ﬁx the
problem.
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Guidelines
Shut-Down
The following steps are suggested for shutting
down the unit at the end of each day:
3.4 Operating Techniques
The following factors are involved in producing
the best ﬂatwork ﬁnish possible with the unit:
1. Turn the GAS switch to OFF.
•
Conditioning Flatwork Before Ironing
2. Set the TEMPERATURE CONTROL to
zero.
•
Unit Settings
•
Processing Standards
3. On Type R units, turn the DELIVERY
lever to the center OFF position.
•
Maximum Productivity
4. Turn the SPEED knob to the slowest
speed.
5. Allow the unit to run for approximately
20 minutes to cool down.
6. Stop the unit by pressing any of the red
safety STOP buttons.
7. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
WARNING
Never leave the unit
unattended without ﬁrst
following the Shut-Down
procedure above.
The conditioning of ﬂatwork before processing
and the control settings on the unit will affect the
processing standards. The processing standards
ensure that ﬂatwork is processed in a consistent
and efﬁcient manner.
Conditioning Flatwork Before Ironing
There are several characteristics of ﬂatwork
which are determined by processes before drying
and ironing, including:
•
Wash Load
•
Final Rinse
•
Moisture Retention
•
Timing Between Washing and Ironing
Wash Load
Temporary Shut-Down
At times it is necessary for operators to shut
down the unit for a short time. The following
steps are suggested for temporarily stopping
operation.
1. Turn the GAS switch to OFF and set the
TEMPERATURE CONTROL to zero.
WARNING
Never leave the
unit unattended while
it is running.
2. Turn the SPEED knob to the slowest
speed.
TOC
The wash load should consist of flatwork
with the same fabric blend. Mixing different
fabric blends in the same wash load can create
inconsistent results because different fabrics
retain different levels of moisture during the
extraction process. Such mixing can also create
excess lint on ﬂatwork. The unit works most
efﬁciently when one type of ﬂatwork is processed
at a time.
CAUTION
Starch only according to
a proper starch program.
Improper levels of starch will
build a residue on the ironing
surface and reduce the unit’s
ability to ﬁnish ﬂatwork.
INDEX
3-13
Operating Guidelines
GO 20
Final Rinse
The final rinse can affect the quality of
ﬂatwork ﬁnishing. It is important all ﬂatwork be
thoroughly rinsed before entering the unit to keep
ﬂatwork from sticking to the ironing cylinder. A
pH level of 7.2 is recommended.
Add a fabric softener to prevent static
electricity from causing the ﬂatwork to stick.
Never use starch in the ﬁnal rinse.
A warm rinse allows more water to be extracted
from the material. Thus, the unit needs to remove
less moisture from the ﬂatwork. Additionally,
with warm ﬂatwork, the unit does not have to
work as hard to keep at set temperature. This
produces flatwork with a dry, high quality
ﬁnish—more efﬁciently.
Moisture Retention
Another important factor in delivering a high
quality ﬁnish is the amount of moisture retained
(MR) in the ﬂatwork. The correct MR helps to
determine the ironing speed and temperature—
drying ﬂatwork after just one run through the
ironer.
A few important factors in moisture retention
(MR) before ironing are:
•
Wash formula–write down the standard
for consistency
•
Extraction process–write down the
standard for consistency
•
Tumble dry condition time–write down
the standard for consistency
•
Type of fabric–higher percentage of
cotton, the more moisture retained
•
Thickness of fabric–thinner material
retains less moisture
With too little moisture, ﬂatwork can cause
static buildup problems. If too much moisture
is left in the ﬂatwork, the ironing section must
work harder in order to process the work, by
either slowing down the speed or increasing the
temperature.
3-14
TOC
After extraction, the optimum MR is 30% 35% for polyester/cotton fabrics and 45% - 50%
for cotton fabrics.
1. Use a precise scale to measure the “still
wet, but extracted” ﬂatwork; then weigh
again after the same ﬂatwork is “completely dry”.
2. Subtract the weight of the “completely
dry” flatwork from the “still wet, but
extracted” ﬂatwork. Divide the weight difference by the “completely dry” ﬂatwork
weight. Finally, multiply the resulting
weight by 100 to determine the MR percentage.
The optimum MR after ironing is 4% or less.
Ironing is not intended to remove 100% of the
moisture from the ﬂatwork. Therefore, feel the
ﬂatwork when it ﬁrst comes out of the unit; there
should be a slight moisture content.
Allow the ﬂatwork to sit for a few minutes to
allow excess steam and heat to dissipate in the
air. Check the ﬂatwork again; it should now feel
dry to the touch.
If the ﬂatwork does not feel dry or to improve
the quality of finish and productivity, repeat
the Conditioning Flatwork Before Ironing
procedures.
Timing Between Washing and Ironing
The amount of time delayed between washing
and ironing/drying reduces the ﬂatwork ﬁnish
quality due to fabric cooling and MR. Flatwork
needs to be ironed directly from the washer/
extractor whenever possible.
Start up the unit when the second load of wash
is entering the ﬁnal extract cycle. Flatwork may
be put into carts from the washer and sorted out
as desired.
Be aware that ﬂatwork that sits overnight or
longer will have uneven MR, and the operating
speed must be adjusted accordingly.
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Guidelines
Unit Settings
Ironing Speed
The following three unit settings affect the
ﬁnal ﬂatwork ﬁnish:
The ironing speed should be standardized
based on MR, fabric content and thickness for
ﬂatwork to be properly dried and ironed.
•
Ironing Cylinder Temperature
•
Ironing Speed
•
Compression Roll Pressure
This information contributes to achieving the
best quality ﬁnished ﬂatwork. Once processing
tests have been run on the different types of
ﬂatwork, write down the results on the Operating
Standards form and post by the unit.
Thin, single layer material can be processed
at higher speeds. Double thickness items such as
pillowcases, and thicker material like tabletop
ﬂatwork must be ﬁnished at lower speeds.
NOTE: Processing excessively
dry ﬂatwork at too low a speed
may result in scorched ﬂatwork.
Excessively moist flatwork,
processed at too high a speed will
result in a damp, poorly ﬁnished
piece of ﬂatwork.
Refer to the APPENDIX, Operating Standard
form, for an authorized person to photocopy,
indicate, approve, and post the settings per
ﬂatwork type.
NOTE: It is important to write
down the ironing settings that
produce the best quality finish
for each type of ﬂatwork being
processed. These standards
should be posted. This removes
“guesswork” from the daily routine
and maximizes the efﬁciency and
consistency of the entire laundry
operation. Consistent washing
and ironing habits are the key to
quality results.
Compression Roll Pressure
Another factor dictating the amount of residual
moisture removed in the ﬂatwork is the compression
roll pressure. The pressure also sets the calendering
effect—the stretching and sliding of the ﬂatwork
to remove wrinkles and achieve a better quality
ﬁnish.
For more information, refer to the REPAIR
chapter, Compression Roll section, Compression
Roll Pressure Adjustment procedure.
Ironing Cylinder Temperature
In general, the lower the operating temperature,
the slower the unit must be run in order to produce
a quality ﬂatwork ﬁnish.
TOC
INDEX
3-15
Operating Guidelines
GO 20
5. Set the temperature of the TEMPERATURE CONTROL for the fabric being
processed.
Processing Standards
CAUTION
This unit is NOT designed
to process folded ﬂatwork.
Processing folded ﬂatwork
could void the
manufacturers warranty.
• VISA®: 300-325° F (149-163° C)
• All cotton or polyester/cotton blends:
325-370° F (163-188° C).
Ironing System
For each type of ﬂatwork processed, follow
the steps below. Once the best temperature
and speed settings for that ﬂatwork type have
been found, the standards should be posted and
followed by all operators.
1. The wash loads should consist of one type
of ﬂatwork only.
2. Use the posted Operating Standards form
for unit settings per fabric type. For more
information within this section, refer to
the Unit Settings subsection.
3. The ﬁnal rinse should be as warm as possible. Add a fabric softener. Never use
starch in the ﬁnal rinse.
4. Flatwork should be ironed directly
from the washer/extractor. For more
information within this section, refer
to the Conditioning Flatwork Before
Ironing subsection, Timing Between
Washing and Ironing information.
CAUTION
This unit is not designed to
process nylon or rubberized
fabrics. Processing these
fabrics could result in a ﬁre
or damage the ribbons and
ironing cylinder surface.
3-16
CAUTION
VISA® material has a high
polyester content and can
melt when ironed at too high
a temperature, or too slow
a speed. This can cause
damage to the return ribbons
and require a thorough
cleaning of the
ironing cylinder.
6. Turn the SPEED knob to the fastest
speed.
7. Process a few pieces of the ﬂatwork. The
ﬂatwork might feel slightly damp when
it ﬁrst comes out of the unit. Set the item
aside and feel it again in ﬁve minutes. The
ﬂatwork should feel dry.
8. If the ﬂatwork is still damp, decrease the
speed slightly.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 until the ﬁnish on the
ﬂatwork is correct.
10. This is the standard speed for processing
this type of ﬂatwork. For more information within this section, refer to the Unit
Settings procedure, Ironing Speed information.
Maximum Productivity
It is important to follow consistent, standard
operating procedures in the daily operation of the
unit for both safety and productivity. Operator
safety and efﬁciency are maximized by training
operators to always follow the same set of
guidelines for daily procedures.
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Chapter 4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Various components of the GO 20TM require scheduled attention to ensure long life and trouble-free
operation. The Preventive Maintenance (PM) Schedule below and on the next page outlines all of the
PM tasks required at regular intervals. All tasks are the responsibility of maintenance personnel unless
otherwise indicated.
Since operators run the machines, they should be trained on site to visually inspect common areas
daily and notify maintenance personnel when problems are found, such as worn or broken ribbons.
All PM intervals are based on 8-hour/day operation. Increase the PM frequency for two- or three-shift
operations.
Preventive maintenance should only be done when the power is turned OFF at the main disconnect
switch. Speciﬁc preventive maintenance that requires the unit to be running should be done with extreme
caution and attention to detail.
FREQUENCY OF TASKS BASED ON HOURS OF OPERATION
Preventive Maintenance Tasks
Operator
Maintenance
Ironer Condition
4.1 Daily
(8 Hours)
PM
Task
Tables
Watch and Listen for Anything Abnormal
X
Running/Hot
Daily,
General Weekly
CleanlinessTasks
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Clean Combustion Blower Air Filter
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check Guide Tapes
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check Safety Equipment
X
Wax Ironing Cylinder
X
X
Running/Cool
Running/Hot
4.2 Weekly (50 hours)
Check Compression Roll Cover
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check Ironing Cylinder
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Clean Behind Service Panels
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt (Type R Unit)
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check and Clean Inverter
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Grease “Weekly” Bearings
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Oil Roll Bearing Pivots
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Clean Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check and Clean Motors
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check and Clean Sail Switch & Exhaust Blower Wheel
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check and Clean Combustion Blower Wheel
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check Ribbon Condition
X
Running/Cool
TOC
INDEX
4-1
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
FREQUENCY OF TASKS BASED ON HOURS OF OPERATION
Preventive Maintenance Tasks
Operator
Maintenance
Ironer Condition
4.3 Monthly (200 hours)
Grease Bearings
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check Setscrews
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Scanner
Monthly,
Semi-Annual Tasks
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Oil Drive Chain and Tension Springs
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check Compression Roll Pressure
X
Running/Cool
Check Gas Regulator Vent
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check Gas Pressure
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Change Oil in Delivery Drive Gear Reduction Unit
(Type R Unit)
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check and Clean Spark Plug & Pilot Assembly
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Check Mechanical and Electrical Connections
X
Off/Disconnect Power/Cool
Clean Touchless Temperature Sensors and UV Flame
4.4 Semi-Annual (1000 Hours)
4-2
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
4.1 Daily PM (8 Hours)
WARNING
Do not repair or correct any
of these conditions without
reading and understanding
the Repair chapter.
Only qualiﬁed personnel
should troubleshoot and
repair this unit.
Make sure the unit is
completely cooled down and
power is turned OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
Follow lockout/tagout
procedures approved for
your site. Follow local
regulations. Failure to do so
could result in serious injury.
Watch and Listen for Anything
Abnormal
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING.
Use extreme caution.
Operators and maintenance personnel should
learn to understand the usual sights and sounds
around a unit. For example, when there is a
noise at a roll, the bearings may be worn or other
mechanical problems may exist. Stop the unit
immediately and follow-up with the necessary
maintenance or repair.
General Cleanliness
Required Tools
Vacuum cleaner or compressed air
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
It is important that lint, dirt, dust, and
foreign material do not enter the unit during
operation. General cleanliness prevents damage to
components, jamming, and soiling of ﬂatwork.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Use a vacuum cleaner or compressed air
supply to clean the following:
• Front receiving shelf
• Rear receiving shelf (Type R units)
• All conveyor ribbons
• General components as required
CAUTION
Never use compressed
air on or around electronic
components. Damage
can result.
TOC
INDEX
4-3
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
Clean Combustion Blower Air Filter
Each day it is critical to inspect and clean
the combustion blower air ﬁlter. Daily PM is
required to prevent lint and dust from entering
the burner.
Required Tools
Check Guide Tapes
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Guide tapes are used to prevent ﬂatwork from
sticking to the compression roll.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
Compressed air or
mild detergent solution
2. Inspect for broken or missing guide tapes
and for wear or fraying of the edges.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
3. Make sure the ends of the guide tapes are
properly stapled together.
CAUTION
Operation of the unit without
the ﬁlter could result in
failure of ignition, incomplete
combustion, and reduced
burner efﬁciency.
4. Replace any guide tapes that are damaged,
broken, or missing. For more information,
refer to the REPAIR chapter, Feed Section section, Guide Tape Replacement
procedure.
Foreign material entering
the burner because of dirty
ﬁlters or no ﬁlters at all
can clog the burner tips,
requiring a lengthy cleaning
process including the
complete removal
of the burner.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Remove the combustion blower air ﬁlter
from the inside wall of the left endframe
(Figure 4-1).
3. Blow out the ﬁlter with compressed air,
against the direction of the air ﬂow, or
soak the ﬁlter in a mild detergent and
water solution.
4. Install the ﬁlter. Make sure it is installed
with the handle and polyester screen toward the outside of the ﬁlter housing.
4-4
TOC
Figure 4-1: The air ﬁlter for the combustion
blower motor is located on the inside
wall of the left endframe.
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Check Safety Equipment
4.2 Weekly PM (50 Hours)
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and COOL.
Use extreme caution.
WARNING
Do not repair or correct any
of these conditions without
reading and understanding
the Repair chapter.
The machine should never be operated without
all safety guards in place and all safety devices
working properly.
Only qualiﬁed personnel
should troubleshoot and
repair this unit.
Check that all four red safety STOP buttons,
and the red safety finger guard all bring the
operation of the machine to a complete halt. For
more information, refer to the OPERATING
GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating
Procedures section, Start-Up procedure.
Make sure the unit is
completely cooled down and
power is turned OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
NOTE: Repair any faulty safety
devices before continuing to
operate the unit.
Follow lockout/tagout
procedures approved for
your site. Follow local
regulations. Failure to do so
could result in serious injury.
Wax Ironing Cylinder
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and HOT.
Use extreme caution.
Daily waxing of the ironing cylinder is
necessary to produce a ﬁner ﬂatwork ﬁnish, to
prolong return ribbon life, and to prevent the
ﬂatwork from sticking to the ironing cylinder.
For waxing instructions, refer to the
OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Daily
Operating Procedures section, Waxing
procedure.
TOC
INDEX
4-5
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
Check Compression Roll Cover
Check Ironing Cylinder
Inspect the compression roll pad and cover to
lengthen the life of these materials.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Performance of the unit depends on the
condition of the ironing cylinder.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Inspect the compression roll to conﬁrm
that the roll pad and cover are securely
held against the roll.
2. Inspect the cylinder by carefully looking
under the feed ribbons at the front of the
unit.
3. Make sure none of the tie tapes are missing
to prevent the cover from ﬂapping during
operation.
3. Check for buildup of chemicals or debris
which discolor the cylinder.
4. Make sure the tie tapes are positioned at
equal intervals across the length of the
roll.
4-6
TOC
4. For information on restoring the ﬁne polished ﬁnish of the cylinder, refer to the
REPAIR chapter, Ironing Section section, Ironing Cylinder Reconditioning
procedure.
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Clean Behind Service Panels
Check Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt
(Type R Unit)
Required Tools
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Clean cloth
Wrench: 7/16”
Vacuum cleaner
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
CAUTION
Never use compressed air
on or around electronic
components. Damage
can result.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open and clean the inside and outside
surfaces of both endframe doors.
3. Remove and clean the rear protective
backplate. Make sure at least two workers
are available to handle this piece as it is
heavy and awkward to handle.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open the right endframe door.
3. Locate the delivery ribbon drive belt (Figure 4-2) and examine its condition.
4. Check to see that it is properly tensioned.
If necessary, refer to the REPAIR chapter,
Delivery Section–Type R Unit section,
Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt Tension
Adjustment procedure.
5. Check for general wear and fraying. Replace the belt if it is cracked or otherwise
damaged.
6. Close and secure the right endframe
door.
4. Clean any lint and wax vapor buildup
inside the unit.
5. Clean the top and bottom surface of the
feed table and the inside surface of the
exhaust canopy.
6. Replace the protective backplate.
7. Close and secure both endframe doors.
Figure 4-2: In Type R units, the delivery drive belt
is located in the right endframe.
TOC
INDEX
4-7
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
Check and Clean Inverter
Check and clean the inverter and its cooling
ﬁns (Figure 4-3) weekly with a vacuum cleaner.
Failure to do so may void your warranty.
Required Tools
Vacuum cleaner
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open the right endframe door and locate
the main drive motor inverter (Figure
4-3).
CAUTION
Failure to clean the inverter
and its cooling ﬁns could
void the warranty.
Figure 4-3: Check and clean the inverter and its
cooling ﬁns weekly.
Never use compressed air
on or around electronic
components. Doing so may
damage them.
3. Check and clean the inverter and its cooling ﬁns with a vacuum cleaner.
4. Make sure the dust covers are in place on
both sides of the inverter.
5. Close and secure the right endframe
door.
4-8
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Grease “Weekly” Bearings
The grease ﬁttings for the ironing cylinder
bearing (Figure 4-4) in the right endframe,
cam follower bearings (Figure 4-5) in the left
endframe, and compression roll bearings (Figure
4-6) in both endframes, are marked with yellow
“GREASE WEEKLY” tags and need to be
greased weekly.
Other bearings that are identiﬁed with the yellow
“GREASE” tags should also be greased weekly if
the unit is continuously run for long periods.
A special high temperature lubricant is required
to properly grease all bearings. A cartridge of
Shell Darina® SD 2 grease is initially supplied
with the unit. It is important that only this grease
or its equivalent be used.
Figure 4-4: Add grease weekly to the ﬁtting for the
ironing cylinder bearing in the right
endframe.
Use of unsuitable grease can cause bearing
lockup or failure due to heat from the ironing
section. Problems can also result if the new grease
is incompatible with the grease that is already in
the bearings.
Failure to use the correct lubricant will void
the factory warranty.
CAUTION
Before using a grease
other than Shell Darina®
SD 2, check with the
factory service department
to verify that the grease
meets speciﬁcations and is
compatible with the grease
already in the bearings.
Figure 4-5: Add grease weekly to the ﬁttings on
the cam follower bearings in the left
endframe.
If any other grease is being considered:
1. Check with the Chicago Dryer Company
service department to verify that the grease
meets speciﬁcations and is compatible
with the grease already in the bearings.
2. Follow directions on the grease gun packaging for other ﬁlling methods (dispenser,
suction).
TOC
Figure 4-6: Add grease weekly to the ﬁttings for
the compression roll bearing in each
endframe.
INDEX
4-9
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
To ﬁll the grease gun:
To use the grease gun:
1. Remove the barrel (Figure 4-7, B) from
the end cap (A) by twisting it counterclockwise.
2. Hold the barrel (Figure 4-7, B). Pull the
plunger rod handle (C) all the way back
and lock it in the keyhole slot at the end
of the barrel.
3. Remove the plastic cap from the grease
cartridge and smooth the inside edge for
easy entry of the plunger.
4. Insert the opened edge of the cartridge
completely into the barrel. Remove the
ﬂip-top seal from the exposed cartridge
end.
5. Screw the end cap (Figure 4-7, A) onto the
barrel (B) by twisting it clockwise.
6. Release the plunger rod (Figure 4-7, C)
from the keyhole slot and push it into the
cartridge.
7. To vent air pockets, loosen the end cap
(Figure 4-7, A) 1/2 turn and tighten.
Required Tools
Clean cloth
Grease gun
Shell Darina® SD 2 or equivalent
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
3. Wipe the old grease from the bearings.
4. Insert the grease gun nozzle ﬁrmly onto
the grease ﬁtting.
CAUTION
Over-lubrication will destroy
the bearing seals and cause
premature failure.
5. Add lubricant slowly until a slight bead of
lubricant forms at the seal. As soon as the
bead forms, stop adding grease to prevent
damage from over-lubrication.
CAUTION
Failure to wipe off excess
lubricant will cause lint to
adhere to the bearings and
may cause premature failure.
A
B
6. Immediately wipe off the grease from
the bearing. Failure to do so can cause
lint accumulation and premature bearing
failure.
C
7. Leave the endframe doors open for the
next procedure.
Figure 4-7: A grease gun is supplied with each unit.
4-10
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Oil Roll Bearing Pivots
The bearing pivots for the compression roll
(Figure 4-8) inside each endframe, return ribbon
guide assembly roll (Figure 4-9) outside each rear
endframe, and doffer roll (Figure 4-10) outside
each front endframe, need to be oiled weekly to
allow the bearings to pivot smoothly.
Required Tools
Cleaning cloth
SAE 90 grade oil
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Figure 4-8: Oil the pivot for the compression roll
bearing in each endframe weekly.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. If necessary, open both endframe doors.
3. Use a clean cloth to remove any lint or
buildup from each of the bearings and
pivots.
4. Add a few drops of a good quality SAE 90
grade oil to each of the pivots.
5. Manually raise and lower the compression
roll, the return ribbon guide assembly roll,
and the doffer roll to lubricate the pivots.
6. Wipe off any excess oil from each of the
pivots.
Figure 4-9: The return ribbon guide assembly
bearing pivots at the rear of the ironer.
7. Close and secure both endframe doors.
Figure 4-10: The doffer roll bearing pivots at the
front of the ironer.
TOC
INDEX
4-11
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
Clean Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield
NOTE: This procedure requires
at least two qualiﬁed personnel
to handle the backplate, which is
heavy and awkward to handle.
Required Tools
Compressed air or vacuum cleaner
Flashlight
Wrench: 7/16”
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
Figure 4-11: Remove the protective backplate in
order to clean the heat shield inside
the ironing cylinder.
2. Open the left endframe door.
3. Remove the protective backplate at the
rear of the unit (Figure 4-11). Make sure
at least two workers are available to handle
the piece, as it is heavy and awkward to
handle.
4. Check for lint buildup on the heat shield
(Figure 4-12) inside both ends of the ironing cylinder.
5. Remove any lint buildup by blowing off
or vacuuming the heat shield.
6. Replace the protective backplate and secure with the bolts removed in Step 3.
Figure 4-12: The heat shield is located inside the
ironing cylinder.
7. Close and secure the left endframe door.
4-12
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Check and Clean Motors
The drive motor, combustion blower motor,
exhaust blower motor, and delivery drive motor
(Type R unit) require weekly cleaning to ensure
proper operation.
Required Tools
Check and Clean Sail Switch and
Exhaust Blower Wheel
The sail switch (Figure 4-14) must be cleaned
in order for it to operate properly when the
exhaust blower is on. The exhaust blower wheel
needs to be inspected and cleaned after the sail
switch is removed.
Vacuum cleaner
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
3. Use a vacuum to clean out lint and dirt
from the intake side (Figure 4-13) of each
speciﬁed motor.
CAUTION
Operation of the unit with
foreign material (lint, threads,
wax particles, hair, etc.) in
the blower wheel between
the blades can cause
overheating, especially
of the endframe controls,
and possible premature
component failure.
4. Make sure the motors are free to turn
without excessive binding.
Required Tools
Clean cloth
Flashlight
Screwdriver
Vacuum cleaner
5. Close and secure both endframe doors.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Figure 4-13: Removing lint and dirt from the intake
side of the motor ensures proper
operation.
TOC
Figure 4-14: The sail switch must be cleaned to
ensure proper operation.
INDEX
4-13
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
Check and Clean Combustion
Blower Wheel
2. Remove the sail switch cover.
The combustion blower wheel is located inside
the left endframe. Weekly inspection and cleaning
is required to ensure proper operation.
3. Remove the two screws holding the sail
switch in position and gently pull it out
from the exhaust blower. Be careful not
to disconnect any wires.
4. Remove lint and other dirt with a clean
cloth or, if necessary, compressed air.
Required Tools
Screwdriver
Vacuum cleaner
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
5. Inspect the inside of the blower housing
with the help of a light to observe any
lint buildup between the blower wheel
blades.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
6. Remove the inlet elbow (Figure 4-15)
from the blower.
2. Remove the combustion blower air ﬁlter
to access the blower wheel.
3. Open the left endframe door.
NOTE: Fibers left on the blower
wheel allow lint and foreign material
to accumulate more frequently.
4. Remove the combustion blower air outlet
tube (Figure 4-16) to access the combustion blower.
7. Use a vacuum to remove lint and foreign
material from the blower. Make sure the
blower wheel is free to turn without excessive binding.
8. Position the inlet elbow on the blower.
9. Reinstall the sail switch and the cover.
5. Use a vacuum to remove lint and foreign
material from around and between the
blower wheel blades.
6. Make sure the blower wheel is free to turn
without excessive binding.
7. Replace the combustion blower air ﬁlter
and the air outlet tube.
8. Close and secure the left endframe door.
Figure 4-15: The inlet elbow must be removed to
access the exhaust blower wheel.
Figure 4-16: Clean the combustion blower wheel to
ensure proper operation.
4-14
INDEX
TOC
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Check Ribbon Condition
Preshrunk canvas is used for the feed ribbons
and delivery ribbons (Type R unit). High
temperature synthetic material is used for the
return ribbons.
4.3 Monthly PM
(200 Hours)
WARNING
Do not repair or correct any
of these conditions without
reading and understanding
the Repair chapter.
NOTE: Ribbons that break
should be replaced immediately.
Return ribbons move and hold the
linen in proper contact with the
heated cylinder, ensuring quality
ﬂatwork ﬁnish.
Only qualiﬁed personnel
should troubleshoot and
repair this unit.
Make sure the unit is
completely cooled down and
power is turned OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and COOL.
Use extreme caution.
WARNING
Never touch any part of
the unit while it is moving.
Serious injury could result.
Follow lockout/tagout
procedures approved for
your site. Follow local
regulations. Failure to do so
could result in serious injury.
1. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Press the green START button.
3. Check all ribbons for proper placement,
tracking, tension (no visual sagging), and
general condition (smoothness, scorching,
fraying, and tears).
4. For more information on adjusting and
replacing various ribbons, refer to the
REPAIR chapter and the appropriate
section.
TOC
INDEX
4-15
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
Grease Bearings
Check Setscrews
Setscrews are used to secure sprockets,
bearings, pulleys, and other rotating parts.
Required Tools
Clean cloth
Grease gun
Shell Darina® SD 2 or equivalent
Required Tools
Allen wrench set
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Bearings marked with yellow “GREASE”
tags are not subjected to as much stress and high
temperatures as the bearings that require weekly
greasing.
Therefore, the bearings with yellow “GREASE”
tags do not need to be greased as frequently as
the bearings with yellow “GREASE WEEKLY”
tags. Use the same high temperature grease for
all the bearings.
For instructions within this chapter on greasing
the bearings labeled with yellow “GREASE”
tags, refer to the Weekly PM section, Grease
“Weekly” Bearings procedure.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
3. Make sure all setscrews are correctly
tightened.
NOTE: To a l l o w f o r h e a t
expansion, bearings in the left
endframe (Figure 4-17) do not
have setscrews. Do NOT put
setscrews into these bearings.
4. Close and secure both endframe doors.
Figure 4-17: Do NOT put setscrews into left
endframe bearings.
4-16
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Clean Touchless Temperature
Sensors and UV Flame Scanner
CAUTION
Do not touch sensor or
scanner lens with your
ﬁngers. Damage may occur.
Required Tools
Cleaning cloth: soft
Screwdriver
Vacuum cleaner
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
3. Loosen the clamps and remove each
touchless temperature sensor (Figure 4-18;
4-19, A) from its holding tube.
8. Clean dust and lint from the lens on each
UV flame scanner with a soft, damp
cloth.
9. Install the touchless temperature sensors in
their tubes and tighten the clamps.
10. Screw the UV ﬂame scanner into its holding tube.
11. Close and secure both endframe doors.
CAUTION
Use care when removing a
scanner from its housing. Do
not twist the wires
in the housing.
Do not let the scanner
strike anything or be struck
by anything. Striking the
scanner on a
hard surface can cause
permanent damage.
Figure 4-18: Touchless temperature sensor located
in the left endframe.
B
4. Unscrew the UV ﬂame scanner (4-19, B)
from its holding tube.
5. Check for lint and dirt in the holding tubes
for the touchless temperature sensors and
UV ﬂame scanner.
6. If necessary, clean out each holding tube
with a vacuum.
7. If necessary, clean each touchless temperature sensor with a soft cloth.
TOC
A
Figure 4-19: Touchless temperature sensor (A) and
UV ﬂame scanner (B) located in the
right endframe.
INDEX
4-17
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
Oil Drive Chain and Tension Springs
Check Compression Roll Pressure
The drive chain in the left endframe (Figure
4-20, A) and compression roll tensioning
springs (B) in both endframes require monthly
maintenance.
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and COOL.
Use extreme caution.
Uneven compression roll pressure can shorten
the life of the compression roll pad and cover.
For information on checking and adjusting
compression roll pressure, refer to the REPAIR
chapter, Compression Roll section, Compression
Roll Pressure Adjustment procedure.
Required Tools
Cleaning cloth
SAE 90 grade oil
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
3. Clean off old lubricant from the drive
chain.
4. Lightly lubricate the chain with a good
quality SAE 90 grade oil.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the compression
roll tensioning springs.
6. Close and secure both endframe doors.
B
A
Figure 4-20: The drive chain is located inside the
right endframe.
4-18
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Check Gas Regulator Vent
4.4 Semi-Annual PM
(1000 Hours)
WARNING
Do not repair or correct any
of these conditions without
reading and understanding
the Repair chapter.
The gas regulator must “breathe” in order to
operate properly and safely. If the vent restrictor
or vent pipe/tube becomes plugged, burner
ignition failure and/or improper unit operation
can occur.
WARNING
Only QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL should
troubleshoot and repair
the gas regulator vent.
Only qualiﬁed personnel
should troubleshoot and
repair this unit.
Make sure the unit is
completely cooled down and
power is turned OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
Follow lockout/tagout
procedures approved for
your site. Follow local
regulations. Failure to do so
could result in serious injury.
Vent Restrictor
Remove and inspect the vent restrictor for
obstructions. If the check valve ball cannot be
heard rattling inside, replace the vent restrictor.
Vent Pipes or Tubes
Inspect the vent pipes/tubes for obstructions.
Replace any that may be plugged, pinched,
crimped, or otherwise damaged.
For more information on the gas regulator, refer
to the INSTALLATION chapter, Installation
Procedures section, Gas Connection procedure,
Venting the Installed Regulator sub-section.
TOC
INDEX
4-19
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
Check Gas Pressure
It is important to check the available gas
pressure to the unit during periods of peak
demand by other gas-heated equipment in the
laundry room or elsewhere at the facility. Gas
pressure to the unit may be reduced signiﬁcantly
at these times, which will interfere with the proper
operation of the burner.
For more information on checking the
gas pressure, refer to the INSTALLATION
chapter, Installation Procedures section, Gas
Connection Checkout procedure.
Change Oil in Delivery Drive Gear
Reduction Unit (Type R Unit)
NOTE: Some units have sealed
gearboxes, in which case this
procedure does not apply.
Change the oil in the delivery drive gear
reduction unit using a good quality SAE 140
grade non-detergent, non-synthetic gear oil.
Required Tools
Allen wrenches:
1/4”
3/8”
Flashlight
Funnel
Oil pan
SAE 140 grade non-detergent,
non-synthetic gear oil
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open the right endframe door.
3. Remove the ﬁll plug (Figure 4-21, A) so
that air can enter.
A
B
C
Figure 4-21: The oil ﬁll plug (A), oil drain plug (B)
(hidden), and oil level plug (C) are
located on the gear reduction unit for
the delivery drive system.
4-20
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
4. Place a can under the drain plug (Figure
4-21, B) and then remove the drain plug.
Check and Clean Spark Plug and
Pilot Assembly
5. Drain all the oil from the gear reduction
unit.
Required Tools
Anti-seize compound
Compressed air
Shim: 1.5 mm
Vise
Wrenches:
1/2”
9/16”
11/16”
13/16”
1-1/4”
6. Install the drain plug.
7. Remove the level plug (Figure 4-21, C).
8. Add a good quality SAE 140 grade nondetergent, non-synthetic gear oil through
the ﬁll port until the oil is even with the
level plug hole.
NOTE: Be sure to install the
original plug in the ﬁll port since
this plug allows the gear reduction
unit to “breathe.”
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch
9. Reinstall the ﬁll plug and level plugs.
2. Turn OFF the gas supply to the unit.
10. Close and secure the right endframe
door.
3. Lockout and tagout both the electrical
and gas supplies following local work
rules and in compliance with government
standards.
4. Open the left endframe door.
5. Remove the boot and ignition wire (Figure
4-22, A) from the spark plug.
A
D
6. Inspect the ignition wire. Make sure the
wire and the insulation are not cracked
or broken. Replace the wire if it is defective.
7. Remove the spark plug and wipe off any
lint or corrosion.
B
8. Check the spark plug gap. The spark plug
gap must be 0.060” (1.5 mm). Adjust the
gap as necessary.
C
9. Disconnect the combustion air line from
the air inlet connection (Figure 4-22, B).
Figure 4-22: Various components make up the pilot
assembly.
TOC
10. Disconnect the pilot gas piping (Figure
4-22, C).
INDEX
4-21
Preventive Maintenance
GO 20
11. Remove the bolts which secure the pilot
assembly bracket (Figure 4-22, D).
12. Remove the pilot assembly from the ironer
and place it on a sturdy work table. It is
not necessary to remove the nozzle assembly from its bracket but this can be
done if desired.
B
A
13. Place one end of the nozzle assembly (Figure 4-23, A) into a vise and then unscrew
the pilot body (B).
14. Use compressed air to blow lint and debris
out of the pilot assembly components,
including the air valve.
15. Apply an anti-seize compound to the
nozzle assembly threads (Figure 4-23, C)
and, if necessary, the pilot body threads
(D).
Pilot Sidewall
D
Figure 4-23: Nozzle assembly and pilot body
16. Slide the nozzle assembly into the pilot
body and screw it into its holding.
17. If necessary, screw the pilot assembly into
its bracket.
18. Reinstall the pilot assembly in the ironer
by reversing Step 11.
19. Reconnect the combustion air line to the
assembly.
20. Reconnect the pilot gas piping to the assembly.
21. Carefully install the spark plug and connect the ignition wire.
22. Close and secure the left endframe door.
23. Turn on the external gas supply.
24. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
25. Start the unit to verify proper operation of
the spark plug.
4-22
TOC
C
INDEX
GO 20
Preventive Maintenance
Check Mechanical and Electrical
Connections
Required Tools
Cleaning cloth
Screwdriver
Voltmeter
Wrench set
5. Make sure the electrical connections for
the touchless temperature sensors are
clean and tight. Connections are located
inside each thermocouple connector.
6. Make sure the electrical connections for
the UV ﬂame scanner is clean and tight.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
7. Check all electrical connections in the
main electrical panel.
WARNING
Only a qualiﬁed electrician
should make or correct any
electrical connections in or
to the unit.
Heating, cooling, and normal vibrations
may cause connections to loosen over time.
Perform this procedure to check and tighten the
mechanical and electrical connections.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
3. Check and tighten all mechanical fasteners.
4. Check the electrical components in both
endframes.
TOC
8. Connect a voltmeter between the unit’s
frame and a separate, known earth
ground.
9. If there is a reading on the voltmeter,
check and repair the ironer’s ground connection.
10. Close and secure both endframe doors.
INDEX
4-23
GO 20
Operating Principles
Chapter 5
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
In order to maintain and troubleshoot the GO 20TM safely and effectively, it is necessary to understand
how the unit works. This chapter is divided into four operating systems and a review of how these system
are controlled to iron ﬂatwork:
5.1
Electrical System
5.2
Mechanical System
5.3
Exhaust System
5.4
Heating System
5.5
Sequence of Operation
Electrical System:
This section reviews incoming power requirements, how power is
distributed throughout the unit, the controls, sensors and switches
used to operate the unit, and the safety buttons and switches used
to provide a safe system.
Mechanical System:
This section reviews the drive mechanisms which power all rotating
and moving parts and how they enable the ironing cylinder to
produce the ﬂatwork ﬁnish and, for Type R units, deliver it either
to the front or rear of the unit.
Exhaust System:
This section explains how the exhaust blower and sail switch work
together in the exhaust canopy to provide ventilation for the unit.
Heating System:
This section reviews incoming gas requirements, how gas is used
to heat the ironing cylinder, and the control, safety buttons, and
switches used to provide a safe combustion heating system.
Sequence of Operation:
This section provides a step-by-step guide to each of the ironer’s
phases of operation: Stand-By, Jog Operation; Mechanical Start-Up,
Burner Normal Operation, and Burner Fail-Safe Operation. Refer to
the schematic diagrams in the SCHEMATICS section to follow the
timing and sequence of events.
TOC
INDEX
5-1
Operating Principles
GO 20
Safety
5.1 Electrical System
The equipment described here has been
designed to work together to give a safe and
reliable machine. Changing the equipment or
controls may cause a malfunction that could
injure someone. Do not bypass any of the safety
features or controls. Do not replace components
except with factory-approved repair parts.
The electrical components of the unit provide
the power to move the ironing cylinder, the
various rolls and ribbons, and to control operation
of the ironer.
Questions about the operation of the unit can be
answered by your local authorized CHICAGO®
dealer, or by the Chicago Dryer Company service
department.
5-2
TOC
Components in the electrical system are
located in the main electrical panel inside the
right endframe.
The majority of the protectors and distribution
items are in the main electrical panel. Some gas
system electrical components are located in the
left endframe.
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Principles
Disconnect Switch and Fuses
The unit comes equipped with a disconnect
switch (DDS). This switch (Figure 5-1, A) is in
the electrical panel inside the right endframe.
B
Included as a part of the disconnect switch are
a set of fuses (Figure 5-1, B), which will isolate
the unit from the mains if necessary. See the
schematics for the rating of these fuses, which is
dependent on line voltage.
NOTE: The power supplied to the
unit must match the requirements
listed on the nameplate.
C
A
Figure 5-1: The disconnect switch and fuse set in
the electrical panel inside the right
endframe.
A second set of fuses (Figure 5-1, C) protects
the main drive motor inverter.
TOC
INDEX
5-3
Operating Principles
GO 20
Main Electrical Panel
The main electrical panel (Figure 5-2) is
located inside the right endframe. The table on
the next page provides an explanation of each
item indicated in the picture.
T2
Figure 5-3: T2 for high voltage units.
75VA
1612-052
6
5
4
3
2
1
CMI
5
T1
4
3
5
1
3
L1
L2 L3
CB1
2
1
DISC1
4
T1 T2 T3
H1
H3 H2
H4
HLT1
HIGH LIMIT
1
2
FU5
X1
X2
FB1
FU4
T2
3
4
-
0
0
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
21
+10
AVI
GND 20
AFM
M0 22
M1
M3
+
CON2
C
B
2
INV1
MPG
MPE
90
N
G
G
14
MPD
Figure 5-2: Main electrical panel power system components-inside right endframe.
5-4
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Principles
MAIN ELECTRICAL PANEL COMPONENTS
Schematic
Description
CB1*
Circuit Breaker - 24V transformer (T1)
CB2*
Circuit Breaker - Ignition Circuit
CMI
Cylinder Motion Interlock
CON2
Contactor - Exhaust Blower/Combustion Blower Motors; Jog Forward/
Reverse; Delivery Drive Motor (Type R Unit)
DSC1
Main Disconnect Switch
FB1
Fuse Block - Main Drive Motor Inverter
HLT1
High Temperature Limit Control Board - Burner
INV1
Inverter - Main Drive Motor
MPD
Motor Protector - Delivery Drive Motor
MPE
Motor Protector - Exhaust Blower Motor
MPG
Motor Protector - Combustion Blower Motor
T1
Transformer - 24 V Control Circuit
T2**
Transformer - 120 VAC Gas Controls
*Note: In 460V machines, CB1 is designated as CB2, and CB2 is designated as CB3.
**Note: In 460V machines, T2 also steps down voltage for the main drive motor inverter.
TOC
INDEX
5-5
Operating Principles
GO 20
Additional Electrical Components
Additional electrical components are located
inside the left endframe (Figure 5-4). The table
below provides an explanation of each item.
CR1
CR2
CR3
CR4
CR5
T6
Figure 5-4: T6 and gas control relays in the left endframe.
LEFT ENDFRAME ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Schematic
Description
CR1
Control Relay - Gas Safety Circuit
CR2
Control Relay - Ignition Indicator
CR3
Control Relay - Pilot Gas Valve Indicator
CR4
Control Relay - Main Gas Valve/Flame Established Indicator
CR5
Control Relay - Flame Safeguard Alarm Indicator
T6
Transformer - Ignition
5-6
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Principles
The chain passes around a ﬁxed idler arm
(E) and then powers drives the return ribbon
drive roll sprocket (F) and feed ribbon drive roll
sprocket (G).
5.2 Mechanical System
Components that make up the mechanical
system include the following:
•
Ironer Drive System
•
Delivery Drive System
•
Ribbon Sets
It then passes over a positioning idler sprocket
(H) and drives the compression roll sprocket (I)
and the ironing cylinder sprocket (J). The ﬁxed
idler arm (E) maintains proper tension on the
drive chain. Tension on the compression roll is
maintained by a spring (K).
Ironer Drive System
Use the drawing below (Figure 5-6) to identify
the mechanical components of the ironer drive
system.
Delivery Drive System
Use Figure 5-6 to identify the mechanical
components of the delivery drive system.
A shaft from the main drive motor (A) extends
directly into the main gear reducer (B). The output
shaft of the main gear reducer is connected to a
drive sprocket (C) which powers the drive chain
(D).
A shaft from the delivery drive motor (L)
extends directly into a gear reducer (M).
The output shaft of the gear reducer has a pulley
(N) which powers the delivery drive belt (O). This
belt powers the delivery drive roll (P).
I
H
J
G
K
F
D
P
E
O
A/B
C
L
MN
Figure 5-5: Ironer drive system—right endframe.
TOC
INDEX
5-7
Operating Principles
GO 20
Ribbon Sets
Two sets of ribbons are used in ironing and one
for delivery. Use the cross-section below (Figure
5-6) to follow the path of the ﬂatwork. Note the
function of each roll and set of ribbons as the
ﬂatwork moves through the unit.
The feed ribbon drive roll (A) rotates the set of
feed ribbons (B). These move the ﬂatwork under
the doffer roll (C) and the safety ﬁnger guard (D)
toward the ironing cylinder (H).
The flatwork is then carried under the
compression roll (G), which smooths the ﬂatwork.
Guide tapes (E) are wrapped around the doffer
roll (C), the rear tie bar (F) and the compression
roll (G) to prevent the ﬂatwork from sticking to
the compression roll.
F
D
G
E
To keep the ﬂatwork tight against the ironing
cylinder (H), a set of return ribbons (I) is rotated
by the return ribbon drive roll (J) and guided by
the return ribbon guide assembly (K) and idler
rolls (L).
The ﬂatwork then passes over the return ribbon
drive roll (J) and, for Type R units, onto the
delivery ribbons (M). These ribbons are driven
by the delivery ribbon drive roll (N) and idler roll
(O) and move the ﬂatwork either to the front or
the rear of the unit depending on the position of
the DELIVERY switch.
L
I
C
H
B
A
L
K
J
O
N
M
Figure 5-6: Various rolls and ribbons move the ﬂatwork through the ironing and delivery sections.
5-8
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Principles
5.3 Exhaust System
5.4 Heating System
Components that make up the exhaust system
are located in the exhaust canopy.
The heating system consists of the following
components:
These components include:
•
Burner System
•
Exhaust Blower
•
Flame Safeguard
•
Sail Switch
•
Temperature Control
•
Touchless Temperature Sensors and UV
Flame Scanner
Exhaust Blower
The exhaust blower (Figure 5-7, A) draws used
air and combustion by-products from under the
canopy and discharge them through an attached
vent duct at the required rate.
These systems work together to monitor and
control the operation of the heating system.
For detailed electrical information, refer to the
SCHEMATICS.
Sail Switch
The sail switch (Figure 5-7, B) is located in
the discharge of the exhaust blower. The sail
switch contacts are closed when air, exhaust
combustion by-products, and excess heat are
being vented through the exhaust ductwork.
When air movement stops or is restricted in the
exhaust ductwork, the sail switch contacts open,
and the burner system shuts down.
A
B
Figure 5-7: The exhaust blower (A) and sail switch
(B) are located on top of the exhaust
canopy.
TOC
INDEX
5-9
Operating Principles
GO 20
M
L
K
J
A
B
I
H
G
C
D
F
E
Figure 5-8: Burner system components in the left endframe.
5-10
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Principles
Burner System
Gas Shut-Off Valve (G)
The following provides a brief summary of
each component identiﬁed in Figure 5-8.
Touchless Temperature Sensor (A)
Discussed in detail later in this section.
For more information, refer to Touchless
Temperature Sensors and UV Scanner.
Shuts off the gas supply to the main burner.
Pilot Gas Adjustment (H)
Allows the pilot ﬂame to be adjusted for a
vigorous, reliable and full ﬂame.
Pilot Combustion Air Adjustment (I)
Pilot Gas Valve (B)
Allows the pilot ﬂame to be adjusted for a
vigorous, reliable and full ﬂame.
Opens to allow gas to ﬂow to the pilot burner.
In case of a failure within the heating system, the
pilot gas valve is closed.
Combustion Air Pressure Switch (J)
Gas does not continue to enter the pilot burner
when there is no ﬂame. The pilot gas valve is
energized only to light the burner.
Pressure switch is closed when the combustion
blower is operating and providing adequate air
pressure to the burner system for safe and efﬁcient
combustion.
Main Burner Gas Valves (C/D)
Spark Plug (K)
Allow gas to ﬂow to the main burner. Normally
closed gas valve is opened by a signal from the
ﬂame safeguard.
Powered by the ignition transformer, provides
a high voltage electrical spark inside the pilot
burner to ignite the incoming gas.
In case of a failure within the heating system,
the burner gas valve is closed. Gas does not
continue to enter the burner when there is no
ﬂame.
Combustion Blower (E)
Provides the predetermined volume of forced
air to the burner for the gas to ignite. The blower
fan is powered by the combustion blower
motor.
Pilot Assembly (L)
A power burner that uses gas and forced air to
provide a continuous ﬂame extending from the
spark plug inside the length of the ﬂame pipe up
to the top of the burner.
The pilot burner is only operated to light the
gas burner and then goes off.
Main Burner (M)
A power burner that uses gas and forced air to
provide ﬂames along the length of the cylinder.
Ignition Transformer (F)
Generates a high-voltage charge to ﬁring the
spark plug.
TOC
Once the pilot gas burner flame has been
proven by the ﬂame safeguard, gas and air are fed
into the gas/air mixer, which supplies the length
of the burner and individual burner tips.
INDEX
5-11
Operating Principles
GO 20
Flame Safeguard
Inputs to the Flame Safeguard
The solid state electronic ﬂame safeguard-FC1
(Figure 5-9) provides primary protection for gas
system operation.
The ﬂame safeguard monitors input signals
from safety circuit and UV ﬂame scanner.
The ﬂame safeguard receives electric operating
power as long as the unit is operating and the front
panel GAS switch is set to ON.
The ﬂame safeguard makes sure the ﬂame is
established in the burner and it is safe to continue
supplying gas to the burner.
A
F
B
C
Gas Safety Interlock Circuit
Safety interlock circuit components work
together to monitor the operation of the heating
system and shut down the burner, if necessary.
The table below shows the components in the
circuit:
Schematic
Description
FS1
Exhaust blower sail switch
ITC1
High limit temperature sensor
HLT1
High temperature limit control
PS1
Combustion air pressure switch
S3
Main gas switch
ITC2
Temperature sensor
TSTAT
Temperature control
All controls in this circuit must be satisﬁed.
In addition, the GAS switch must be ON and
the temperature control calling for heat before
the OPR CTRL LED lights (Figure 5-14, A),
indicating the ﬂame safeguard is powered and
ready to initiate its sequence of operation.
D
E
UV Flame Scanner Circuit
This circuit is routed separately from the
other electrical wires. Its wires are connected to
terminals S1 and S2 of the ﬂame safeguard.
Figure 5-9: Flame safeguard components
5-12
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Principles
Outputs from the Flame Safeguard
Flame Safeguard Indicator LEDs
The outputs from the ﬂame safeguard provide
signals to the pilot gas valve, ignition transformer,
and the dual gas valves.
The ﬂame safeguard (Figure 5-9) has ﬁve
LEDs to indicate system performance and aid in
diagnostics. Each LED is discussed in the table
below.
In the event of a ﬂame failure, an alarm output
is generated by the flame safeguard and gas
operation is shut down. The ﬂame safeguard must
be reset before another start-up is attempted.
Pilot Gas Valve Circuit
Energized after ignition has started (4 seconds).
The pilot valve will close 5 seconds after being
energized.
Dual Gas Valves Circuit
Energized for a 10-second ignition trial.
During this period the pilot and both main valves
are energized to allow the pilot ﬂame to ignite the
main burner. After the 10-second trial, the pilot
valve de-energizes.
If ﬂame is not detected continuously for 3
seconds, this circuit is disconnected, turning off
the gas supply to the main burner.
Ignition Transformer Circuit
The pilot gas valve and the ignition transformer
are energized at the same time. This circuit is
energized for sufﬁcient time to light the pilot and
the main burner.
Alarm Circuit
Energized when there is a ﬂame failure or 30
seconds after a system error such as:
•
Flame detected out of sequence
•
Electrical interference on the UV ﬂame
scanner leads
•
Faulty UV ﬂame scanner
Item
Description
A
OPR CTRL - Lights when the Gas Safety
Interlock Circuit is satisﬁed and supplies
power to the ﬂame control.
B
INTRLCK - Lights to indicate ignition
sequence has begun.
C
PTFI - Lights during the pilot trial for ignition.
D
FLAME - Lights when a ﬂame signal is
detected.
E
ALARM - Flashes when an alarm condition
is detected.
F
RESET - Restores the ﬂame safeguard to
operating mode after a failure has occurred
and been corrected.
When the ALARM LED is ﬂashing, the lit
LEDs provide a diagnostic indicator. For more
information on possible causes and solutions
associated with each LED pattern, refer to the
TROUBLESHOOTING chapter, Heating
System section, Flame Safeguard Operation
topic.
Flame Safeguard RESET Button
The RESET button (Figure 5-9, F) restores
the ﬂame safeguard to operating mode after a
failure.
If a ﬂame failure or system error occurs during
ignition or operation of the burner, the flame
safeguard must be reset before it will work again.
To reset the ﬂame safeguard, press the RESET
button.
If the alarm circuit is energized, a lockout
condition occurs and the appropriate LEDs on
the ﬂame safeguard will be illuminated. Refer to
Flame Safeguard Indicator LEDs next.
TOC
INDEX
5-13
Operating Principles
GO 20
Temperature Control
Electrical Connection
The TEMPERATURE CONTROL (TSTAT)
(Figure 5-10) is used to set the temperature of
the ironing cylinder.
When the GAS ON/OFF switch (S3) is set to
OFF, there will be no voltage at terminals 4 and
5 of the TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
When the GAS ON/OFF switch is set to ON,
both terminals 4 and 5 will have 24 VAC present
until the ACTUAL temperature increases to the
SET temperature. Then, either terminal 4 or 5 will
not have 24 V present.
NOTE: The TEMPERATURE
CONTROL has been precisely
calibrated at the factory for the
operating temperature range of
your unit. Do not be concerned
if ambient room temperature
indications are high prior to
heating up. The controls cannot
and should not be adjusted on
site.
Either terminal 4 or 5 will continue to have 24
V present until the ACTUAL temperature falls
12 degrees below the SET temperature. Then,
once again, both terminals 4 and 5 will have 24 V
present until the ACTUAL temperature increases
to the SET temperature.
Temperature Control Operation
B
When power is turned ON at the main
disconnect switch, the TEMPERATURE
CONTROL is energized (Figure 5-10).
C
1. The ON indicators will be lit (A).
2. The displays show the SET temperature in
green (D), and the ACTUAL temperature
of the unit at the touchless temperature
sensors in red (C).
3. To set the desired temperature, use the increase ▲ or the decrease ▼ buttons (E).
4. HEAT indicators (B) are on during
the heating cycle and stay lit until the
ACTUAL temperature increases to meet
the SET temperature. HEAT indicators
will not come on again until the temperature drops 12 degrees below set point.
5. The TEMPERATURE CONTROL operates from 0 to 400° F. The SEL button is
not operative.
5-14
TOC
D
A
E
Figure 5-10: Temperature control.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL TERMINALS
Terminal
Description
1
Yellow positive thermocouple wire
2
Red negative thermocouple wire
3
Not used
4
Nominal 24 V from the gas valve circuit
5
Nominal 24 V from the gas valve circuit
6
Not used
7
24 V power
8
Neutral
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Principles
Touchless Temperature Sensors and
UV Flame Scanner
The unit is equipped with two touchless
temperature sensors, one inside each endframe.
They monitor the temperature of the ironing
cylinder.
The burner temperature control sensor
(ITC2), located in the left endframe, (Figure
5-11) monitors the ironing cylinder temperature
towards the middle of the cylinder and provides
constant millivolt signals to the TEMPERATURE
CONTROL (TSTAT). The millivoltage rises and
falls with the temperature.
Figure 5-11: Touchless temperature sensor in the
left endframe.
The burner high limit temperature sensor
(ITC1) (Figure 5-12, A) is aimed at the ironing
cylinder close to the right end of the burner. It
provides constant millivolt signals to the high
limit control board (HLT1) found inside the main
electrical panel.
B
The UV ﬂame scanner in the right endframe
(UV1) (Figure 5-12, B) veriﬁes the presence of
the burner ﬂame when it has reached the far right
end of the burner.
A
Figure 5-12: Touchless temperature sensor (A)
and UV ﬂame scanner (B) in the right
endframe.
TOC
INDEX
5-15
Operating Principles
GO 20
5.5 Sequence of Operation
The unit has four main stages of operation:
•
Stand-By Stage
•
JOG Operation Stage
•
Mechanical Start-Up Stage
•
Burner Normal Operation Stage
•
Burner Fail-Safe Protection Stage
4. If all motor and inverter protectors are
closed, the green MOTOR PROTECTOR indicator lights; if all interlock
switches are closed and no STOP buttons
are pushed in or stuck, the LEFT SIDE
INTERLOCKS & STOP BUTTONS and
the RIGHT SIDE INTERLOCKS & STOP
BUTTONS indicators light.
JOG Operation Stage
Each stage requires several components to
accomplish its job. The sequencing and timing
of stages are critical.
When the ironer is in Stand-By Stage, the
JOG switch is active. The NC auxiliary contact
of CON2 in the INV1 communication circuit is
closed.
The following steps describe the logical
progression of events allowing the unit to work
safely and efﬁciently.
1. If the JOG switch is turned to FORWARD,
the INV1 communication circuit is closed
as if the NO CON2 contact is closed.
2. If the JOG switch is turned to REVERSE,
the communication circuit is completed to
the INV1’s reverse terminals and the main
drive motor runs in reverse.
NOTE: T h e l e t t e r s a n d
numbers in parentheses are
schematic references. For
more information, refer to the
SCHEMATICS.
3. The setting of the speed control is active.
The control should always be set to minimum before using the JOG switch.
Stand-By Stage
During this stage, the incoming power
is connected to the unit, but the unit is not
operating.
4. When the ironer is running normally, the
NC auxiliary contact of CON2 opens,
locking out operation of the JOG switch.
1. Line voltage is present at INV1 and the
high-voltage contacts for CON2.
2. One stage of the incoming power supplies
the transformer T1, converting the line
voltage to 24 VAC. The 24 VAC supply is
terminated at the START button and the
CON2 low voltage contacts.
3. One stage of the incoming power supplies
transformer T2 converting the line voltage
to 120 VAC. The 120 VAC supply powers
the gas safety circuitry. The 120 VAC supply is terminated at the auxiliary contacts
for CON2.
5-16
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Principles
Mechanical Start-Up Stage
This stage contains the sequence that occurs
when the unit begins operating without ignition
of the burner.
4. The contactor (CON 2) is energized and
initiate the following events.
• The normally-closed auxiliary contact
in the AC frequency inverter motor
control circuitry opens and disables
operation of the JOG switch.
1. The green START button is pressed, the
24 VAC supply energizes contactor CON2,
and the green START button indicator
lamp comes on.
• Simultaneously, a second contact in the
motor control circuitry closes, signaling the inverter to provide power to the
main drive motor.
2. The auxiliary CON2 contacts close, allowing the green START button to release
without de-energizing the start relay. In addition, the closing of the auxiliary CON2
contacts makes power available to the gas
control and safety circuitry.
• The ironing cylinder, feed ribbons, and
return ribbons begin to rotate.
• Power is connected to the:
• Exhaust blower motor (MTR2),
which rotates the exhaust blower
fan and moves air through discharge
duct. The sail switch closes, showing the blower is operating and
sufﬁcient air is ﬂowing to exhaust
combustion by-products and excess
heat; the EXHAUST AIR FLOW
indicator lights in the left endframe
control panel.
3. The Cylinder Motion Interlock Relay
(CMI) in the right endframe has a 5-second
delay, allowing the unit to start and come
up to speed.
• If the sprocket sensor (PX1) is triggered
by rotation of the ironing cylinder, the
CMI contacts remain closed, allowing
the machine to operate.
• If the sprocket sensor (PX1) is not
triggered by rotation of the ironing
cylinder, the CMI relay contacts open
and the start circuit is disabled, shutting
the machine down.
• Combustion blower motor (MTR3),
which rotates the combustion blower, providing air for the power
burner system. The combustion air
pressure switch closes, showing the
blower is operating and sufﬁcient
air is flowing to support burner
combustion; the COMBUSTION
AIR FLOW indicator lights in the
left endframe control panel.
• Delivery drive motor (MTR4)
(Type R units), which powers the
delivery ribbons either toward the
front or rear of the unit depending
on the position of the DELIVERY
switch.
TOC
INDEX
5-17
Operating Principles
GO 20
Burner Normal Operation Stage
This stage describes the sequence that occurs
during ignition, operation, and shut-down of the
burner.
Flame Control Diagnostics (up to 5
seconds)
1. After the GAS switch is turned to ON, the
ﬂame safeguard makes sure:
• No ﬂame is being sensed.
Start-Up
1. With the unit running normally, power is
supplied to all gas system operating and
safety controls.
2. Before ignition can begin, the sail switch
(FS1) and the combustion blower switch
(PS1) must be closed; the gas safety circuit
must be satisﬁed.
3. The heating phase begins when an operator turns the GAS switch to ON and sets
the TEMPERATURE CONTROL to a
setting that is greater than the actual temperature of the ironing cylinder:
• The GAS ON and the TEMPERATURE
CONTROL ON indicators light.
• The TEMPERATURE CONTROL
indicator stays lit during the heating
cycle until set point is reached.
• All combustion control circuits are
functioning properly.
2. If any ﬂame safeguard diagnostic check
fails, an alarm output is generated by the
ﬂame safeguard.
• Depending on the fault, one or more
of the fault indicator red LEDs on the
ﬂame safeguard come on.
• ALARM red LED on the ﬂame safeguard ﬂashes.
• FLAME SAFEGUARD indicator lamp
on the front panel comes on.
NOTE: Upon flame failure,
indicators light after 20 seconds.
They cannot be reset for another
20 seconds.
• The system will not call for heat again
until temperature drops 12º F below
set point.
• The high temperature limit control
circuit card (HLT1) is energized.
• If the control senses a high temperature condition, the red HIGH LIMIT
indicator lamp on the front panel
lights and the ﬂame safeguard shuts
down the heating system.
• The unit must be given time to cool
down, and the HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT RESET switch must
be pressed. The red reset button is
located on the front left endframe
control panel.
5-18
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Operating Principles
Pilot and Burner Flame Ignition Trial (4
seconds)
1. The IGNITION yellow indicator lamp on
the front panel comes on when the ignition
transformer and pilot are energized.
6. If, at any time, the burner ﬂame is not
detected by the UV ﬂame scanner for a
3-second period:
• The ﬂame safeguard closes the burner
gas valve and shuts down the burner
operation. The GAS VALVE green
indicator lamp goes out.
2. The pilot and burner electric gas valves
energize and open together. The PILOT
VALVE and MAIN VALVE indicators
light.
• An alarm output is generated by the
ﬂame safeguard, which causes the following after 20 second delay:
3. The pilot ﬂame and main burner light.
• ALARM red LED on the flame
safeguard comes on.
4. If the pilot ﬂame does not light within 5
seconds the following occurs:
• FLAME SAFEGUARD red indicator lamp on the front panel comes
on.
• Flame safeguard shuts down the ignition transformer and closes the pilot
gas and main gas valve.
• IGNITION, PILOT and MAIN yellow
indicator lamps on the front panel go
out.
• ALARM red LED on the ﬂame safeguard comes on.
• FLAME SAFEGUARD red indicator
lamp on the front panel comes on after
20 seconds.
5. When the burner is successfully lit, the
following events occur:
Burner Fail-Safe Protection Stage
This stage occurs whenever the ﬂame safeguard
shuts down the operation of the burner due to a
system error or ﬂame failure.
Before the burner can be restarted, the ﬂame
safeguard must be manually reset. To reset the
ﬂame safeguard:
1. Wait at least one minute to allow the safety
switch to cool down.
• IGNITION yellow indicator and PILOT green indicator on front panel
go out.
NOTE: If there is an issue,
check the Diagnostics Table on
the ﬂame safeguard.
• Pilot gas valve closes and ignition
transformer de-energizes after the 5second ignition trial.
2. Press the RESET button on the ﬂame safeguard. If no other errors are present:
• Pilot ﬂame goes out.
a) FLAME SAFEGUARD red indicator
lamp on the front panel goes out.
b) OPR CTRL LED on the ﬂame safeguard comes on, indicating the heating
system is ready to start again.
TOC
INDEX
5-19
GO 20
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter includes troubleshooting for the GO 20TM in the areas listed below:
6.1
Electrical
6.2
Mechanical System
6.3
Ironing Quality
6.4
Heating System
6.5
Exhaust System
Unusual operating symptoms that occur during the checkout or operation of the unit must be diagnosed
and corrected immediately. Mechanical problems can often be detected by visual inspection, while
diagnosis of electrical malfunctions requires maintenance personnel familiar with electrical/electronic
circuitry. Electrical component diagrams are located in the SCHEMATICS section.
Several systems work together to provide consistent, high quality results. It is important to consider
each system when troubleshooting the unit. Each troubleshooting section in this chapter lists issues,
possible causes, and solutions. If an issue occurs that is not addressed in this chapter, please contact your
local authorized CHICAGO® dealer or the Chicago Dryer Company factory Service Department. For a
list of common issues that can occur in each system, refer to the Troubleshooting Symptoms page.
To better understand a component’s function or how components work together, refer to the
OPERATING PRINCIPLES chapter. A complete understanding of the electrical operation will be of
value when troubleshooting this unit.
Any remedy beyond the capability of the users requires repair by trained and experienced personnel.
Please contact your local authorized CHICAGO® dealer or the Chicago Dryer Company factory Service
Department.
WARNING
Never bypass any of the safety devices. This could result in serious
injury to operators and maintenance personnel.
Only trained personnel with experience in gas, electrical, and
mechanical repair should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Unless otherwise indicated, perform troubleshooting, maintenance,
and repair only when the unit is OFF, with power disconnected,
and completely cooled down.
TOC
INDEX
6-1
Troubleshooting
GO 20
Troubleshooting Symptoms
6.1 Electrical
Unit Does Not Start or Jog ................................................................................................. 6-4
Unit Jogs, Does Not Start .................................................................................................. 6-5
Unit Starts, Does Not Jog .................................................................................................. 6-5
Unit Starts for a Few Seconds, Then Stops ....................................................................... 6-6
No Speed Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 6-6
Delivery System (Type R Units) Does Not Work................................................................ 6-6
6.2 Mechanical System
Noisy Operation ................................................................................................................. 6-7
Ribbons Do Not Track Straight .......................................................................................... 6-8
Ribbon Set Not Working .................................................................................................... 6-8
Rotating Elements Stop ..................................................................................................... 6-8
Drive System Mechanical Error ......................................................................................... 6-9
Drive System Electrical Error ............................................................................................. 6-9
6.3 Ironing Quality
Flatwork Feeds Poorly into Ironing Section ..................................................................... 6-10
Flatwork Jams or Sticks to Ironing Cylinder; Poor Ironing Quality ................................... 6-10
Flatwork Wraps Around Compression Roll .......................................................................6-11
Flatwork Scorched or Discolored ......................................................................................6-11
Flatwork Does Not Dry Correctly ......................................................................................6-11
Poor Flatwork Finish ........................................................................................................ 6-12
6-2
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
6.4 Heating System
Flame Safeguard Operation
OPR CTRL Red LED - Off ............................................................................................... 6-13
Flame Safeguard Panel Light is On ................................................................................. 6-13
Flame Safeguard LOCKOUT LEDs ................................................................................. 6-14
Pilot Ignition
GAS Switch Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On When GAS Switch is Turned to ON .... 6-15
IGNITION Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ................................................................ 6-15
PILOT and/or MAIN GAS VALVE Green Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On,
IGNITION Yellow Indicator Lamp Comes On ............................................................ 6-15
Spark Plug/Ignition Transformer Not Operating Correctly................................................ 6-16
Pilot Flame Partial or Lazy ............................................................................................... 6-16
Burner Ignition
Flame Does Not Travel Down the Entire Length of the Burner Within 10 Seconds
After Ignition .............................................................................................................. 6-18
Gas Flow: Poor, Irregular, None....................................................................................... 6-18
Burner Starts Normally, Then Shuts Down ...................................................................... 6-19
Burner Operation
Ironing Cylinder Heats to SET Temperature, but Will Not Ignite a Second Time ............. 6-20
Temperature HIGH LIMIT Red Indicator Lamp Comes On .............................................. 6-20
TEMPERATURE CONTROL Displays Unusual LED Messages ..................................... 6-21
TEMPERATURE CONTROL Displays 20º to 40º F Higher than ACTUAL at
Ambient Temperature ................................................................................................ 6-21
TEMPERATURE CONTROL Erratic or Does Not Work ................................................... 6-21
Flames Coming From Ends of Ironing Cylinder ............................................................... 6-22
Touchless Temperature Sensors Operating Incorrectly ................................................... 6-23
6.5 Exhaust System
Exhaust Poor or None...................................................................................................... 6-24
TOC
INDEX
6-3
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
6.1 Electrical
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1. Main disconnect switch is
OFF.
• Turn the main disconnect switch to
ON.
2. One or more legs of the
main power source is
dead.
• Test and repair as necessary.
3. Incoming power is incorrect.
• Check for ﬂuctuating or incorrect
incoming voltage. The power requirements are shown on the
unit’s nameplate.
4. Main disconnect switch
fuses FU2 or FU3 are
blown.
• Replace any blown fuses.
• If fuses continue to blow:
- Check the wiring for a short or open
circuit.
- Replace defective component(s) as
required.
Unit Does Not Start or Jog
5. Drive motor thermostat is
tripped (motor is overheated).
(continued on next page)
• Allow motor to cool and thermostat to
reset.
• If the motor thermostat continues to
trip:
- Check the wiring for a short or open
circuit.
- Check for excessive load on motor
which may cause an over current
condition.
- Replace the defective motor.
6. Inverter needs to be reset.
• Reset the inverter:
- Turn power OFF at the main disconnect switch.
- Wait one minute.
- Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
• If the fault repeats:
- Input voltage is too high or low.
- Open circuit between the inverter and
MTR1.
- Main drive motor MTR1 is bad.
6-4
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
ISSUE
Troubleshooting
POSSIBLE CAUSE
7. High voltage units: CB2 is
tripped.
(continued from previous page)
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
SOLUTION
• Reset tripped circuit breaker.
• If circuit breaker continues to trip:
- Check the wiring for a short or open
circuit.
Unit Does Not Start or Jog
- Replace defective component(s) as
required.
1. Circuit breaker CB1 (CB3
in high voltage machines)
is tripped, disabling the 24
VAC circuit.
• Reset tripped circuit breaker.
• If circuit breaker continues to trip:
- Check the wiring for a short or open
circuit.
- Replace defective component(s) as
required.
2. START button is defective. • Check for 24 VAC at the green START
button switch. Replace the switch if 24
VAC is present and the switch does
not operate.
Unit Jogs, Does Not Start
3. Auxiliary contact at CON2
is defective.
• Repair or replace the auxiliary contact.
4. 24 VAC transformer T1 is
defective.
• Check for 24 V output. Replace the
transformer if there is no 24 V output.
5. Main relay CON2 does not • Replace components as required.
energize.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless all safety devices are working correctly.
6. STOP button or the red
safety ﬁnger guard is
pushed in and stuck or
defective.
• Replace any defective STOP button.
• Make sure the ﬁnger guard is installed
correctly and not depressed.
• Check the ﬁnger guard switches inside
both endframes.
• Push in the plungers to the safety
7. Endframe door or the
interlock switches.
protective backplate is
open, or one of the safety
interlock switches is other- • Close and secure the endframe doors
and the protective plate.
wise open.
Unit Starts, Does Not Jog
1. JOG switch is defective.
TOC
INDEX
• Check for 24 VAC at the JOG switch.
6-5
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
ISSUE
Unit Starts for a Few Seconds,
Then Stops
No Speed Adjustment
GO 20
Troubleshooting
POSSIBLE CAUSE
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
SOLUTION
1. Proximity sensor is too far
from the ironing cylinder
sprocket.
• Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Machine Speed Sensor section, Machine Speed Sensor Adjustment
procedure.
2. Proximity sensor is bad.
• Check/Replace. Refer to the REPAIR
chapter, Machine Speed Sensor section, Machine Speed Replacement
procedure.
3. Ironing cylinder is not
turning fast enough, or not
at all.
• Check for broken or loose drive chain.
1. Short or open circuit in the
wiring.
• Inspect the wiring for a short or open
circuit. Replace any defective wires.
2. Loose connection at
SPEED knob or inverter.
• Tighten all connections at the SPEED
knob and the AC frequency inverter.
• Replace the SPEED knob potentiom3. SPEED knob potentiometer is bad if it will not vary
eter.
the speed.
4. AC frequency inverter motor control is malfunctioning if there is no motion.
• Call the factory Service Department for
instructions.
1. DELIVERY FRONT/REAR • Set switch to desired delivery position.
switch is in center/off position.
Delivery System (Type R
Units) Does Not Work
2. Delivery motor drive belt is • Check and tighten as necessary. Refer
to the REPAIR chapter, Delivery Secloose or broken.
tion–Type R Unit section, Delivery
Ribbon Drive Belt Tension Adjustment procedure.
3. Problem in delivery conveyor circuit or switch is
defective.
6-6
TOC
• Check circuit. Repair/replace components as necessary.
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
6.2 Mechanical System
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1. Mechanical components
need lubrication.
• Lubricate. Refer to the PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE chapter, Weekly PM
and Monthly PM sections, Grease
Bearings procedures and/or Monthly
PM section, Oil Drive Chains and
Tension Springs procedure.
• Replace any bearing that does not operate smoothly and quietly after being
lubricated.
2. Drive chain or drive belt is
loose.
• Adjust tension. Refer to the REPAIR
chapter and the appropriate section for
the speciﬁc procedure.
3. Sprockets are loose, worn, • Inspect the sprockets and the drive
or misaligned, or the drive
chain. Repair/replace as necessary.
chain has excessive play.
4. Howling and whistling occur when the burner is on.
• Clean the combustion blower air ﬁlter
daily. Refer to the PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE chapter, Daily PM
section, Clean Combustion Blower
Air Filters procedure.
• Clean the gas/air mixer. Refer to the
REPAIR chapter, Burner System
section, Main Burner Gas/Air Mixer
Cleaning procedure.
Noisy Operation
• Clean the burner tips. Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Burner System section,
Burner Tip Maintenance procedure.
5. Burner tail pipe clearance
is insufﬁcient.
• Check the burner tail pipe clearance
inside hollow drive shaft of ironing
cylinder. Reposition tail pipe holder, if
necessary.
6. Heat shield inside the iron- • Check the heat shield. Refer to the
INSTALLATION chapter, Installation
ing cylinder is touching the
Procedures section, Check the Heat
cylinder.
Shield Inside the Ironing Cylinder
procedure.
7. Inverter frequency setting
is causing noisy motor
operation.
• Adjust frequency. For more information, contact the factory Service
Department.
8. Drive train system error.
• Within this section, refer to the two
Drive Train issues.
TOC
INDEX
6-7
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
ISSUE
Ribbons Do Not Track Straight
Ribbon Set Not Working
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1. Ribbon tension needs to
be adjusted.
• Adjust/Replace. Refer to the REPAIR
chapter and the appropriate section for
the speciﬁc procedure.
2. Ribbons are broken or
missing.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter
and the appropriate section for speciﬁc
procedure.
3. Roll Tracking tape or
friction material is worn
smooth.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter
and the appropriate section for speciﬁc
procedure.
1. Improper tension on ribbons.
• Adjust/Replace. Refer to the REPAIR
chapter and the appropriate section for
the speciﬁc procedure.
2. Roll tracking tape or
friction material is worn
smooth.
• Adjust/Replace. Refer to the REPAIR
chapter and the appropriate section for
the speciﬁc procedure.
3. Refer to the Rotating Elements Stop issue next.
Rotating Elements Stop
1. Drive belt or chain is slipping or broken.
• Adjust tension or replace if broken,
worn, or frayed.
2. Idler pulley loose or frozen.
• Adjust tension or replace.
3. A motor protector has
tripped.
• Reset the motor protector. If it continues to trip, check the setting.
• Check for an open connection in one
4. There is an open circuit
of the wires on a 3-phase motor.
between the contactor and
the motor protector, or between the motor protector • Motor protector is defective and needs
to be replaced.
and the motor.
• Motor is defective and needs to be
replaced.
• Check inverter and connections to the
motor.
5. If one rotating element
is stationary, check for a
broken shaft, bad bearing
or a loose or worn drive
sprocket.
6-8
TOC
• Replace as necessary.
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
ISSUE
Drive System Mechanical Error
Troubleshooting
POSSIBLE CAUSE
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
SOLUTION
1. Chain or belt loose or
broken.
• Check the chain/belt.
2. Mechanical component
loose, misaligned or
broken.
• Check that sprocket is properly secured to shaft:
• Adjust or replace. Refer to the REPAIR
chapter and the appropriate section for
the speciﬁc procedure.
- Tighten setscrews as necessary.
- Replace shaft key as necessary.
- Replace roll if shaft damaged.
- Check to see if sprocket is missing
teeth. Replace.
• Check and correct any alignment
errors. Replace any component that
does not work smoothly and quietly
after alignment.
1. An inverter, motor protector or motor thermal
overload has tripped.
• For inverter problem, turn machine off
for one minute.
• For motor protector, reset tripped
device.
• For thermal overload, motor must be
allowed to cool until automatic reset.
Drive System Electrical Error
2. There is an open somewhere in the motor circuit
or a component is defective.
• Check for an open connection in one
of the wires on a 3-phase motor.
• Check for an open connection between
motor and inverter or motor protector.
• Check for an open connection between
the contactor and inverter or motor
protector.
• Check for defective component such
as contactor or motor protector and
replace if necessary.
• Inverter fault. Call factory for service.
• Motor is defective and needs to be
replaced.
TOC
INDEX
6-9
Troubleshooting
GO 20
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
6.3 Ironing Quality
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1. Unit is not properly waxed. • Refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating Procedures section, Waxing procedure.
Flatwork Feeds Poorly into
Ironing Section
Flatwork Jams or Sticks to
Ironing Cylinder; Poor Ironing
Quality
(continued on next page)
6-10
2. Feeding technique is
improper.
• Refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating Procedures section, Flatwork Handling
procedure.
3. Compression roll is not
down.
• Make sure the compression roll is
engaged; the spring-loaded handles
must be in their bracket slots in each
endframe.
4. Compression roll tension
is inadequate or uneven.
• Adjust. Refer to the REPAIR chapter,
Compression Roll section, Compression Roll Pressure Adjustment
procedure.
5. Compression roll pad is
worn.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Compression Roll section, Compression Roll Cover Replacement
procedure.
6. Return ribbon tension out
of adjustment.
• Adjust Refer to the REPAIR chapter,
Return Section section, Return Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure.
7. Feed ribbon drive roll
cover is worn smooth.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Feed Section section, Feed Ribbon Drive Roll Cover Replacement
procedure.
8. Feed table out of adjustment.
• Adjust. Refer to the REPAIR chapter,
Feed Section section, Feed Table
Alignment and Positioning procedure.
1. Feeding technique is
improper.
• Refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating Procedures section, Flatwork Handling
procedure.
2. Return ribbon drive roll
cover material is worn
smooth.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Return Section section, Return
Ribbon Drive Roll Cover Replacement procedure.
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
ISSUE
(continued from previous page)
Flatwork Jams or Sticks to
Ironing Cylinder; Poor Ironing
Quality
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
3. Return ribbons are worn
smooth.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Return Section section, Return
Ribbon Replacement procedure.
4. Ironing cylinder has a
buildup of chemicals or
debris.
• Check for buildup of chemicals or debris which discolor the ironing cylinder.
For cleaning instructions, refer to the
REPAIR chapter, Ironing Section section, Ironing Cylinder Reconditioning procedure.
For additional possible causes and solutions within this section, refer to
the issue, Flatwork: Feeds Poorly into Ironing issues.
Flatwork Wraps Around Compression Roll
Flatwork Scorched or Discolored
Flatwork Does Not Dry Correctly
(continued on next page)
1. Missing or damaged guide
tapes.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Feed Section section, Guide
Tape Replacement procedure.
1. If ﬂatwork rinses clean
with a small amount of
soap, a chemical residue
is left over from the wash
cycle.
• Adjust the settings of the washer.
2. If ﬂatwork does not rinse
clean, the temperature is
set too high, the ironing
speed is too slow, and/or
moisture retention from
the washer/extractor is
incorrect.
• Refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Operating Techniques section.
3. If rust-colored spots occur
on the ﬂatwork, there is a
condensed wax buildup
under the canopy and/or
the feed table.
• Check and clean any condensed wax
buildup under the canopy and the feed
table.
1. Processing standards are
not being followed.
• To review the directions for setting up
these standards, refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Operating Techniques section, Processing
Standards procedure.
2. Flatwork left in a hamper
• Increase heat or decrease ironing
for a long time will have an
speed SLIGHTLY for linen that feels
uneven moisture content.
more damp.
3. Flatwork run through
washer/extractor with cold
water will have less moisture extracted.
TOC
INDEX
• Increase ﬁnal ﬂatwork temperature
from extractor. Refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Operating
Techniques section, Conditioning
Flatwork Before Ironing procedure.
6-11
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
ISSUE
GO 20
Troubleshooting
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
4. Extractor is not removing
enough moisture.
• To review the extraction process, refer
to the OPERATING GUIDELINES
chapter, Operating Techniques section, Conditioning Flatwork Before
Ironing procedure.
5. TEMPERATURE CONTROL is not working
properly.
• Replace the TEMPERATURE CONTROL. Refer to the REPAIR chapter,
Burner System section, Temperature
Control Replacement procedure.
1. Feeding technique is
improper.
• Use correct feeding techniques. Refer
to the OPERATING GUIDELINES
chapter, Daily Operating Procedures
section, Flatwork Handling procedure.
2. Ironing section controls
are incorrectly set for the
linen being processed.
• Check the TEMPERATURE CONTROL
and the setting of SPEED knob. Refer
to the OPERATING GUIDELINES
chapter, Operating Techniques section, Control Settings.
3. Ironing cylinder is not being waxed at least once a
day.
• Refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating Procedures section, Waxing procedure.
4. Missing or damaged guide
tapes.
• Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Feed
Section section, Guide Tape Replacement procedure.
5. Return ribbon drive roll
friction material is worn
smooth.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Return Section section, Return
Ribbon Drive Roll Friction Material
Replacement procedure.
6. Return ribbons are excessively worn and are not
moving ﬂatwork correctly.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Return Section section, Return
Ribbon Replacement procedure.
7. Compression roll pressure
is not even from side to
side.
• Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Compression Roll section, Compression
Roll Pressure Adjustment procedure.
8. Compression roll padding
is worn.
• Replace. Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Compression Roll section, Compression Roll Cover Replacement
procedure.
(continued from previous page)
Flatwork Does Not Dry Correctly
Poor Flatwork Finish
6-12
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
6.4 Heating System
FLAME SAFEGUARD OPERATION
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
WARNING
Use extreme care when troubleshooting the ﬂame safeguard; line
voltage can be present on most terminals when power is on.
OPR CTRL Red LED - Off
Flame Safeguard Panel Light
is On
1. Circuits for the sail switch,
high limit switch, and/or
temperature control
thermostat contacts are
not energized or interconnected with the ﬂame
safeguard.
• Determine which contact within the
circuit is bad; correct or replace the
faulty contact.
2. If unit is operating normally with the GAS switch
turned to ON, the ﬂame
safeguard is not receiving
power or is bad.
• Inspect the wiring to the ﬂame safeguard and replace, if necessary.
1. UV ﬂame scanner is defective.
• Check/replace as necessary. Refer to
the REPAIR chapter, Burner System
section, UV Flame Scanner Alignment Adjustment or UV Flame Scanner Replacement procedure.
2. Unit is not properly
grounded.
• Make sure an earth ground is connected to the grounding area in the main
electrical panel.
• Check for a nominal 115 V present
between terminals 2 and 7, and terminals 1 and 2, inside the main electrical
panel. If 115 V is present, the ﬂame
safeguard needs replacement.
3. Wiring error puts a voltage • Inspect the wiring to the ﬂame safeguard. Repair or replace any wires that
on any ﬂame safeguard
are faulty.
output terminals.
4. Electrical interference on
the sensor leads.
• Check the ignition cable. Keep the
cable away from the UV ﬂame scanner.
5. Flame is detected out of
sequence.
• Check the gas valves for incomplete
shut-off.
6. Various.
• See table on next page.
TOC
INDEX
6-13
Troubleshooting
GO 20
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
Troubleshooting
FLAME SAFEGUARD LOCKOUT LEDS
LOCKOUT CAUSE
OPR CTRL
INTRLCK
Check Ampliﬁer

Check Scanner

Ampliﬁer Auto Check Fail

Line Frequency Noise Detected

Interlock Open


Chassis OPTO


Check Blown Fuse

Fault Unknown

PTFI
FLAME




False Flame-Standby

Interlock Closed

Flame Fail-Auto

Flame Fail-PTFI










Check Programmer

Flame Fail-MTFI

Fuel Valve State Change/Check Chassis



Ampliﬁer High Count Fail
System Error
: Steady
6-14
∗
∗
TOC
INDEX
∗: Flashing
∗
∗
ALARM
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗

GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
PILOT IGNITION
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1. Switch may have a loose
GAS Switch Indicator Lamp
connection or is bad.
Does Not Come On When GAS
2. Indicator lamp may be
Switch is Turned to ON
bad.
IGNITION Indicator Lamp Does
Not Come On
PILOT and/or MAIN GAS
VALVE Green Indicator Lamp
Does Not Come On
SOLUTION
• Inspect/replace the GAS switch.
• Inspect/replace the lamp.
1. Gas system not calling for
heat.
• NA
2. Relay CR2 and/or yellow
indicator lamp are bad.
• Inspect/replace the components.
3. Ironing cylinder temperature is too hot. If so, green
GAS VALVE light will also
be off.
• Within this section, refer to the Burner
Operation subsection, Temperature
HIGH LIMIT Red Indicator Lamp
Comes On issue.
WARNING
Use extreme care when troubleshooting the ﬂame safeguard; line
voltage can be present on most terminals when power is on.
4. Flame safeguard is bad.
• Check for a nominal 115 V present on
Flame Safeguard between terminals
1 and 2, and terminals 7 and 2, inside
the main electrical panel. If 115 V is
present, the ﬂame safeguard needs
replacement.
1. Relay CR3/CR4 and/or
green indicator light are
bad.
• Inspect the relays and replace, if necessary.
IGNITION Yellow Indicator Lamp 2. Gas valve is closed or not
Comes On
properly energized.
TOC
INDEX
• Make sure the gas valves are open.
Inspect the wiring for the gas valves.
6-15
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
PILOT IGNITION
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1. Ignition spark plug is bad,
or the spark plug gap is
incorrect.
• Inspect the spark plug and replace, if
necessary. Refer to the PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE chapter, Semi-Annual PM section, Check and Clean
Spark Plug and Pilot Assembly
procedure.
WARNING
Turn off the main gas valve before proceeding with Ignition
Transformer troubleshooting.
2. Incoming voltage to the
ignition transformer is too
low.
• Press Flame Safeguard reset button.
• Set the TEMPERATURE CONTROL to
its highest setting.
• Check the voltage on the ﬂame safeguard between terminal 4 & 2. If the
voltage is well below 120 VAC, the
incoming power to the unit is too low.
Spark Plug/Ignition Transformer Not Operating Correctly
• Check the power requirements on the
unit’s nameplate.
3. Flame safeguard is bad.
• See the Solution for Possible Cause
#2 above.
- If there is no voltage on the input side
of the ignition transformer, replace the
ﬂame safeguard.
4. Ignition transformer is bad. • See the Solution for Possible Cause
#2 above.
- Replace the ignition transformer if
it is operating incorrectly when 120
VAC is present at the input side of the
transformer.
1. Combustion air is not sufﬁcient (continued on next
page).
• The ﬁlter at the inlet to the blower is
blocked.
- Clean the ﬁlter daily. Refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter,
Daily PM section, Clean Combustion
Blower Air Filter procedure.
Pilot Flame Partial or Lazy
(continued on next page)
6-16
• Combustion blower rotation direction is
incorrect. Refer to the INSTALLATION
chapter, Pre-Operational Checkout section, Electrical Connection
Checkout, procedure.
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
PILOT IGNITION
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1. Combustion air is not
sufﬁcient (continued from
previous page).
SOLUTION
• Combustion blower motor is bad.
- Replace the motor.
• Gas/air mixture needs adjustment.
Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Burner
System section, Pilot Gas/Air Mixture
Check and Adjustment procedure.
2. Ignition is irregular or
absent.
• Pilot burner assembly is dirty. Refer
to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
chapter, Semi-Annual PM section
Check and Clean Spark Plug and
Pilot Assembly procedure.
• Line voltage to the unit may be too
low. It must be within +5% to -10% of
the voltage on the nameplate.
• Voltage to the ﬂame safeguard may be
too low. Check the voltage at the main
voltage terminal strip #93. It must be
within +5% to -10% of 120 V.
(continued from previous page)
Pilot Flame Partial or Lazy
- Check for ﬂuctuating or incorrect incoming voltage. Check power requirements on the unit nameplate.
• Ignition spark plug or wire is bad, or
the spark plug gap is incorrect.
- Inspect/replace the wire. Refer to the
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Semi-Annual PM section, Check
and Clean Spark Plug and Pilot Assembly procedure.
• 6000 V ignition transformer may be
bad. Refer to the Ignition Transformer: Not Operating Correctly issue
within this subsection.
• If no other problems are found and
the ignition is still incorrect, the ﬂame
safeguard is bad.
- Replace the ﬂame safeguard.
TOC
INDEX
6-17
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
BURNER IGNITION
ISSUE
Flame Does Not Travel Down
the Entire Length of the
Burner Within 10 Seconds
After Ignition
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1. External and/or internal
manual gas valves are
closed or partially closed.
• Open the manual gas valves.
2. Gas pressure is wrong.
• Refer to the Gas Flow: Poor, Irregular, None issue within this subsection.
3. Combustion blower is not
delivering enough air.
• Refer to the Pilot Ignition subsection,
Pilot Flame: Partial or Lazy, #1 issue.
4. Burner tips are clogged.
• Clean. Refer to the REPAIR chapter,
Burner System section, Burner Tip
Maintenance procedure.
1. External and/or internal
manual gas valves are
closed.
• Make sure the external and internal
manual gas valves are open before
starting the burner.
2. Incoming gas pressure is
too high or too low due to
an incorrect gas supply or
other gas-burning equipment in the area.
• Check the incoming gas pressure
during periods of peak demand and
adjust, if necessary. Refer to the
INSTALLATION chapter, Pre-Operational Checkout section, Gas Connection Checkout procedure.
3. Gas valve coil or ﬂame
safeguard is bad.
• Check the voltage at the gas valve
coil when the burner system calls for
heat.
Gas Flow: Poor, Irregular,
None
- If 120 VAC is present but the valve
doesn’t open, the gas valve is bad and
must be replaced.
- If the voltage is well below 120 VAC,
check the line voltage to the unit.
- If there is no voltage at all, the ﬂame
safeguard may need to be replaced.
4. On-site gas demand is
irregular due to other
equipment.
6-18
TOC
• Check the incoming gas pressure
during periods of peak demand and
adjust, if necessary. Refer to the
INSTALLATION chapter, Pre-Operational Checkout section, Gas Connection Checkout procedure.
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
BURNER IGNITION
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1. Gas ﬂow to the burner is
insufﬁcient.
• Within this subsection, refer to the Gas
Flow: Poor, Irregular, None issue.
2. UV ﬂame scanner in the
right endframe fails to
detect a ﬂame. This can
occur if the scanner is
dirty, poorly aligned, or
damaged.
• Clean the UV ﬂame scanner in the
right endframe. Refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Monthly PM section, Clean Touchless
Temperature Sensors & UV Flame
Scanner procedure.
• Realign the UV ﬂame scanner in the
right endframe. Refer to the REPAIR
chapter, Burner System section, UV
Flame Scanner Alignment Adjustment procedure.
• Replace the UV ﬂame scanner in
the right endframe if it is damaged.
Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Burner
System section, UV Flame Scanner
Replacement procedure.
Burner Starts Normally, Then
Shuts Down
3. Exhaust system backﬂow
has caused sail switch to
close.
• Check/clean exhaust system as necessary. For cleaning instructions, refer
to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
chapter, Weekly PM section, Check
and Clean Sail Switch and Exhaust
Blower Wheel procedure.
• Check/replace defective sail switch.
4. Combustion air pressure
switch has closed.
• Check/clean combustion blower as
necessary. For cleaning instructions,
refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Weekly PM section, Check and Clean Combustion
Blower Wheel procedure.
• Check/replace defective combustion
air pressure switch.
5. Relay CR1 is bad.
• Check. Replace, if necessary.
• Check. Replace, if necessary.
6. If no other problems are
found and the burner will
not stay lit, the ﬂame safeguard is bad.
TOC
INDEX
6-19
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
BURNER OPERATION
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1. Spark plug gap is incorrect.
Ironing Cylinder Heats to SET
Temperature, but Will Not
Ignite a Second Time
SOLUTION
• Refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Semi-Annual PM
section, Check and Clean Spark Plug
and Pilot Assembly procedure.
2. Pilot assembly is operating • Within this section refer to the Pilot
incorrectly.
Ignition subsection.
3. If the HIGH LIMIT indicator • Refer to the Temperature HIGH LIMIT
Red Indicator Lamp Comes On issue
lamp is on, the temperature of the ironing cylinder
next.
is too hot.
WARNING
Turn the gas switch OFF before proceeding. Find out why the ironing
cylinder overheated and correct the problem before operating the unit.
Temperature HIGH LIMIT Red
Indicator Lamp Comes On
1. TEMPERATURE CONTROL was set at too high
a temperature.
• Check the setting of the TEMPERATURE CONTROL for the type of
ﬂatwork being processed. Refer to the
OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter,
Operating Techniques section, Processing Standards subsection.
2. Feeding technique is
improper.
• Use correct feeding techniques. Refer
to the OPERATING GUIDELINES
chapter, Daily Operating Procedures
section, Flatwork Handling procedure.
3. A touchless temperature
sensor is not operating
correctly.
• Refer to the Touchless Temperature
Sensors Operating Incorrectly issue
at the end of this subsection.
High Limit Test Procedure-Complete after the problem is correct:
1. Allow plenty of time for the cylinder to cool off. The HIGH LIMIT temperature control will not reset as long as the temperature is above
the high temperature limit.
2. Turn the GAS switch to ON.
3. Press the red HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT RESET button on the left
endframe control panel. The red HIGH LIMIT indicator lamp should
go out.
- If the HIGH LIMIT indicator lamp stays on, check the thermocouple
wires on the touchless high limit sensor for a break, short circuit, or
poor connection.
6-20
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
BURNER OPERATION
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1. If “UUU” or “LLL” is dis• Check the touchless temperature senplayed in red in the ACTUsor thermocouple wire connectors and
AL temperature window,
wire terminations inside the connectors
the output of the control
for poor connections or breaks. The
has disconnected power
limits of the control are exceeded.
from ﬂame safeguard.
The burner system shuts
down.
2. If “AL 7” is displayed in red • Stop using the TEMPERATURE CONTROL immediately and replace.
in the ACTUAL window,
there is a fault in the TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Displays Unusual LED Messages
3. ACTUAL temperature is
decreasing while burner
is on and ﬂatwork is not
adversely cooling down
the heated cylinder.
• The touchless temperature sensor
thermocouple wires are connected in
reverse on the TEMPERATURE CONTROL. Terminal #1 should be yellow.
Terminal #2 should be red.
4. ACTUAL temperature
• Check tightness of thermocouple wire
seems lower than it should
connectors and wire terminations at
be.
the touchless temperature sensor and
the TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
• Check the touchless temperature sensors and replace them if necessary.
Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Burner
System section, Touchless Temperature Sensor Replacement procedure.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
1. This is normal unless othDisplays 20º to 40º F Higher
erwise mentioned.
than ACTUAL at Ambient Temperature
TEMPERATURE CONTROL Erratic or Does Not Work
(continued on next page)
• No solution necessary. Temperature
Control’s accuracy is in operating
range.
• Set the TEMPERATURE CONTROL
1. ON LED is on, and the
at a slightly higher temperature. The
HEAT LED is not. Cylinder
TEMPERATURE CONTROL should
temperature is at the SET
begin calling for heat again.
point and the TEMPERATURE CONTROL is not
calling for heat.
2. Operators are not using
the full length of the ironing cylinder. This causes
the cylinder ends to heat
up and temperature to
ﬂuctuate up and down.
TOC
INDEX
• Refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating Procedures section, Flatwork Handling
procedure.
6-21
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
BURNER OPERATION
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
3. TEMPERATURE CONTROL is out of calibration.
• Inspect the TEMPERATURE CONTROL and replace, if necessary. Refer
to the REPAIR chapter, Burner System section, Temperature Control
Replacement procedure.
WARNING
Always remove the temporary jumper wire
immediately after the following test.
4. TEMPERATURE CONTROL is bad.
• Check by temporarily connecting a
jumper wire between terminals 4 and
5 of the TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
If the burner ﬁres, replace the TEMPERATURE CONTROL. Refer to the
REPAIR chapter, Burner System section, Temperature Control Replacement procedure.
5. One or more of the
touchless temperature
sensors are operating
incorrectly.
• Inspect the touchless temperature sensors inside each endframe.
(continued from previous page)
TEMPERATURE CONTROL Erratic or Does Not Work
• Refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Monthly PM section, Clean Touchless Temperature
Sensors and UV Flame Scanner
procedure.
• Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Burner
System section, Touchless Temperature Sensor Replacement procedure.
Flames Coming From Ends of
Ironing Cylinder
(continued on next page)
6-22
1. Combustion blower is not
delivering enough air.
• Refer to the Pilot Ignition subsection,
Pilot Flame Partial or Lazy, #1.
2. Burner tips are clogged or
a burner tip has come out.
• Refer to the REPAIR chapter, Burner
System section, Burner Tip Maintenance procedure.
3. Gas supply to the burner
is too low when the main
gas valve opens.
• Check the gas pressure when the main
valve opens. Refer to the INSTALLATION chapter, Pre-Operational
Checkout section, Gas Connection
Checkout procedure.
4. Burner gas valve is leaking.
• Inspect the burner gas valve and
tighten or replace, if necessary.
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
BURNER OPERATION
ISSUE
(continued from previous page)
Flames Coming From Ends of
Ironing Cylinder
Touchless Temperature Sensors Operating Incorrectly
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
5. Flames come out brieﬂy
during ignition.
• Refer to the Burner Ignition subsection, Flame Does Travel Down the
Entire Length of the Burner Within 10
Seconds After Ignition.
6. If the ﬂames come out for
a longer period of time,
the gas pressure is wrong.
• Refer to the INSTALLATION chapter,
Pre-Operational Checkout section,
Gas Connection Checkout procedure.
1. Touchless temperature
sensors are dirty.
• Refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Monthly PM section, Clean Touchless Temperature
Sensors and UV Flame Scanner
procedure.
2. Wires from the touchless
temperature sensor to the
TEMPERATURE CONTROL are shorting to one
another or grounding out.
• Carefully inspect the insulation on
all thermocouple wires and replace if
damaged. Either wire could be broken.
Never splice thermocouple wire.
3. Red and yellow thermo• Reverse the red and yellow thermocouple wires are reversed,
couple wires.
causing the TEMPERATURE CONTROL to
malfunction.
4. Touchless temperature
sensor is bad.
TOC
INDEX
• Inspect the sensors and replace,
if necessary. Refer to the REPAIR
chapter, Burner System section,
Touchless Temperature Sensor
Replacement procedure.
6-23
Troubleshooting
GO 20
WARNING
Only trained personnel with experience
in gas, electrical or mechanical repair
should troubleshoot and repair the unit.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Read the REPAIR chapter and make
sure that the power is disconnected
before doing any repairs.
6.5 Exhaust System
ISSUE
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1. Exhaust blower motor
protector is tripped.
• Reset the motor protector.
2. Exhaust blower motor is
binding.
• Inspect the exhaust blower motor.
Refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Weekly PM section,
Check and Clean Motors procedure.
3. Exhaust blower sail switch
and/or wheel is dirty.
• Check for lint build up on the sail
switch and exhaust blower wheel.
Refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Weekly PM section,
Check and Clean Sail Switch and
Exhaust Blower Wheel procedure.
4. Sail switch is operating
incorrectly.
• With the unit running, check the circuit
for the sail switch by testing for 24 V
between terminal 11 and GND in the
main electrical panel. If 24 V is not
present, the sail switch is bad and
must be replaced.
5. Wire connections for the
exhaust blower motor are
loose or disconnected.
• Check the wire connections from the
exhaust blower to the main electrical
panel. Refer to the INSTALLATION
chapter, Installation Procedures section, Electrical Connection procedure.
6. Screens are blocking the
end of the exhaust duct
work.
• Remove any screens from the end of
the ductwork. Refer to the INSTALLATION chapter, Installation Procedures section, Exhaust Blower
Installation procedure.
7. Exhaust duct work in the
canopy is dirty or blocked.
• Clean out the exhaust duct work.
Exhaust Poor or None
6-24
SOLUTION
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Chapter 7
REPAIR
Although designed for long service life, some individual consumable parts of the GO 20TM eventually
wear during normal use and must be cleaned, adjusted, or replaced. This chapter includes the following
sections:
7.1
Safety Considerations
7.6
Burner System
7.2
Parts Availability
7.7
Return Section
7.3
Feed Section
7.8
Delivery Section–Type R Unit
7.4
Compression Roll
7.9
Machine Speed Sensor
7.5
Ironing Section
As a general rule:
•
Replace ribbons when they are worn or broken, when tension can no longer be adjusted, or
when ﬂatwork does not feed smoothly into the ironing section.
•
Replace roll covers when they are worn smooth, when the ribbons slip in place, or when the
general ﬁnish of the ﬂatwork is unsatisfactory after other causes have been ruled out.
•
Replace tracking tape when it is worn smooth or when ribbons slip in place.
•
Clean the ironing cylinder when deposits or debris affect the ﬁnish of processed ﬂatwork.
•
Follow the Preventive Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of the PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE chapter.
WARNING
Do not try to repair or correct any condition without reading and
understanding this Repair Chapter.
Only qualiﬁed personnel should troubleshoot and repair the machine.
WARNING
Always ensure the unit is completely cooled down and the power is
shut OFF at the main disconnect switch before servicing the unit.
TOC
INDEX
7-1
Repair
GO 20
7.1 Safety Considerations
Before attempting any repair work, review
these safety steps and precautions to protect
yourself and the unit.
•
•
Safety should be the primary concern of
anyone performing repair work on the
unit.
Only work on the unit when it has been
completely cooled down following
the procedures in the OPERATING
GUIDELINES chapter.
•
Make sure the GAS ON/OFF switch is
turned to OFF and the TEMPERATURE
CONTROL is set to zero.
•
All maintenance procedures should
be handled by at least two qualiﬁed
persons. Using the “buddy system”
facilitates a quicker procedure and
decreases the risk of an accident.
•
Always keep hands and clothing away
from the moving parts of the machine
when it must be running to make repairs
or adjustments.
•
Never bypass any of the unit’s safety
features. Only operate the unit with
endframe doors and all guards in
place and all safety features operating
correctly.
•
Never stand, sit, or kneel on a receiving
shelf.
•
Your site should lockout/tagout
procedures in place that comply with
government standards for performing
maintenance and repair. Ask your
supervisor for speciﬁc information.
•
The JOG switch remains powered
even when one of the safety interlock
switches is open. This keeps it available
for emergency use. It is very important
that the unit is properly tagged according
to the site’s government-approved
procedures whenever repair work is
being done.
Except where speciﬁcally directed,
make sure the power is turned OFF at
the main disconnect switch.
WARNING
Always use extreme caution
when performing any repair
procedure requiring the unit
to be operating.
Take every precaution
to keep hands and loose
clothing from coming into
contact with any of the
moving rolls or other
moving parts.
Serious Injury Could Result.
Whenever the unit is running,
one person should be ready
at a red safety STOP button
at all times to stop the unit
if necessary.
7-2
•
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
WARNING
Know the proper lockout/
tagout procedures for
equipment during repair.
Follow the rules of your work
site. Failure to do so could
result in serious injury.
Do not repair or correct any
condition without reading
and understanding the repair
procedure.
7.2 Parts Availability
Replacement and repair parts can be ordered
through your local authorized CHICAGO ®
distributor. Questions about the operation,
maintenance, troubleshooting, or repair of the unit
can also be directed to your distributor.
In addition, questions may be directed to
the Chicago Dryer Company factory Service
Department by calling (773) 235-4430.
NOTE: Use only factory warranty
tested and approved replacement
parts when repairing a Chicago®
unit. They are designed for each
speciﬁc machine model and serial
number. Overnight shipment of
parts is available.
Only qualiﬁed personnel
should troubleshoot and
repair this unit.
Always make sure that the
machine is cooled down and
that power is disconnected
before servicing the unit.
TOC
INDEX
7-3
Repair
GO 20
Feed Ribbon Tension Adjustment
7.3 Feed Section
Flatwork is directed into the unit through the
feed section, which consists of the following
components (Figure 7-1):
•
Feed Table (A)
•
Feed Ribbon Drive Roll (B)
•
Feed Ribbons (C)
•
Doffer Roll (D)
•
Guide Tapes (E)
Required Tools
Wrenches:
3/8”
9/16”
Various of these components require periodic
adjustment, replacement, or occasional repair.
These procedures include:
Feed Ribbon Tension Adjustment
•
Feed Ribbon Replacement
•
Feed Ribbon Drive Roll Friction
Material Replacement
•
Guide Tape Replacement
•
Doffer Roll Cover Replacement
•
Feed Table Alignment and Positioning
A
C
D
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
•
B
Adjust the tension of the feed ribbons when
they sag or track to one side of the ironing section.
Both conditions cause excessive wear on the
ribbons and shorten their life.
3. Locate the feed ribbons drive roll tension
adjustment bolts (Figure 7-2, A). There is
one on each side of the machine.
4. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, loosen its locknut (Figure 7-2, B).
5. Adjust each bolt the same number of turns
clockwise until the ribbons are snug.
A
E
B
Figure 7-2: Feed ribbon tension adjustment in the
left endframe.
Figure 7-1: Feed section components.
7-4
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
6. The machine will not operate while a
safety microswitch is open. As a temporary measure during this work, defeat each
endframe interlock switch by pulling out
on its plunger.
7. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
8. Turn the SPEED knob to the slowest
speed.
9. Run the unit brieﬂy and make sure the ribbons track straight and do not rub on the
ribbon guides under the feed table.
11. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
12. Either turn the adjusting bolt counterclockwise at the high tension end, or turn
the adjusting bolt clockwise at the low
tension end.
13. Repeat Steps 7 to 12 until the ribbons have
the correct tension and track evenly.
14. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
15. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, secure its locknut.
16. Push the interlock switch plungers in; then,
close and secure both endframe doors.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
10. If tension on the ribbons is uneven, ribbons
track toward the end of the drive roll where
the tension is highest.
TOC
INDEX
7-5
Repair
GO 20
Feed Ribbon Replacement
Feed ribbons stretch and flatwork moves
unevenly and improperly into the ironing section.
When tension on these ribbons can no longer be
adjusted, the entire set must be replaced.
6. Turn each bolt the same number of turns
counterclockwise until the ribbons are
easily moved by hand.
7. Place the wooden wedges under each end
of the doffer roll to hold it above the feed
ribbons.
NOTE: Read the FEED RIBBON
REPLACEMENT section on the
Pink Operator Safety Reminder
in the front of this manual.
Replacing Worn Ribbons
Use this procedure to replace ribbons that are
still in place, but are worn out.
WARNING
Never start the unit while
installing the feed ribbons.
It is dangerous
and unnecessary.
8. Pull the worn ribbons around their tracks
until all the lacing clips are accessible and
aligned at the front of the unit.
Required Tools
Pliers
Wooden wedges
Wrenches:
3/8”
9/16”
9. Remove the connecting pin from an old
ribbon and attach a new ribbon to one
end.
10. Pull the old ribbon through until the new
ribbon is in place.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Verify the replacement ribbons are the correct size and there is sufﬁcient quantity to
complete the procedure. See the PARTS
LIST.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Open both endframe doors.
4. Locate the feed ribbons drive roll tension
adjustment bolts (Figure 7-2, A). There is
one on each side of the machine.
7-6
5. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, loosen its locknut (Figure 7-2, B).
TOC
11. Disconnect the old ribbon and connect the
ends of the new ribbon with a new pin.
12. Repeat Steps 9 to 11 to replace additional
worn ribbons. Stagger the positions of the
lacing clips to give the ﬂatwork a smooth
ﬂow.
13. Remove the wooden wedges from the
ends of the doffer roll, allowing it to rest
on the ribbons.
14. Adjust ribbon tension following the Feed
Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure
earlier in this section.
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Replacing Broken or Missing Ribbons
WARNING
Never start the unit while
installing the feed ribbons.
It is dangerous
and unnecessary.
Ribbons that break should be replaced
immediately. To avoid excessive stress on only
one new, slightly shorter ribbon, the entire set of
ribbons should be replaced. At a minimum, it is
recommended that ribbons be replaced in pairs.
Required Tools
9. Position a replacement feed ribbon seamside down on the feed table. Push the ribbon under both the doffer roll and the red
safety ﬁnger guard.
Pliers
Screwdriver: long shaft
Wooden wedges
Wrenches:
3/8”
9/16”
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Verify the replacement ribbons are the
correct size and sufﬁcient quantity for
completing the procedure. See the PARTS
LIST.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Open both endframe doors.
4. Locate the feed ribbons drive roll tension
adjustment bolts (Figure 7-2, A). There is
one on each side of the machine.
5. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, loosen its locknut (Figure 7-2, B).
10. Using a long-shafted screwdriver or
similar tool, push the leading edge of the
ribbon down the back edge of the feed
table. Be careful not to scratch the ironing
cylinder.
11. Reach under the feed table and pull the
end of the ribbon toward the front of the
unit. Make sure the ribbon end is below the
rod and between the feed ribbon guides.
Verify that the replacement ribbon follows
the path of the other ribbons.
12. Bring the ends of the ribbon together and
connect the ends with a new pin.
13. Repeat Steps 9 to 12 to replace additional
missing ribbons. Stagger the positions
of the lacing clips to give the ﬂatwork a
smooth ﬂow.
NOTE: If the remaining ribbons
are being replaced, refer to
the Replacing Worn Ribbons
procedure.
6. Turn each bolt the same number of turns
counterclockwise until the ribbons are
easily moved by hand.
7. Place the wooden wedges under each end
of the doffer roll to hold it above the feed
ribbons.
8. Remove a ribbon from each end of the
unit and use one or both as replacement
ribbons. These end ribbons can then be
replaced by a pair of new ribbons.
TOC
14. Remove the wooden wedges from the
ends of the doffer roll, allowing it to rest
on the ribbons.
15. Adjust ribbon tension following the Feed
Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure
earlier in this section.
INDEX
7-7
Repair
GO 20
Feed Ribbon Drive Roll Friction
Material Replacement
The friction material on the feed ribbon drive
roll must be replaced if the feed ribbons slip in
place when the tension is adjusted correctly.
4. Locate the feed ribbons drive roll tension
adjustment bolts (Figure 7-2, A). There is
one on each side of the machine.
5. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, loosen its locknut (Figure 7-2, B).
6. Turn each bolt the same number of turns
counterclockwise until the ribbons are
easily moved by hand.
NOTE: This procedure requires
at least two workers: One to turn
the roll and apply the cement, and
one to apply the friction material. It
is preferable to use three workers,
each performing a single task.
7. Place the wooden wedges under each end
of the doffer roll to hold it above the feed
ribbons.
8. Pull the feed ribbons around their tracks
until all the lacing clips are accessible and
aligned at the front of the unit.
Required Tools
Chain puller
Clean cloth
Contact cement: 3M #10 or
equivalent
Filament tape
Marker
Masking tape
Paint brush: natural bristle
Pliers
Protective covering
Scraper/sandpaper/steel brush
Screwdriver
Utility knife
Wooden wedges
Wrenches:
3/8”
9/16”
11/16”
1-3/8” or Crescent
9. Remove all the connecting pins from the
feed ribbons. Position the feed ribbons
away from the drive roll.
10. The friction material must be applied while
the feed ribbon drive roll turns freely:
a) Release tension on the drive chain
(Figure 7-3, A); refer to the Ironing
Section section, Drive Chain Tension
Adjustment procedure.
b) Locate the clips that secure the ends of
the drive chain together.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Verify the correct replacement parts are
available, including the friction material,
cement, and ﬁlament tape. See the PARTS
LIST.
B
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Open both endframe doors.
7-8
A
Figure 7-3: Remove the drive chain from the feed
ribbon drive roll.
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
c) Use a chain puller to relieve tension at
the site of the clips and remove them.
d) Remove the chain from the feed ribbon
drive roll sprocket (B).
11. Place a tarp, plastic drop cloth, heavy paper, or another temporary protective covering over the ironing cylinder, compression
roll, return ribbons, and receiving shelf.
12. Cut and remove the ﬁlament tape located
at each end of the drive roll.
13. Pull or cut off the old feed ribbon drive
roll friction material.
14. Remove old cement from the drive roll
with a scraper, coarse sandpaper, or a steel
brush. Wipe away remaining residue with
a clean cloth. Make sure the roll surface is
completely clean and dry.
NOTE: Spiral-wind the friction
material at a 45° angle (Figure 74, A). To ensure this, the material
edges must be aligned with no
gaps.
15. Spiral wind the new cover over the roll
without cement to make sure there is
enough material to cover the roll. Put it on
in the same spiral pattern as before.
16. Starting from the drive side of the machine, dry ﬁt two or three full turns of the
material to establish the correct angle.
Make sure the material edges align with
no gaps. Secure with masking tape.
17. Use a paint brush to apply an even coat
of cement over a short section of the
exposed roll (about two turns worth),
making sure the entire surface is covered
(Figure 7-5).
18. Carefully continue to turn the roll, making
sure the material goes on smoothly without
any gaps.
19. Continue working down the length of the
roll applying the friction material quickly
after the cement is spread.
20. After the roll is covered, wrap the other
end of the roll with masking tape.
21. Go back to the drive side of the roll, remove
the masking tape and carefully unwind the
un-cemented portion of the material.
22. Using the same technique, apply the cement and carefully rewind the material
onto the roll.
23. Secure the end with masking tape.
Sprial Wound
Friction Material (A)
Filament Tape (B)
Figure 7-4: Friction material is secured with glass
ﬁlament tape.
TOC
Figure 7-5: Apply an even coat of cement.
INDEX
7-9
Repair
GO 20
Guide Tape Replacement
NOTE: If any cement gets onto
the friction material surface, use a
piece of masking tape to lift if off.
24. Wait about 10 minutes for the glue to
harden; then, trim the ends of the friction
material so it is even with the edges of
the roll.
25. Carefully remove the masking tape.
26. Secure the friction material at each end of
the drive roll with several wraps of glass
ﬁlament tape. Tape from the top while
turning the roll in its normal rotational
direction (Figure 7-4, B).
27. Remove the temporary protective covering
and clean up the area.
28. Reinstall the drive chain on its sprocket
and adjust its tension; refer to the Ironing
Section section, Drive Chain Tension
Adjustment procedure.
29. Refasten the feed ribbons. Make sure the
ribbon end is below the rod and between
the feed ribbon guides. Stagger the positions of the lacing clips to give the ﬂatwork
a smooth ﬂow.
30. Remove the wooden wedges from the
ends of the doffer roll, allowing it to rest
on the ribbons.
The guide tapes (Figure 7-6) that go around
the guide tape bar, compression roll, and doffer
roll keep ﬂatwork from sticking to and wrapping
around the compression roll. These tapes wear
through at the staples or break over time,
requiring replacement.
NOTE: Replace any missing or
broken guide tapes immediately.
Replacing the First Guide Tape
If at least one guide tape is still in place, go
to the Replacing Subsequent Guide Tapes
procedure which follows. If all the guide tapes
have been removed, follow these steps to position
the ﬁrst tape.
Required Tools
Stapler/staples
Utility knife
Wrench: 9/16”
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Make sure a sufﬁcient length of replacement guide tape is available.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
31. Allow the cement to harden for about 2
hours before operating the unit.
32. After the cement hardens, adjust ribbon
tension following the Feed Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure earlier in this
section.
Figure 7-6: Guide tapes help keep ﬂatwork from
wrapping around the compression roll.
7-10
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
3. Open both endframe doors.
4. Disengage the compression roll springloaded handles from their bracket slots in
each endframe (Figure 7-7).
5. Remove the red safety ﬁnger guard:
a) Note the positioning of the spacers
and/or washers at the front left and
right of the guard.
b) In the left endframe, remove the lower
bolt which pushes against the safety
microswitch (Figure 7-8, A).
Figure 7-7: The spring-loaded handles are located
in each endframe.
c) Have a worker support the left side of
the guard and then remove the upper
bolt (B).
d) In the right endframe, remove the upper bolt.
B
CAUTION
Take care not to damage
the safety switch that rides
on the lower bolt in the
endframes.
e) The bottom right bolt will slide out of
the left endframe with the guard. Carefully remove the guard. Make sure to
keep track of all spacers and washers.
WARNING
Never start the unit while
installing the guide tapes.
It is dangerous
and unnecessary.
A
Figure 7-8: Red safety ﬁnger guard and
microswitch.
D
C
A
B
6. Pass the guide tape over the top of the
compression roll (Figure 7-9, A) and loop
it around the guide tapes support bar (B);
then, pass it under the compression roll
and the doffer roll (C).
Figure 7-9: The guide tapes help keep ﬂatwork
from sticking to the compression roll.
TOC
INDEX
7-11
Repair
GO 20
7. Align and overlap the ends of the replacement guide tape 5 to 6” (120 to 150 mm),
leaving a small amount of slack. Cut the
tape from the roll. Do not staple the ends
of the tape at this time.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to position the rest
of the guide tapes, or go to the Replacing
Subsequent Guide Tapes procedure.
9. Replace red safety ﬁnger guard by reversing Step 5.
10. Place the spring-loaded handles in their
bracket slots inside each endframe to add
tension to the compression roll.
11. Close and secure both endframe doors.
12. Pull the leading edge of the ﬁrst replacement guide table through the bars in the
red safety ﬁnger guard (Figure 7-6, 7-9,
D)
CAUTION
The trailing edge of each
guide tape must be on top or
the tape edge can be caught
on the feed ribbons, causing
it to break.
Replacing Subsequent Guide Tapes
If at least one guide tape is in place on the unit,
it is possible to use this procedure to replace all
of the guide tapes. This procedure is easier than
the Replacing the First Guide Tape procedure
since it is not necessary to remove the red safety
ﬁnger guard.
Required Tools
Stapler/staples
Utility knife
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Make sure a sufﬁcient length of replacement guide tape is available.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Open both endframe doors.
4. Disengage the compression roll springloaded handles from their bracket slots in
each endframe (Figure 7-7).
13. Align and overlap the ends of the guide
tape 5 to 6” (120 to 150 mm). Be sure
the trailing edge of the guide tape is on
top and the leading edge is on the bottom
(Figure 7-9).
Trailing end
overlaps by 5-6”
(125-150 mm)
14. Staple the ends together, placing a staple
near each end of the tape with one to three
additional staples spaced evenly between
(Figure 7-10).
Staples
15. Repeat Steps 12 to 14 for the remaining
guide tapes.
16. Close and secure both endframe doors.
Figure 7-10: The trailing edge of the guide tape
must be on top, and the leading edge
must be on the bottom.
7-12
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
5. Cut the guide tape to be replaced at any
convenient position.
6. Using a roll of replacement guide tape,
staple the leading edge of the new guide
tape onto the old guide tape being replaced
using one or two staples.
Doffer Roll Cover Replacement
Follow this procedure to replace a worn doffer
roll cover.
Required Tools
Chalk/pencil/marker
Filament tape
Protective covering
Putty knife
Scraper/sandpaper/steel brush
Stapler/staples
Staple puller
Utility knife
Wooden wedges
WARNING
Never start the unit while
installing the guide tapes.
It is dangerous and
unnecessary.
7. Pull the old guide tape through until the
new guide tape is in place.
8. When both ends of the replacement guide
tape are accessible, remove the staple(s)
and discard the old guide tape.
CAUTION
The trailing edge must be on
top or the edge may catch on
the feed ribbons, causing it
to break.
9. Align and overlap the ends of the replacement guide tape 5 to 6” (120 to 150 mm),
leaving a small amount of slack. Be sure
the trailing edge is on top and the leading
edge on the bottom (Figure 7-9). Cut the
tape from the roll.
10. Staple the tape together, placing a staple
near each end of the tape with one to three
additional staples spaced evenly between
(Figure 7-10).
11. Repeat Steps 5 to 10 to replace additional
guide tapes.
12. Place the spring-loaded handles in their
bracket slots inside each endframe to add
tension to the compression roll.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Verify the correct replacement parts are
available, including the replacement cover
size, cement, and ﬁlament tape. See the
PARTS LIST.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Place the wooden wedges under each end
of the doffer roll to raise it.
4. Use a staple puller to remove the staples
holding the ends of the guide tapes together. Move the guide tapes out of the
way.
5. Place a tarp, plastic drop cloth, heavy
paper, or another temporary protective
covering over the ironing cylinder, compression roll, and feed ribbons.
6. Pull or cut off the old doffer roll cover.
7. Remove old cement from the doffer roll
with a scraper, coarse sandpaper, or a steel
brush. Wipe away any remaining residue
with a clean cloth.
13. Close and secure both endframe doors.
TOC
INDEX
7-13
Repair
GO 20
15. Align and overlap the ends of the ﬁrst
guide tape. Be sure the trailing edge of the
guide tape is on top and the leading edge
is on the bottom (Figure 7-9).
NOTE: Spiral-wind the friction
material at a 45° angle. To ensure
this, the material edges must be
aligned with no gaps.
8. Spiral wind the new cover over the roll
without cement to make sure there is
enough material to cover the roll. Put it on
in the same spiral pattern as before.
9. Mark and cut the cover at the start of the
winding, parallel to the end of the roll
(Figures 7-11 and 7-12).
10. In a strip along the full length of the doffer
roll, apply the cement evenly on 1/4 to
1/3 of the roll. Smooth it out with a putty
knife.
11. Position the starting edge at the end of the
roll and secure it with several wraps of
ﬁlament tape (Figures 7-12 and 7-13).
12. Carefully spiral-wind the cover onto the
roll, making sure it goes on smoothly
without any gaps.
16. Staple the ends together, placing a staple
near each end of the tape with one to three
additional staples spaced evenly between
(Figure 7-10).
17. Repeat this process for the remaining
guide tapes.
18. Remove the wooden wedges from the ends
of the doffer roll, allowing it to rest on the
feed ribbons.
19. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch and start the unit to make sure the
cover is secure and smooth against the
doffer roll.
20. If any adjustment to the cover is necessary,
stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch before making the
adjustment.
13. Trim off any excess cover material from
the end of the doffer roll. Secure the end
of the cover to the doffer roll with several
wraps of ﬁlament tape (Figure 7-13).
14. Remove the temporary protective covering from the feed ribbons and clean up
the area.
Figure 7-12: When properly cut and positioned, the
cover should be ﬂush with the end of
the doffer roll.

Figure 7-11: Mark and cut the cover at the start of
the winding, parallel to the end of the
roll.
Figure 7-13: Secure the end of the cover to the
doffer roll with ﬁlament tape.
7-14
INDEX
TOC
GO 20
Repair
Feed Table Alignment and
Positioning
Required Tools
The feed table is an important component in
the feed section and must be properly aligned and
positioned. If the feed table becomes bowed out
of shape or is positioned too far from the ironing
cylinder, ﬂatwork may not feed properly into the
ironing section.
Bar stock:
1/4”
3/8”
Wooden wedges
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
Checking Alignment and Positioning
Improper handling of the unit during shipping
can cause too much tension on the feed table,
making it bow upward excessively. A feed table
that is in poor alignment is usually due to heavy
items being set on it, or people standing on it. Over
time, normal daily use also causes the table to sag
slightly. Any of these conditions may cause ﬂatwork
to feed improperly.
When properly aligned and positioned, the feed
table will bow slightly upward in the middle. The
leading edge should be 1/4” (6 mm) from the
ironing cylinder at either end and 3/8” (9 mm)
from the ironing cylinder in the middle (Figure
7-14).
2. Open both endframe doors.
3. Locate the feed ribbons drive roll tension
adjustment bolts (Figure 7-2, A). There is
one on each side of the machine.
4. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, loosen its locknut (Figure 7-2, B).
5. Turn each bolt the same number of turns
counterclockwise until the ribbons are
easily moved by hand.
6. Place the wooden wedges under each end
of the doffer roll to hold it above the feed
ribbons.
7. Pull the feed ribbons around their tracks
until all the lacing clips are accessible and
aligned at the front of the unit.
IRONING CYLINDER
1/4" (6 mm) GAP
3/8" (9 mm) GAP
1/4" (6 mm) GAP
FEED TABLE
BOTTOM VIEW
Figure 7-14: Proper feed table positioning is important for ﬂatwork to feed properly into the ironing section.
TOC
INDEX
7-15
Repair
GO 20
8. Remove all the connecting pins from the
feed ribbons. Position the feed ribbons
away from the drive roll.
Adjusting Alignment and Positioning
Required Tools
Bar stock:
1/4”
3/8”
Drill
Drill bit: 1/4”
Wrenches:
9/16” (2)
1-1/8”
9. Use a small piece of 1/4” bar stock to
check the spacing between the feed table
and ironing cylinder at each end. There
should be a snug ﬁt. Use a small piece of
3/8” bar stock to check the spacing at the
center of the unit.
10. If the feed table is:
a) Not properly positioned, go to the Adjusting Alignment and Positioning
procedure, next.
b) Properly positioned, reconnect the feed
ribbons. Make sure the ribbon end is
below the rod and between the feed
ribbon guides. Perform the Feed Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure
earlier in this section.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. From each end of the feed table, remove
the 1/4” roll pins connecting the table
ends to their support brackets. These pins
are used to help keep the feed table in
position.
2. Starting at one end of the unit, loosen
the locknuts in the slotted holes on the
underside of the feed table (Figure 7-15),
and position the end 1/4” (6 mm) from the
ironing cylinder. Tighten the locknuts to
secure the table.
3. Repeat Step 2 at the other end of the
unit.
FEED TABLE
SLOTTED HOLES
ROLL PIN
THREADED ADJUSTING ROD
ROLL PIN
1" DIA. PIPE
LOCK NUT
(BOTTOM DETAIL VIEW)
Figure 7-15: The slotted holes and threaded adjusting rod are used to properly align and position the feed table.
7-16
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
4. Make sure the spacing at each end of the
unit is 1/4” (6 mm) and that the locknuts
are securely tightened.
5. Check the spacing between the feed table
and the cylinder at the center of the unit
(Figure 7-14). The correct spacing is
3/8”.
• If the spacing is more than 3/8” (9
mm), tighten the locknuts equally on
each side of the threaded adjusting
rod (Figure 7-41) until the middle of
the feed table is 3/8” from the ironing
cylinder.
7.4 Compression Roll
The compression roll (Figure 7-16) improves
flatwork finish. Some of compression roll
components require periodic adjustment,
replacement or occasional repair.
These procedures include:
•
Compression Roll Pressure Check
•
Compression Roll Pressure Adjustment
•
Compression Roll Cover Replacement
• If the spacing is less than 3/8” (9
mm), loosen the locknuts equally on
each side of the threaded adjusting
rod (Figure 7-15) until the middle of
the feed table is 3/8” from the ironing
cylinder.
6. At each end of the feed table, drill a new
1/4” (6 mm) hole through the table and the
supporting bracket. Insert a 1/4” roll pin
into the hole to maintain the new position
of the feed table.
7. Reconnect the feed ribbons. Make sure the
ribbon end is below the rod and between
the feed ribbon guides. Stagger the positions of the lacing clips to give ﬂatwork
a smooth ﬂow.
Figure 7-16: The compression roll helps to move the
ﬂatwork into the ironing section.
8. Remove the wooden wedges from the
ends of the doffer roll, allowing it to rest
on the ribbons.
9. Perform the Feed Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure earlier in this section.
TOC
INDEX
7-17
Repair
GO 20
Compression Roll Pressure Check
When ﬂatwork does not feed smoothly into the
ironing section, the pressure of the compression
roll may need to be adjusted.
It is important that there is sufﬁcient pressure
and that pressure is even from side to side. Too
little pressure will cause poor ironing quality; too
much pressure will cause premature wear of the
compression roll covers and padding.
7. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
8. Press the green START button. Turn the
SPEED knob to the slowest speed.
9. Feed the piece of paper under the compression roll (Figure 7-16) on the left side
about one-quarter of the distance from the
endframe. Immediately pull back gently
on the paper.
10. You should feel the compression roll
pulling the paper into the ironing section,
but be able to pull back the paper without
tearing it. If there is uneven or no pressure placed on the paper, or if the paper
tears, the compression roll pressure must
be adjusted.
WARNING
Speciﬁc procedures that
require the unit to be running
should be done with extreme
caution and attention
to detail.
11. Repeat Steps 9 and 10 at the middle of the
unit and on the right side about one quarter
of the distance from the endframe.
Required Tools
Brown packing paper
Utility knife
Wooden wedges
NOTE: Too little pressure in the
middle may indicate too much
pressure at the ends.
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and COOL.
Use extreme caution.
1. Make sure the unit is completely cool. For
more information, refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating Procedures section, Shut-Down
procedure.
2. Cut a piece of brown packing paper approximately 9” wide and 4’ long (230 mm
x 1200 mm).
12. If pressure is uneven or nonexistent on the
paper, compression roll pressure must be
adjusted. For more information, refer to
the Compression Roll Pressure Adjustment procedure next.
13. Remove the wooden wedges from under
each end of the doffer roll.
3. Open both endframe doors.
4. Make sure that the compression roll is
engaged; the spring-loaded handles must
be in their bracket slots in each endframe
(Figure 7-17).
5. Close and secure both endframe doors.
6. Place wooden wedges under each end of
the doffer roll to raise it.
7-18
TOC
Figure 7-17: The spring-loaded handles are located
in each endframe.
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Compression Roll Pressure
Adjustment
Compression Roll Cover
Replacement
Required Tools
Wrench: 9/16”
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
3. Disengage the compression roll springloaded handles from their bracket slots in
each endframe (Figure 7-17).
The cover on the compression roll must
be replaced when the cover material is worn
smooth or if ﬂatwork does not move easily into
the ironing section. Be sure the compression roll
pressure has been adjusted correctly ﬁrst.
Parts of this procedure require the machine
to be powered and hot. These steps should be
performed with extreme caution.
At least 3 persons should perform this
procedure: Two to work with the compression
roll padding and one standing by a red safety
STOP button.
4. Locate the ﬂat washer, adjusting nut, lock
washer, and locknut on the spring-loaded
handle in each endframe. These parts are
used to adjust the tension of the compression roll. When the handle is placed in
the bracket slot, it applies tension to the
compression roll springs.
NOTE: Read the REPLACING
COMPRESSION ROLL PADS
AND COVERS section on the
Pink Operator Safety Reminder
in the front of this manual.
5. Turn the adjustment nut clockwise to
increase the tension; counterclockwise
to decrease. Tighten the locknut once the
adjustment has been made.
WARNING
Do not attempt to replace
the compression roll
covers without experienced
personnel. This procedure
requires skill.
6. Place the spring-loaded handles in their
bracket slots inside each endframe to add
tension to the compression roll.
In addition to those
performing the work, have
one person standing by at
a red safety STOP button.
Serious injury could result.
7. Close and secure both endframe doors.
8. Perform the Compression Roll Pressure
Check procedure.
9. Make further adjustments as necessary.
NOTE: Take the time to read
through and understand the entire
procedure before replacing the
compression roll cover.
TOC
INDEX
7-19
Repair
GO 20
5. Use a staple puller to remove the staples
holding the ends of the guide tapes together. Move the guide tapes out of the
way.
Required Tools
Clean cloth
Cement
Masking tape
Protective covering
Putty knife
Scraper/sandpaper/steel brush
Utility knife
Tape measure
Wrench: 9/16”
6. Open both endframe doors.
7. Disengage the compression roll springloaded handles from their bracket slots in
each endframe (Figure 7-17).
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING.
Use extreme caution.
1. Make sure the unit is completely cool. For
more information, refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating Procedures section, Shut-Down
procedure.
2. Verify the replacement cover is the correct
size. See the PARTS LIST.
3. The cover is the length of the cylinder and
is made up of three sections:
• White Lead cloth
• Pad
• Tan cover
4. Nomex 1/2” (13 mm) tie tape and proper
cement are required to secure the compression roll cover in place. Make sure these
materials are available.
WARNING
With the red safety ﬁnger
guard removed, the only
means of stopping the unit
is by pushing one of the red
safety STOP buttons.
8. Remove the red safety ﬁnger guard:
a) Note the positioning of the spacers
and/or washers at the front left and
right of the guard.
b) In the left endframe, remove the lower
bolt which pushes against the safety
microswitch (Figure 7-18, A).
c) Have a worker support the left side of
the guard and then remove the upper
bolt (B).
d) In the right endframe, remove the upper bolt.
CAUTION
Take care not to damage
the safety switch that rides
on the lower bolt in the
endframes.
B
A
e) The bottom right bolt will slide out of
the left endframe with the guard. Carefully remove the guard. Make sure to
keep track of all spacers and washers.
Figure 7-18: Red safety ﬁnger guard and
microswitch.
7-20
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
11. Working at the front of the unit:
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
a) Cut the tie tapes securing the compression roll cover.
b) Pull off the old compression roll cover
and pad.
c) Remove old cement from the compression roll with a scraper, coarse sandpaper, or a steel brush.
9. The unit will not operate while a safety
interlock switch is open. As a temporary
measure during this work:
a) Tape down the safety finger guard
switch in each endframe.
b) Defeat the interlock switch in each
endframe by pulling out on its plunger.
10. Place a tarp, plastic drop cloth, heavy
paper, or another temporary protective
covering over the feed ribbons, ironing
cylinder, and return ribbons.
Compression
Roll
Lead Cloth
d) Wipe away remaining residue with a
clean cloth.
12. Remove the temporary protective covering.
13. Position the replacement cover so that
the padding material is facing up and the
tan cover is directly on the feed ribbons
(Figure 7-19).
14. Hand feed the white lead cloth under and
around the back of the compression roll.
15. In a strip along the full length of the compression roll, apply the cement on 1/4 to
1/3 of the roll (Figure 7-20) and smooth
with a putty knife.
Return Ribbon
Idler Roll
Lead Cloth
Cement
Strip
Padding
Heated
Cylinder
Tan Cover
Padding
Feed
Table
Figure 7-19: The pad should be face up when
directing the lead cloth under the
compression roll.
TOC
Figure 7-20: Cement is used to bond the lead cloth
to the compression roll.
INDEX
7-21
Repair
GO 20
16. Position and smooth the leading edge of
the lead cloth straight across the compression roll and overlapping the cement
(Figure 7-21). Be sure the cover is smooth
and tight against the compression roll for
a good bond with the cement.
WARNING
Your hands will be extremely
close to the moving rolls
of the ironing section. Take
every precaution to keep
hands and loose clothing
from coming into contact
with any of the moving rolls.
Serious Injury Could Result.
One person should be ready
at a red safety STOP button
at all times to stop the
unit if necessary.
20. If the gap is wider than this or uneven, the
compression roll spring-loaded handles.
Unwind the pad and repeat Steps 16 to 19.
Make sure the pad is straight and tight.
21. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch and press the green START button
to continue to wind the tan cover onto the
compression roll.
22. Allow the cover and pad to turn a few
times, smoothing out any small wrinkles.
Lead Cloth
Cement
Strip
17. Place the spring-loaded handles in their
bracket slots inside each endframe to add
tension to the compression roll.
Padding
18. Station one person at a red safety STOP
button during this entire step:
a) Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
Figure 7-21: A smooth, tight ﬁt is required to
correctly secure the compression roll
cover material.
b) Start the unit and turn the SPEED knob
to the slowest speed.
c) Allow the lead cloth and pad (not the
tan cover) to wind onto the compression roll. Do not allow the material to
wrinkle.
Padding
(Hidden)
d) Stop the unit and turn power OFF at
the main disconnect switch.
19. Check the gap between the front and trailing edges of the pad (Figure 7-22). There
should be a gap of 3/16” to 1/4” (5 mm
to 6 mm).
Tan Cover
Figure 7-22: There should be a small, even gap
between the edges of the pad material.
7-22
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
23. If wrinkles do not smooth out, stop the
unit and turn power OFF at the main disconnect switch. Unwind the material and
check the leading edge for a straight edge
on the compression roll. Repeat Steps 16
to 22 as required.
30. Run the unit for one hour with the heat
on during the next procedure. A qualiﬁed
maintenance person must remain with the
unit at all times until the safety equipment
has been replaced.
24. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
WARNING
The ironing cylinder,
endframes and surrounding
area will be hot. Wear
protective clothing and
gloves to avoid burns.
25. Cut eight lengths of tie tape:
• 4 approximately 3’ (1 m) long.
• 4 approximately 6’ (2 m) long (set
aside).
26. Evenly space the 3’ (1 m) tapes along the
length of the compression roll (Figure
7-23). Tuck one end of each tape into the
opening in the tan cover.
27. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch, and start the unit at the slowest
speed. Allow it to run until the tie tapes
are wrapped once around the roll and both
ends of each tie tape are positioned at the
front of the unit.
28. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch. Tie the tapes with
a square knot. Cut off any extra length of
tape.
29. Start and heat the unit. Refer to the OPERATING GUIDELINES chapter, Daily
Operating Procedures section, Start-Up
procedure.
31. While the unit is running, the new pad and
cover will settle, and the pressure will decrease. Periodically check the pressure on
the compression roll. Within this section,
refer to the Compression Roll Pressure
Check procedure.
32. Repeat Step 30 until the unit has been running with the heat on for one hour.
33. The new pad and cover will settle in and
the tie tapes will become loose. Stop the
unit and turn power OFF at the main disconnect switch.
34. Untie or cut off the tie tapes. Repeat
Steps 25 to 27, using the 6’ (2 m) tapes.
This time, let the tapes wrap round three
times.
35. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
36. Remove the tape that was temporarily
holding the red safety ﬁnger guard interlock switch in each endframe.
37. Push in the endframe interlock switch
plungers.
Tie Tape
Tan Cover
Compression
Roll
38. Re-install the red safety ﬁnger guard by
reversing Step 7. Make sure the spacers
and washers are correctly positioned.
Figure 7-23: Tuck one end of each tie tape into the
ﬂap of the tan cover.
TOC
INDEX
7-23
Repair
GO 20
39. Reposition the guide tapes. For more
information within this chapter, refer to
the Feed Section section, Guide Tape
Replacement procedure.
40. Close and secure both endframe doors.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
7.5 Ironing Section
The following procedures should be used
to keep the ironing cylinder and other ironing
section components operating properly:
•
Drive Chain Tension Adjustment
•
Ironing Cylinder Reconditioning
•
Ironing Cylinder Hardened Ring
Replacement
41. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
42. Start the unit and test the red safety ﬁnger
guard to make sure the unit comes to a
complete stop when the red safety ﬁnger
guard is pushed.
43. Stop the unit.
44. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
45. The ironing section must be waxed
before resuming operation. For more
information, refer to the OPERATING
GUIDELINES chapter, Daily Operating
Procedures section, Waxing procedure.
7-24
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Drive Chain Tension Adjustment
The drive chain in the right endframe powers
the feed ribbon and return ribbon drive rolls as
well as the ironing cylinder. The chain has an
adjustable tensioning arm.
Over time, the drive chain may stretch
slightly from the effects of heat and stress. If the
unit becomes excessively noisy, or if the drive
mechanisms work unevenly because of chain
slippage, it will be necessary to adjust the tension
on the chain.
Required Tools
CAUTION
Tighten chain so the machine
runs smoothly. Too much
tension will cause a jerking
motion and can
damage bearings.
7. Turn the idler arm base (Figure 7-24, D) to
apply adequate tension to the chain.
8. Tighten the mounting bolt to hold the
adjustment.
9. Close and secure the right endframe
door.
Wrenches:
11/16”
1-3/8” or Crescent
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
B
2. Open the right endframe door.
3. Check the drive chain (Figure 7-24, A)
for excessive movement. There should be
very little free play in the chain.
A
4. Tension on the drive chain is kept by an
idler arm chain tensioner (Figure 7-24, B).
When tension on the chain becomes loose,
adjust the idler arm tensioner.
Drive Chain
Tension Idler Arm
NOTE: A stretched chain that
has been adjusted may not ﬁt the
sprocket correctly and may need
to be replaced.
Mounting Bolt
5. Locate the idler arm mounting bolt (Figure
7-24, C) on the inside of the endframe.
6. Loosen the idler arm mounting bolt just
enough to allow turning of the idler arm
base with a crescent wrench.
TOC
D
C
Endframe
Figure 7-24: The drive chain is adjusted using the
tensioning idler arm.
INDEX
7-25
Repair
GO 20
Ironing Cylinder Reconditioning
The following procedure gives instructions
for removing dirt, rust, alkali deposits, and other
similar contaminants from the fine polished
ironing cylinder surface. No chemicals can be
used to clean the ironing cylinder. Mechanical
cleaning, described below, must be done very
carefully.
WARNING
To avoid the possibility
of severe injury, clean the
ironing cylinder only when
the unit is off (with the power
disconnected) and cool. All
cleaning should be done at
the rear of the unit.
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
3. The unit will not operate while a safety
interlock switch is open. As a temporary
measure during this work, defeat the
protective backplate interlock switch by
taping down the switch at the right rear
of the unit.
4. Release tension on the return ribbons.
Secure the return ribbon guide assembly
in a high position by tying off from above
with wire or string or guide tape (Figure
7-25).
NEVER ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE CYLINDER
WHILE IT IS MOVING.
Serious Injury Could Result.
5. Place a tarp, plastic drop cloth, heavy paper, or another temporary protective covering on the ﬂoor at the rear of the unit.
Required Tools
Belt sander
Clean cloth
Masking tape
Pliers
Protective coverings
Sandpaper: 220-350 grit
Wire/string/guide tape
Wrench: 7/16”
6. Pull the return ribbons around their tracks
until all the lacing clips are accessible and
aligned at the back of the unit.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Remove the protective backplate covering
the rear of the unit. Make sure at least two
workers are available to handle the piece,
as it is heavy and awkward to handle.
Figure 7-25: Use wire, string or guide tape to
secure the return ribbon guide
assembly in a high position
7-26
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
7. Remove the ribbon connecting pins.
Remove the ribbons from the idler rolls
on top and let the ribbons hang from the
guide assembly onto the protective ﬂoor
covering.
8. Place a tarp, plastic drop cloth, heavy
paper, or another temporary protective
covering over the return ribbons and guide
assembly.
WARNING
The ironing cylinder will
be moving without the
protective backplate in
position. Make sure everyone
is at a safe distance
from the unit.
Take every precaution
to keep hands and loose
clothing from coming into
contact with any of the
moving rolls.
Serious Injury Could Result.
CAUTION
Avoid gouging or leaving any
ﬂat spots on the cylinder.
The unit will work properly
only if the ﬁne polished
surface of the cylinder is
preserved.
Clean the cylinder using
vertical motions, not a
sideways motion, to preserve
the ﬁne polished surface of
the cylinder.
9. Clean the exposed part of the ironing cylinder. Use a belt sander with 220 to 350
grit sandpaper. Use only light movements
of the sander, not heavy pressure.
10. Do not use any other tools as these will
permanently damage the cylinder. Work
across the entire length of the cylinder.
Never gouge or leave ﬂat spots on the
cylinder, and work only in an up and down
motion.
11. After removing any contaminants, wipe
away any remaining residue on the surface
with a clean cloth.
12. Now it is time to move on the next section.
TOC
One person should be ready
at a red safety STOP button
at all times to stop the unit
if necessary.
13. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch and turn the SPEED knob to the
slowest speed.
14. Use the JOG switch to access another portion of the cylinder. Do not use the JOG
switch more than necessary.
15. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
16. Repeat Steps 9 to 15 to clean the entire
surface of the ironing cylinder.
17. Remove the temporary protective covering.
18. Reposition the return ribbons around the
idler rolls and reconnect the return ribbons.
Stagger the positions of the lacing clips to
give the ﬂatwork a smooth ﬂow.
19. Remove the wire/string/guide tape holding
the return ribbon guide assembly in the
high position.
INDEX
7-27
Repair
GO 20
20. Check tension on the return ribbons. For
more information within this chapter,
refer to the Return Section section,
Return Ribbon Tension Adjustment
procedure.
21. Remove the tape holding down the protective backplate switch; then, replace and
secure the protective backplate at the rear
of the unit. Make sure at least two workers
are available to handle the piece, as it is
heavy and awkward to handle.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
Ironing Cylinder Hardened Ring
Replacement
The left end of the ironing cylinder trunnion
is equipped with a case-hardened wear ring
(Figure 7-26, A). This ring is designed to prolong
the life of the ironing cylinder by protecting the
trunnion.
The hardened ring rests on the two cam follower
bearings and rotates against them. After years
of use, the case hardening may wear through,
developing a groove in the ring. When a groove is
visible, the hardened ring must be replaced.
NOTE: This procedure involves
removal of the cam follower
bearings. Carefully examine
their condition and determine if
replacement is appropriate.
Required Tools
A
Cold chisel
Drill
Drill bit: 1/4”
Hardwood block
Jack
Machine oil
Punch
Saw w/steel cutting blade
Scraper/coarse sandpaper
Sledgehammer/maul
Wooden block/wedges
Wrench: 1-1/16”
C
B
Figure 7-26: The hardened ring helps prevent wear
to the ironing cylinder trunnion.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
CAUTION
Use extreme care when
removing the burner system.
Make sure the weight of the
burner is properly supported.
7-28
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
1. Remove the burner system. For more
information within this chapter, refer to
the Burner System section, Gas Burner
Removal/Replacement procedure.
WARNING
Use extreme care when
raising the ironing cylinder.
It is extremely heavy and
can cause serious personal
injury or damage to the unit
if dropped.
2. Take the weight of the cylinder off the cam
follower bearing by jacking up the ironing
cylinder 1/8”.
3. Install two wooden wedges between the
cam follower bearings to support the ironing cylinder.
4. Remove the cam follower bearings (Figure
7-26, B) by unscrewing the nuts located on
the inside of the left endframe (Figure 7-27).
Carefully examine their condition and determine if replacement is appropriate.
5. There are 3 or 4 1/4” roll pins located
around the body of the hardened ring
(Figure 7-26, C). Use a punch to drive all
of these out.
8. Use a scraper or coarse sandpaper to clean
any rust or scale from the surface of the
trunnion and lightly oil the trunnion.
CAUTION
Do not heat the hardened
ring to make it easier
to install.
9. Drive on the new hardened ring using a
block of hard wood as a cushion to prevent damage. Do not strike the new ring
directly with a hammer. Drive on four
alternating points to avoid cocking or
jamming the ring.
10. Drill new holes for the roll pins through
the holes in the hardened wear ring and
into the trunnion.
11. Install new roll pins.
12. Re-install the cam follower bearings by
reversing Step 4.
13. Slowly and carefully remove the wooden
wedges. Use the jack to lower the ironing
cylinder onto the cam follower bearings.
14. Re-install the burner system. For more
information within this chapter, refer to
the Burner System section, Gas Burner
Removal/Replacement procedure.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the
surface of the trunnion when
removing the old ring.
6. If possible, use a suitable punch to drive
off the old ring. Depending on the condition of the ring, it may have to be cut off
instead.
7. If it is necessary to cut off the old ring,
use a saw with a steel cutting blade to
cut a deep notch in the ring and then use
a cold chisel to force the ring to expand
for removal.
TOC
Figure 7-27: Cam follower bearing nut inside the
left endframe.
INDEX
7-29
Repair
GO 20
7.6 Burner System
Individual components of the burner system
may wear during normal use and may need
occasional repair, inspection, or adjustment.
If the burner is experiencing problems,
ﬁrst inspect and clean the spark plug and pilot
assembly. For more information, refer to the
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter,
Semi-Annual PM section, Check/Clean Spark
Plug and Pilot Assembly procedure.
If the spark plug does not appear to be the
problem, the following procedures also may be
used to resolve the problem:
•
Pilot Gas/Air Mixture Check and
Adjustment
•
Burner Gas/Air Mixer Check and
Adjustment
•
Burner Gas/Air Mixer Cleaning
•
Gas Burner Removal/Replacement
•
Burner Tip Maintenance
•
Heat Shield Replacement
•
UV Flame Scanner Alignment Check/
Adjustment
•
UV Flame Scanner Replacement
•
Touchless Temperature Sensor
Replacement
•
Temperature Control Replacement
7-30
Pilot Gas/Air Mixture Check and
Adjustment
The gas/air ratio in the pilot affects the
combustion characteristics of the pilot ﬂame.
Difﬁculties in igniting the burner ﬂame could be
caused by a poor quality pilot light.
To correct this, the combustion air and gas
ﬂows can be adjusted.
NOTE: Propane or butane gas
will require more air than natural
gas.
Note that the gas shut off valve handle should
always be left in full open position, with the
handle oriented in line or parallel to the ﬂow
path through the valve. This prevents it from
accidentally being knocked out of position.
WARNING
Do not adjust or test gas
components unless you are
qualiﬁed to do so. Serious
injury and damage to
property may result.
This procedure involves
open panels and close
proximity to ﬂame. Take
every precaution to ensure
your safety.
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
6. Look inside the ironing cylinder and watch
for the pilot ﬂame ignition. Observe the
condition of the pilot ﬂame and check for
the following conditions:
Pilot Flame Check
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and HOT.
Use extreme caution.
• The pilot ﬂame must burn inside the
ﬂame pipe from the spark plug to beyond the end of the ﬂame pipe.
1. Open the left endframe door.
• A normal pilot flame will sound
forceful and appear strong. A soft,
quiet ﬂame may not ignite the burner
properly.
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
2. The machine will not operate while a
safety microswitch is open. As a temporary measure during this work, defeat the
endframe interlock switch by pulling out
on its plunger.
• The pilot ﬂame should be mostly blue,
with a yellow ﬁnger of ﬂame extending up through the blue ﬂame but not
outside the blue ﬂame. If this yellow
ﬂame is not present, the burner may
not ignite properly.
7. As appropriate:
• If the pilot ﬂame is correct, go to the
next step.
• If the pilot ﬂame is not correct
3. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
a. Allow the machine to run.
b. Go to the Gas/Air Mixture Adjustment procedure which follows.
4. Start the unit.
8. Stop the burner system.
5. Turn the GAS switch to ON.
9. Stop the machine and turn power OFF at
the main disconnect switch.
10. Push in the interlock switch plunger; then,
close and secure the left endframe door.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
TOC
INDEX
7-31
Repair
GO 20
• To adjust the pilot gas:
Pilot Gas/Air Mixture Adjustment
The machine will still be running from the pilot
ﬂame check and will be getting warmer during
this next procedure. Wear gloves and protective
clothing as necessary.
• Remove the cap screw (Figure 7-28,
C) from the valve.
• Check the position of the ﬁne adjustment screw on the gas valve. It
should be almost fully tightened.
Required Tools
Gloves
Screwdriver
Wrenches:
5/8”
11/16”
WARNING
Adjust the screw in slight
increments (1/8 turn).
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and HOT.
Use extreme caution.
• If necessary, turn the ﬁne adjustment screw in very small increments to adjust pilot gas ﬂow.
1. As appropriate:
• To adjust the pilot combustion air:
• Loosen the adjustment bolt locknut
(Figure 7-28, A).
WARNING
Adjust the bolt in slight
increments (1/8 turn).
2. Stop the burner system then restart it to
recheck the pilot ﬂame.
NOTE: If the pilot ﬂame does
not appear correct after several
adjustments, contact the factory
service department.
3. When the pilot ﬂame is correct:
• Turn the adjustment bolt (B) as necessary to adjust the pilot ﬂame.
• Stop the burner system.
• Stop the machine and turn power OFF
at the main disconnect switch.
• Tighten the pilot combustion air locknut and/or replace the pilot gas valve
cap screw.
B
4. Push in the interlock switch plunger; then,
close and secure the left endframe door.
A
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
C
Figure 7-28: Adjust air or gas ﬂow to create a
suitable pilot ﬂame.
7-32
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Burner Gas/Air Mixer Check and
Adjustment
The gas/air ratio in the main burner affects
the combustion characteristics of its flame.
Difﬁculties with the main burner ﬂame could be
caused by a poor gas/air mixture. To correct this,
the gas ﬂow to the main burner mixer (Figure
7-29) can be adjusted.
Flame Check
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and HOT.
Use extreme caution.
1. Open the left endframe door.
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
NOTE: Propane or butane gas
will require more air than natural
gas.
WARNING
Attend to the following
conditions immediately:
•
Flames are unsteady.
•
Flames are below brass
burner tips.
•
Lines of blue ﬂame
throughout width of
ironing cylinder.
2. The machine will not operate while a
safety microswitch is open. As a temporary measure during this work, defeat the
endframe interlock switch by pulling out
on its plunger.
3. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
The machine will be running for this procedure
and will be getting warmer during the process. Wear
gloves and protective clothing as necessary.
WARNING
Do not adjust or test gas
components unless you are
qualiﬁed to do so. Serious
injury and damage to
property may result.
4. Start the unit.
5. Turn the GAS switch to ON.
6. Look inside the ironing cylinder and watch
for the pilot ﬂame ignition. Then, watch
for the main burner to ignite.
This procedure involves
open panels and close
proximity to ﬂame. Take
every precaution to ensure
your safety.
Figure 7-29: Gas/air mixer.
TOC
INDEX
7-33
Repair
GO 20
7. Observe the condition of the burner ﬂame
and check for the following conditions:
• A normal ﬂame extends to the top of the
inside of the cylinder and mushrooms
slightly (Figure 7-30).
• If the ﬂame does not match the above
description, or if there are gas vapor
ﬂames away from the burner, such as
below the burner, the gas/air mixer
needs to be adjusted.
• Flames below the burner tips: This
indicates possible burner damage.
Shut down the machine immediately.
After the unit completely cools down,
perform the Burner Tip Maintenance
procedure later in this section.
10. Push in the interlock switch plunger; then,
close and secure the left endframe door.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
11. As appropriate:
• If the main burner ﬂames are correct,
you are ﬁnished.
• If the ﬂames are not correct
a. First, check system gas pressure.
For more information, refer to
the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE chapter, Semi-Annual
PM section, Check Gas Pressure
procedure.
• Lines of blue ﬂame through the width
of the ironer cylinder: Indicate gas
pressure is too high. Immediately
perform the Gas Flow Adjustment
procedure next.
b. Second, make sure there are no
blockage problems with the combustion blower and that the motor is
rotating in the correct direction. For
more information, refer to the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
chapter, Daily PM section, Clean
Combustion Blower Air Filter
procedure and the INSTALLATION chapter, Pre-Operational
Checkout section, Combustion
Motor Rotation Checkout procedure.
8. Stop the burner system.
9. Stop the machine and turn power OFF at
the main disconnect switch.
c. If these are both in proper condition
and ﬂames still are not correct, go
to the Gas Flow Adjustment procedure which follows.
Figure 7-30: A normal burner ﬂame should extend
to the top of the ironing cylinder and
mushroom slightly.
7-34
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Gas Flow Adjustment
Required Tools
This procedure should rarely need to be done.
Before making any adjustments to the main
burner gas ﬂow.
Gloves
Screwdriver
Wrenches:
3/4”
1-3/8”
Make sure that:
•
•
The gas press is correct. For more
information, refer to the PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE chapter, SemiAnnual PM section, Check Gas
Pressure procedure.
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and HOT.
Use extreme caution.
1. Open the left endframe door.
Make sure there are no blockage
problems with the combustion
blower and that the motor is rotating
in the correct direction. For more
information, refer to the PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE chapter, Daily
PM section, Clean Combustion
Blower Air Filter procedure and
the INSTALLATION chapter, PreOperational Checkout section,
Combustion Motor Rotation
Checkout procedure.
The machine will be running for this procedure
and will be getting warmer during the process. Wear
gloves and protective clothing as necessary.
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
2. The machine will not operate while a
safety microswitch is open. As a temporary measure during this work, defeat the
endframe interlock switch by pulling out
on its plunger.
3. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
4. Start the unit.
5. Turn the GAS switch to ON.
6. Look inside the ironing cylinder and watch
for the pilot ﬂame ignition. Then, watch
for the main burner to ignite.
TOC
INDEX
7-35
Repair
GO 20
WARNING
Adjust the screw in slight
increments (1/8 turn).
7. Locate and remove the gas mixer adjustment cap nut (Figure 7-31).
8. Loosen the main burner adjustment screw
locknut (Figure 7-32, A).
9. Adjust the main burner (Figure 7-32, B)
by turning the adjustment screw in slight
increments:
• To lower gas ﬂow, turn the adjustment
screw clockwise.
Figure 7-31: Gas/air mixer cap nut.
• To increase gas ﬂow turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
10. When a normal ﬂame is established, reignite the burner two or three times to make
sure the setting is correct.
11. Tighten the locknut to secure the adjustment.
12. Stop the burner system
13. Stop the machine and turn power OFF at
the main disconnect switch.
14. Push in the interlock switch plunger; then,
close and secure the left endframe door.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
7-36
TOC
B
A
Figure 7-32: Adjust the gas/air mixer by loosening
locknut (A) and turning the adjustment
screw (B).
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Burner Gas/Air Mixer Cleaning
The gas/air mixer (Figure 7-33) consists of
three parts screwed together to form a complete
unit:
A
Air Injector- Cone shaped component that
allows air into the mixer.
B
Gas Inlet/Body- Gas enters from the side and
surrounds the air injector.
C
Venturi- Air from air injector (A) is mixed with
the gas from the gas inlet/body (B).
A
The inside of each gas/air mixer should be
cleaned whenever the burner is cleaned. In
addition, the mixer may need cleaning when a
howling or whistling noise can be heard in the
burner system.
Required Tools
Clean cloth
Compressed air
Pencil/marker
Pipe thread compound/Teﬂon
tape
Pipe wrench
Screwdriver
Wrenches:
7/16”
1/2”
9/16”
13/16”
C
B
Figure 7-33: The gas/air mixer is composed of three
sections.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Turn OFF the gas supply to the unit.
3. Lockout and tagout both the electrical
and gas supplies following local work
rules and in compliance with government
standards.
4. Open the left endframe door.
B
D
E
6. Remove the air pressure switch:
G
C
5. Turn OFF the ball valve to the burner
(Figure 7-34, A).
a) Disconnect the switch electrically (Figure 7-34, B). Carefully note and mark
where each wire is connected.
F
H
b) Remove the switch and its entire connecting pipe from the burner assembly
(C).
A
c) Place in a safe location.
Figure 7-34: Various components must be removed
to remove the air injector for cleaning.
TOC
INDEX
7-37
Repair
GO 20
7. Remove the pilot assembly:
a) Remove the boot and ignition wire
(Figure 7-34, D) from the spark plug.
b) Disconnect the combustion air line
from the air inlet connection (E).
c) Disconnect the pilot gas piping (F).
d) Remove the bolts which secure the
pilot assembly bracket (G).
e) Remove the pilot assembly from the
ironer and place it on a sturdy work
table.
8. Remove the touchless temperature sensor:
a) Disconnect the cooling tube (Figure 735, A) from the sensor holding tube.
b) Locate the electrical connector for the
temperature sensor (B) and disconnect.
c) Loosen the setscrew which holds the
sensor/tube assembly (C) in its pipe.
d) Remove the sensor/tube assembly
from the machine and place in a safe
location.
9. Disconnect the burner combustion air hose
(Figure 7-34, H).
10. Unscrew the burner air injector with the
elbow and piping still connected.
11. Thoroughly clean the inside and outside
surfaces of the air injector.
12. If necessary, remove and clean the remaining two sections of the mixer.
13. Screw the burner air injector back into
place.
14. Reconnect the burner combustion air
hose.
15. Reinstall the touchless temperature sensor
by reversing Step 8.
16. Reinstall the pilot assembly by reversing
Step 7.
17. Reinstall the air pressure switch by reversing Step 6. Use pipe thread compound or
Teﬂon tape to assure a leakproof connection.
18. Reconnect the wires as marked in Step
6 a).
19. Turn the internal ball valve back to its fully
ON position.
20. Close and secure the left endframe door.
C
B
A
Figure 7-35: Remove the touchless temperature
sensor to create clearance.
7-38
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Gas Burner Removal/Replacement
Required Tools
C-clamp: large
Clean cloth
Compressed air
Gloves
Pencil/marker
Pipe: 1½” diameter x 48” long (40
mm x 1240 mm) pipe (or longer)
Pipe thread compound/Teﬂon
tape
Pipe wrench
Pliers
Screwdriver
Wrenches:
7/16”
1/2”
9/16”
13/16”
When the ironing cylinder does not heat up
properly, this may be caused by a lint buildup. The
entire gas burner must be removed to completely
clean the gas burner system.
If there is sufﬁcient clearance to the right of
the unit, a 48” (1220 mm) or longer length of
1½” (40 mm) diameter pipe will greatly aid in
performing this procedure.
Make sure the unit is completely COOL before
beginning this procedure. Due to shaft expansion
from heat, removing the main bearing could be
extremely difﬁcult if the machine is still warm.
NOTE: Ta k e t h e t i m e t o
read through and understand
the entire procedure before
performing this work.
This procedure should be handled
by at least two qualiﬁed persons.
Using the “buddy system”
facilitates a quicker procedure
and decreases the risk of
an accident.
This procedure is broken down into multiple
sub-procedures:
•
Preparation
•
Detach Heat Shield From Burner
Assembly
•
Remove Cooling Tubes and Temperature
Sensor
•
Remove Air Pressure Switch and Pilot
Assembly
•
Final Steps Before Burner Removal
•
Remove Burner
•
Replace Burner
•
Reassembly
•
Re-Attach Heat Shield To Burner
Assembly
•
Final Steps
TOC
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Preparation
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Turn OFF the gas supply to the unit.
3. Lockout and tagout both the electrical
and gas supplies following local work
rules and in compliance with government
standards.
4. Remove the protective backplate at the
rear of the unit. Make sure at least two
workers are available to handle the piece,
as it is heavy and awkward to handle.
5. Open both endframe doors.
INDEX
7-39
Repair
GO 20
Remove Cooling Tubes and
Temperature Sensor
Detach Heat Shield From Burner
Assembly
1. Remove the temperature sensor cooling
tube (Figure 7-37, A) by pressing in on
the orange plastic ring and pulling out on
the tube at each end.
NOTE: Wear gloves to protect
hands from sharp edges.
1. Reach into one end of the ironing cylinder.
Remove the retainer pin and washer from
the round bar that is welded to the support
shaft (Figure 7-36, A).
2. Remove the turnbuckles. Let the end of
the heat shield rest on the bottom of the
ironing cylinder.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other end of
the heat shield.
2. Remove the air tube from the machine and
place in a safe location.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the pilot air tube
(Figure 7-37, B).
4. Locate the electrical connector for the
temperature sensor (Figure 7-37, C) and
disconnect.
5. Loosen the setscrew which holds the sensor/tube assembly (Figure 7-37, D) in its
pipe.
6. Remove the sensor/tube assembly from
machine and place in a safe location.
D
C
B
B
A
A
Figure 7-36: Remove the retaining pins at each end
to disconnect the heat shield.
Figure 7-37: Various components must be removed
to remove the burner for cleaning.
7-40
INDEX
TOC
GO 20
Repair
Remove Air Pressure Switch and Pilot
Assembly
1. Remove the air pressure switch:
a) Disconnect the switch electrically (Figure 7-38, A). Carefully note and mark
where each wire is connected.
b) Remove the switch and its entire connecting pipe from the burner assembly
(B).
Final Steps Before Burner Removal
1. Disconnect the burner combustion air hose
(Figure 7-38, G).
2. Then, loosen the union (Figure 7-38, H)
between the gas valve and the air mixer.
Remove Burner
NOTE: Three maintenance
people are required to remove
the burner assembly. Station one
person at the right end of the unit
and the other two at the left end.
c) Place in a safe location.
2. Remove the pilot assembly:
a) Remove the boot and ignition wire
(Figure 7-38, C) from the spark plug.
b) Disconnect the pilot gas piping at both
the pilot valve (D) and the pilot (E).
Remove from the machine and place
in a safe location.
c) Remove the bolts which secure the
pilot assembly bracket (F).
d) Remove the pilot assembly from the
ironer and place in a safe location.
1. In the right endframe, remove the bracket
(Figure 7-39, A) that holds the burner tail
pipe (B) in position.
2. Place the 48” (or longer) piece of 1-1/2”
pipe over the burner tail pipe. Be careful
in removing the pipe to avoid letting the
tail pipe bang against the bottom of the
ironing cylinder.
A
D
C
F
B
B
H
G
A
E
Figure 7-38: Shut off internal ball valve before
taking parts off of the heating system.
TOC
Figure 7-39: The bracket (A) in the right endframe
holds the burner tail pipe (B) in
position.
INDEX
7-41
Repair
GO 20
8. Remove the burner assembly slowly. When
the burner has been moved about 18” (450
mm), stop moving the assembly.
WARNING
The burner assembly is very
heavy and will rotate when it
is removed.
The tail pipe should be about ready to clear
the right endframe and will drop against
the bottom of the ironing cylinder if not
properly supported.
Make sure it is adequately
supported at both ends
during removal and
replacement and that there
are sufﬁcient personnel/
equipment to handle it to
prevent injury or damage.
9. The two people at the left end should push
down slightly on the assembly, while the
person at the right endframe reaches into
the ironing cylinder and supports the tail
pipe.
3. Securely place a large C-clamp on the air
mixer and use it as a hand-hold to help
balance and support the assembly.
4. Support the burner assembly.
5. Finish disconnecting the gas union (Figure
7-38, H).
6. Remove the U-bolt in the left endframe
that secures the burner assembly to its
support bracket (Figure 7-40, A).
7. Support the burner assembly while removing the bolts that hold the burner support
bracket in position (Figure 7-40, B).
10. Begin slowly pulling the burner out another few inches until the tail pipe is clear.
Be careful to avoid letting the burner tail
pipe bang against the bottom of the ironing cylinder.
11. Continue moving the burner assembly out
slowly. Keep downward pressure on it to
lift the tail pipe as it clears the cylinder
end and keep it from banging against the
heat shield in the bottom of the cylinder,
which could cause damage.
12. Continue sliding the burner assembly
slowly out of the ironing cylinder. When
the tail pipe reaches the left end, all three
people should lift the burner assembly so
the tail pipe can clear the cylinder.
13. Place the burner assembly on a sturdy
worktable.
NOTE: This is a good time
to remove and clean the heat
shield. Make to note its orientation
and make sure it is reinstalled
correctly. Wear gloves to protect
hands from sharp edges.
A
B
Figure 7-40: Removing the U-bolt frees the burner
assembly.
7-42
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Replace Burner
Reassembly
After all maintenance/repair is completed,
such as cleaning the burner tips or replacing the
heat shield, replacing the burner is generally a
reversal of the removal process with the following
additional guidelines:
1. When the assembly has been pushed back
into the ironing cylinder, use the 1-1/2” pipe
to help guide the tail pipe into place.
Perform reassembly of the burner system by:
•
Performing the sub-procedures for
burner removal in reverse order.
•
Reversing the steps of each of the subprocedures.
1. Make sure the burner support bracket has
been properly reinstalled.
2. With two people at the left endframe pushing down slightly on the burner assembly,
the third person reaches into the ironing
cylinder at the right endframe to pull the
end of the pipe over the tail pipe.
2. Securely rejoin the gas line union for the
main burner (Figure 7-38 , H).
3. Once the tail pipe is seated in the 1-1/2”
pipe, lift up the burner assembly at the left
endframe and slide it the rest of the way
into position.
4. Reinstall the pilot assembly and air pressure switch by reversing the Remove Air
Pressure Switch and Pilot Assembly
sub-procedure. Use pipe thread compound
or Teﬂon tape to assure a leakproof connection of the air pressure switch.
4. Make sure it is properly positioned in its
holding bracket.
5. Remove the pipe.
6. Reinstall the burner support and U-bolt
removed in Steps 6 and 7 of the Remove
Burner procedure.
3. Reconnect the combustion blower air hose
for the main burner (Figure 7-38, G).
5. Reinstall the temperature sensor and
cooling tubes by reversing the Remove
Cooling Tubes and Temperature Sensor
sub-procedure.
7. Make sure the burner is properly oriented
and physically secured.
TOC
INDEX
7-43
Repair
GO 20
Final Steps
Re-attach Heat Shield To Burner
Assembly
Wear gloves to protect hands from
sharp edges.
1. Reach into one end of the ironing cylinder,
locate and lift the end of the heat shield.
2. Slide the top of each turnbuckle onto the
round bar that is welded to the support
shaft.
3. Replace the retaining washer and secure
with the retaining pin (Figure 7-36, A).
4. Make sure the shield is 3/8” to 1/2” (10 to
13 mm) above ironing cylinder.
NOTE: This sub-procedure
requires at least two qualified
personnel to handle the protective
backplate, which is heavy and
awkward to handle.
1. Reposition and secure the protective
backplate.
2. Make sure all internal valves are in the
fully ON position.
3. Close and secure both endframe doors.
4. Start the unit to verify proper operation.
a) If necessary, remove the keeper wire
(Figure 7-36, B) from between the
turnbuckles.
b) Adjust each turnbuckle as necessary to
adjust the heat shield height.
c) Replace the keeper wire.
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for the other end of
the heat shield.
7-44
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Burner Tip Maintenance
An accumulation of lint and other debris can
clog burner tips. Cleaning may be necessary to
obtain a proper ﬂame and efﬁcient use of gas.
This procedure is always performed with the
burner removed from the ironer and the starting
point assumes the burner is on a work table,
ready to go.
Required Tools
Chain wrench
Compressed air
Gloves
Goggles
Muriatic acid: 50% dilute
Steel insert: 1.490” ± 0.0006” (37.85
mm ±0.13 mm) diameter
NOTE: To prevent distortion of
the burner tips, it is necessary to
insert a short, round steel shaft
or bar into the top of the burner
tip that just ﬁts and can be easily
removed.
1. Place a steel insert into the ﬁrst burner tip
(Figure 7-41) so the tip does not bend or
get stripped.
2. Use a chain wrench to remove the burner
tip.
3. Repeat this process for the remaining
burner tips.
4. Blow out each tip with compressed air
from the top and bottom.
5. Use compressed air to blow out the
burner.
WARNING
Acids can cause skin burns
or other reactions. Wear
gloves, goggles and other
protective clothing.
6. Put all of the tips into a dilute solution of
muriatic acid and water (50% each).
7. Allow the tips to soak for 8 hours.
8. Remove the tips from the solution.
9. Thoroughly rinse with water and blow dry
with compressed air.
10. Securely re-install each burner tip using
the steel insert and chain wrench.
Figure 7-41: Use a steel insert and a chain wrench
to prevent distortion of burner tips.
TOC
INDEX
7-45
Repair
GO 20
4. Install the new heat shield, making sure
the end with the shorter cutout is inserted
ﬁrst.
Heat Shield Replacement
Required Tools
C-clamp: large
Clean cloth
Compressed air
Gloves
Pencil/marker
Pipe: 1½” diameter x 48” long (40
mm x 1240 mm) pipe (or longer)
Pipe thread compound/Teﬂon
tape
Pipe wrench
Screwdriver
Wrenches:
7/16”
1/2”
9/16”
13/16”
5. Re-install the burner assembly by following the Gas Burner Removal/Replacement procedure earlier in this section.
6. When re-attaching the heat shield, make
sure it is 3/8” to 1/2” (10 to 13 mm) above
ironing cylinder. For more information,
refer to the Gas Burner Removal/Replacement procedure, Re-Attach Heat
Shield To Burner Assembly sub-procedure earlier in this section.
7. Make sure to re-install the heat shield
retaining pins.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Remove the burner assembly by following
the Gas Burner Removal/Replacement
procedure earlier in this section.
NOTE: Wear gloves to protect
hands from sharp edges.
3. With gloves on, remove heat shield from
the ironing cylinder.
7-46
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
UV Flame Scanner Alignment Check/
Adjustment
Scanner Alignment Check
Required Tools
For proper operation of the heating system, the
UV ﬂame scanner must be properly aligned.
CAUTION
Perform the following
procedure only if speciﬁcally
directed to do so by the
factory service department.
The alignment of the UV ﬂame scanner is set
at the factory, and generally should not require
adjustment. However, if advised to do so by the
factory service department, they can be checked
and adjusted after the machine is in use.
DC voltmeter
Screwdriver
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and HOT.
Use extreme caution.
1. Remove the plastic cover of the ﬂame
safeguard at the left rear of the unit.
2. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Start the unit.
4. Set the TEMPERATURE CONTROL to
300º F (150º C), and turn the GAS switch
to ON.
5. After the flame comes on, check the
FLAME SIGNAL by inserting the voltage probe from a DC voltmeter into the
ﬂame safeguard test jack (Figure 7-42,
A) and the other probe into the ground
jack (B). The DC voltage reading gives
an indication of how well the scanner sees
the ﬂame:
A
• 9 V to 10 V is good
B
• 6 V to 8 V is questionable
• Below 6 V is not a reliable signal
Figure 7-42: Use a DC voltmeter to check the
strength of the ﬂame signal.
6. If the ﬂame signal reading is below 9 V,
perform the adjustment procedure which
follows only if advised to do so by the
factory service department.
7. Turn the GAS switch to OFF.
8. Stop the ironer. Leave power ON at the
main disconnect switch.
9. Replace the ﬂame control cover.
TOC
INDEX
7-47
Repair
GO 20
1. Open the right endframe door.
Scanner Alignment Adjustment
The machine will still be running from the
alignment check and will be getting warmer
during this next procedure. Wear gloves and
protective clothing as necessary.
NOTE: Two maintenance people
are required for this procedure.
One making the adjustment
and one operating the ironer
controls.
Required Tools
Gloves
Pipe: 1/2” diameter x 24” long (13 mm
x 610 mm) pipe, threaded at one
end
Pipe coupling: 1/2”
Pipe wrench
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and HOT.
Use extreme caution.
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
2. The machine will not operate while a
safety microswitch is open. As a temporary measure during this work, defeat the
endframe interlock switch by pulling out
on its plunger.
3. Hold the ﬂexible scanner cable (Figure 743, A) still while unscrewing the threaded
collar (B) from the holding tube (C).
4. Hold the UV ﬂame scanner out of the way
and look through the holding tube.
WARNING
Speciﬁc procedures that
require the unit to be running
should be done with extreme
caution and attention
to detail.
5. Have the person at the controls start the
ironer and turn the GAS switch to ON.
C
B
A
Figure 7-43: The UV Flame Scanner is located in
the right endframe.
7-48
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
6. After about 10 seconds, you should be able
to see the ﬂame as it reaches the end of
the burner. If the scanner holding tube is
aligned correctly the ﬂame will completely
ﬁll the opening (Figure 7-44). The ﬂame
will extinguish after about 3 seconds.
7. Turn the GAS switch to OFF.
13. Remove the pipe and coupling.
14. Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to check the new alignment of the scanner holding tube.
15. As necessary, repeat Steps 4 to 14 until the
alignment of the holding tube is correct.
16. Once the alignment is correct, perform the
Scanner Alignment Check procedure to
verify that voltage is now correct.
8. Stop the unit.
9. As appropriate:
• If the alignment is correct, go to Step
19.
• If the alignment is incorrect, go to the
next step.
10. Screw a 1/2” coupling onto the holding
tube (Figure 7-43, C).
11. Thread a 24” (610 mm) long 1/2” pipe into
the coupling.
CAUTION
Using too much force could
damage or break the ﬂame
scanner bracket weld.
17. Turn the GAS switch to OFF.
18. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
19. Screw the UV flame scanner onto the
holding tube.
20. Push in the interlock switch plunger;
then, close and secure the right endframe
door.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
12. Apply just enough pressure to correctly
realign the bracket. Do not use too much
force or the weld could be broken or
damaged.
SCANNER MUST HAVE UNOBSRUCTED
VIEW OF FLAME
Not This
Not This
But This
FLAME MUST COMPLETELY COVER
SIGHT OPENING
Not This
Not This
But This
Figure 7-44: Proper alignment helps ensure the UV ﬂame scanner can detect the pilot and burner ﬂames.
TOC
INDEX
7-49
Repair
GO 20
6. Hold the ﬂexible scanner cable (Figure 746, A) still while unscrewing the threaded
collar (B) from the holding tube (C).
UV Flame Scanner Replacement
NOTE: Never twist the cable
attached to the UV flame
scanner.
CAUTION
Do not let the scanner
strike anything or be struck
by anything. Striking the
scanner on a hard surface
can cause permanent
damage.
Required Tools
Masking tape
Pen/pencil
Plastic wire ties
Scissors
Screwdriver
7. Carefully position the new UV ﬂame scanner in the holding tube and securely tighten
the threaded collar.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open the right endframe door.
3. Follow the UV scanner wiring cable back
to its junction box. As necessary, cut the
plastic wire ties which secure the cable.
4. Open the box. Note and mark where the
scanner wires are connected (Figure 7-45,
A, B) and then, disconnect.
5. Disconnect the scanner’s cable from the
junction box (Figure 7-45, C).
C
8. Route the new scanner’s cable to the junction box, following the same path. Secure
with plastic wire ties as necessary.
9. Route the wires inside the junction box
and then attach the cable.
10. Connect the new scanner’s wires as
marked in Step 4. Make sure to connect
the grounding wire (Figure 7-45, B).
11. Replace the junction box cover.
12. Close and secure the right endframe
door.
C
B
B
A
A
Figure 7-45: UV ﬂame scanner wiring junction box.
Figure 7-46: The UV Flame Scanner is located in
the right endframe.
7-50
INDEX
TOC
GO 20
Repair
Touchless Temperature Sensor
Replacement
D
Touchless temperature sensors (Figure 7-47,
A) have a 3 ft. long thermocouple lead wire
connected to a three prong male plug connector
(B) for quick connection.
Each touchless temperature sensor has the
same calibration and is interchangeable with the
other touchless temperature sensors.
C
B
A
Required Tools
Screwdriver
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
Figure 7-47: The clamp (C) and holding tube (D)
hold the touchless temperature sensor
(A) in place.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open the endframe door covering the
temperature sensor to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the yellow plug and the socket
in the touchless temperature sensor wiring
(Figure 7-47, B).
4. Loosen the clamp (Figure 7-47, C) and
remove the touchless temperature sensor
(A) from the holding tube (D).
CAUTION
The touchless temperature
sensor is extremely fragile.
5. Carefully position the new touchless temperature sensor in the holding tube and
tighten the clamp.
6. Connect the yellow plug and the socket in
the touchless temperature sensor wiring.
7. Close and secure the endframe door.
TOC
INDEX
7-51
Repair
GO 20
Temperature Control Replacement
If the TEMPERATURE CONTROL fails,
replacing it is a quick and easy procedure.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
B
A
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open the left endframe door.
Figure 7-48: The TEMPERATURE CONTROL is
located inside the left endframe.
NOTE: It is not necessary
to remove the wires from the
TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
3. Pull the black socket plug from the back of
the TEMPERATURE CONTROL (Figure
7-48, A).
4. While pressing the two plastic retainer tabs
away from the body (Figure 7-48, B), push
the TEMPERATURE CONTROL toward
the front of the control panel and remove
from the machine.
5. Install the new TEMPERATURE CONTROL, making sure it is upright.
6. Press the white/gray retainer over the back
side of the TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
Make sure the control is ﬁrmly in place.
7. Connect the socket to the TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
8. Close and secure the left endframe door.
7-52
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Return Ribbon Tension Adjustment
7.7 Return Section
Flatwork is directed around the ironing
cylinder by the return section (Figure 7-49),
which consists of the following components:
•
Return ribbons (A)
•
Return ribbon guide assembly (B)
•
Return ribbon drive roll (C)
•
Idler rolls (D1, D2)
Adjust the tension of the return ribbons when
they sag or track to one side of the ironing section.
Both conditions cause excessive wear on the
ribbons and shorten their life.
Required Tools
Wrenches:
3/8”
9/16”
The return ribbons hold the ﬂatwork in proper
contact with the heated cylinder, ensuring quality
ﬂatwork ﬁnish.
Various components of the return section
require periodic adjustment, replacement, or
occasional repair.
Return Ribbon Tension Adjustment
•
Return Ribbon Replacement
•
Return Ribbon Drive Roll Friction
Material Replacement
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
3. Locate the return ribbons idler roll tension
adjustment bolts (Figure 7-50, A). There is
one on each side of the machine.
These procedures include:
•
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
4. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, loosen its locknut (Figure 7-50,
B).
5. Adjust each bolt the same number of turns
clockwise until the ribbons are snug.
D1
D2
A
C
B
B
A
Figure 7-50: Return ribbon tension adjustment in
the left endframe.
Figure 7-49: Return section components.
TOC
INDEX
7-53
Repair
GO 20
10. If tension on the ribbons is uneven, ribbons
will track toward the end of the ironing
cylinder where the tension is highest.
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
11. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
12. Either turn the adjusting bolt counterclockwise at the high tension end, or turn
the adjusting bolt clockwise at the low
tension end.
6. The machine will not operate while a
safety microswitch is open. As a temporary measure during this work, defeat each
endframe interlock switch by pulling out
on its plunger.
7. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
8. Turn the SPEED knob to the slowest
speed.
9. Run the unit brieﬂy and make sure the
ribbons track straight and do not rub on
the ribbon guides on the guide assembly
roll.
7-54
TOC
13. Repeat Steps 7 to 12 until the ribbons have
the correct tension and track evenly.
14. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
15. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, secure its locknut.
16. Push the interlock switch plungers in; then,
close and secure both endframe doors.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Return Ribbon Replacement
Return ribbons stretch and flatwork moves
unevenly and improperly through the ironing
section. When tension on these ribbons can
no longer be adjusted, the entire set must be
replaced.
NOTE: Read the RETURN
RIBBON REPLACEMENT OR
ADJUSTMENT section on the
Pink Operator Safety Reminder
in the front of this manual.
Replacing Worn Ribbons
Use this procedure to replace ribbons that are
still in place, but are worn out.
1. Verify the replacement ribbons are the
correct size and sufﬁcient quantity for
completing the procedure. See the PARTS
LIST.
NOTE: HI-LYFE™ extended
wear ribbons are available. These
ribbons provide superior quality
ﬂatwork ﬁnish. Specify HI-LYFE™
extended wear ribbons when
reordering.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Remove the protective backplate from the
rear of the unit. Make sure at least two
workers are available to handle the piece,
as it is heavy and awkward to handle.
4. Release tension on the return ribbons.
Secure the return ribbon guide assembly
in a high position by tying off from above
with wire or string or guide tape (Figure
7-51).
Required Tools
Pliers
Wire/string/guide tape
Wrenches:
3/8”
7/16”
9/16”
WARNING
Never start the unit while
installing the return ribbons.
It is dangerous
and unnecessary.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
5. Pull the worn ribbons around their tracks
until all the lacing clips are accessible and
aligned at the back of the unit.
6. Remove the connecting pin from an old
ribbon and attach a new ribbon to one end,
making sure the slightly darker side will
face the ironing cylinder.
NOTE: I f u s i n g H I - LY F E ™
extended wear ribbons, position
the darker side of the ribbon facing
the ironing cylinder.
Figure 7-51: Use wire, string or guide tape to
secure the return ribbon guide
assembly in a high position
TOC
INDEX
7-55
Repair
GO 20
7. Pull the old ribbon through until the new
ribbon is in place.
8. Disconnect the old ribbon and secure the
replacement ribbon with a new pin.
9. Repeat Steps 6 to 8 to replace additional
worn ribbons. Stagger the positions of the
lacing clips to give the ﬂatwork a smooth
ﬂow.
10. Remove the wire/string/guide tape holding
the return ribbon guide assembly in the
high position.
11. Check tension on the return ribbons. For
more information, refer to the Return
Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure
earlier in this section.
12. Reinstall the protective backplate at the
rear of the unit. Make sure at least two
workers are available to handle the piece,
as it is heavy and awkward to handle.
Replacing Broken or Missing Ribbons
Ribbons that break should be replaced
immediately. To avoid excessive stress on only
one new, slightly shorter ribbon, the entire set of
ribbons should be replaced. At a minimum, it is
recommended that ribbons be replaced in pairs.
Required Tools
Pliers
Wire/string/guide tape
Wrenches:
3/8”
7/16”
9/16”
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Remove the protective backplate from the
rear of the unit. Make sure at least two
workers are available to handle the piece,
as it is heavy and awkward to handle.
4. Release tension on the return ribbons.
Secure the return ribbon guide assembly
in a high position by tying off from above
with wire or string or guide tape (Figure
7-51).
5. Remove a ribbon from both ends of the
unit and use one or both as replacement
ribbons. These end ribbons can then be
replaced by a pair of new ribbons.
WARNING
Never start the unit while
installing the return ribbons.
It is dangerous
and unnecessary.
6. Move to the front of the unit at the position where a ribbon is broken or missing.
Fold the replacement ribbon in half with
the seams on the inside. Do not crease
the ribbon.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Verify the replacement ribbons are the
correct size and sufﬁcient quantity for
completing the procedure. See the PARTS
LIST.
7-56
NOTE: HI-LYFE™ extended
wear ribbons are available. These
ribbons provide superior quality
ﬂatwork ﬁnish. Specify HI-LYFE™
extended wear ribbons when
reordering.
TOC
7. Place one end of the replacement ribbon
over the return ribbon drive roll and one
end beneath, making sure the slightly darker side will face the ironing cylinder.
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
NOTE: I f u s i n g H I - LY F E ™
extended wear ribbons, position
the darker side of the ribbon facing
the ironing cylinder.
8. For Type R units, place both ends of the
ribbon on the delivery ribbons under the
ironing cylinder, pushing them towards
the back of the machine.
Return Ribbon Drive Roll Friction
Material Replacement
If the friction material on the return ribbon
drive roll is worn smooth, or if the return ribbons
slip in place when tension is adjusted properly,
the friction material must be replaced.
Required Tools
Caulk Gun
Chain puller
Clean cloth
Hammer
Masking tape
Nail
Pliers
Protective covering
Screwdriver
Steel brush
Serrated putty knife
Utility knife
Wire/string/guide tape
Wooden wedges
Wrenches:
3/8”
7/16”
9/16”
11/16”
1-3/8” or Crescent
9. Move to the back of the unit where both
ends of the ribbon are now exposed.
Wrap the top end of the ribbon around
the cylinder.
10. Pass it under and around the top idler roll;
next, pass it over the second idler roll so it
is hanging down the back of the unit.
11. Pull the bottom end of the ribbon under
the return ribbon guide assembly. Bring it
up to meet the other end and connect the
ends of the ribbon with a new pin.
12. Repeat Steps 6 to 11 to replace additional
ribbons. Stagger the positions of the lacing
clips to give the ﬂatwork a smooth ﬂow.
NOTE: If the remaining ribbons
are being replaced, refer to
the Replacing Worn Ribbons
procedure.
13. Remove the wire/string/guide tape holding
the return ribbon guide assembly in the
high position.
14. Check tension on the return ribbons. For
more information, refer to the Return
Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure
earlier in this section.
15. Reinstall the protective backplate at the
rear of the unit. Make sure at least two
workers are available to handle the piece,
as it is heavy and awkward to handle.
TOC
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Verify the correct replacement parts and
supplies are available, including the size
of the friction material and the cement
for the return ribbon drive roll. See the
PARTS LIST.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. For Type R units, release tension on the
delivery ribbons. For more information
within this chapter, refer to the Delivery
Section–Type R Unit section, Delivery
Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure.
4. Remove all delivery ribbons from the
machine. Place in a clean location.
INDEX
7-57
Repair
GO 20
5. Release tension on the return ribbons.
Secure the return ribbon guide assembly
in a high position by tying off from above
with wire or string or guide tape (Figure
7-51).
WARNING
The chain and power must
both remain disconnected
during this procedure. Do
not reconnect either of these
until the entire procedure
is completed.
9. Place a tarp, plastic drop cloth, heavy
paper, or another temporary protective
covering over the delivery ribbon drive
roll and the ﬂoor underneath the unit.
10. Remove the screws and clamps at each end
of the drive roll (Figure 7-53) that hold the
friction material in place. Set the clamps
aside for later use.
11. Pull or cut off the old friction material. As
you do so, note the direction of the spiral
winding.
6. The friction material must be applied
while the return ribbon drive roll turns
freely:
12. Remove the old cement from the drive roll
with a scraper, coarse sandpaper, or a steel
brush. Wipe away remaining residue with
a clean cloth. Make sure the roll surface is
completely clean and dry.
a) Open the right endframe door and locate the drive chain (Figure 7-52, A).
b) Release tension on the chain. For
more information within this chapter,
refer to the Ironing Section section,
Drive Chain Tension Adjustment
procedure.
B
c) Locate the clips that secure the ends of
the drive chain together.
d) Use a chain puller to relieve tension at
the site of the clips and remove them.
e) Remove the chain from the return ribbon drive roll sprocket (B).
A
Figure 7-52: Remove the drive chain from the
return ribbon drive roll.
f) Close and secure the right endframe
door.
7. Remove the front receiving shelf.
Clamp & Screws
8. Pull the return ribbons around their tracks
until all the lacing clips are accessible and
aligned at the front of the unit. Remove
the connecting pins and position the return
ribbon ends away from any contact with
the drive roll.
7-58
TOC
Return Ribbon
Drive Roll
Friction Material
Figure 7-53: The friction material is secured to
each end of the drive roll by screws
and clamps.
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
NOTE: Spiral-wind the friction
material at a 45° angle. To ensure
this, the material edges must be
aligned with no gaps.
13. Spiral wind the new cover over the roll
without cement to make sure there is
enough material to cover the roll. Put it on
in the same spiral pattern as before.
14. Use a caulk gun to apply several beads of
cement across the length of the roll.
15. Use a serrated putty knife or other roughedged tool to spread the cement evenly
over the entire roll (Figure 7-54).
16. Starting either side of the machine:
• Spiral-wind two or three turns of the
material onto the roll and secure it with
masking tape so the material does not
unwind during installation.
• Carefully continue to spiral-wind the
cover onto the roll, making sure it goes
on smoothly without any gaps.
• This procedure is easier with two people. One person turns the drive roll by
hand while a second person holds the
roll of material and guides the material
onto the drive roll, pressing it ﬁrmly
into place.
• Continue working down the length of
the roll.
• After the roll is covered, wrap the other
end of the roll with masking tape.
19. Remove the masking tape and then reinstall the end clamps and screws (Figure
7-53).
20. Remove the temporary protective covering
and clean up the area.
21. Refasten the return ribbons. Stagger the
positions of the lacing clips to give the
ﬂatwork a smooth ﬂow.
22. Remove the wire/string/guide tape holding
the return ribbon guide assembly in the
high position.
23. Reinstall the drive chain on the return
ribbon drive roll sprocket and adjust its
tension. For more information within this
chapter, refer to the Ironing Section section, Drive Chain Tension Adjustment
procedure.
24. Reinstall and re-tension the delivery
ribbons. For more information within
this chapter, refer to the Delivery Section–Type R Unit section, Delivery Ribbon Replacement and Delivery Ribbon
Tension Adjustment procedures.
25. Close and secure both endframe doors.
26. Reinstall the front receiving shelf.
27. Allow the cement to harden for 5 to 6
hours before operating the unit.
28. After the cement hardens, check tension
on the return ribbons. Within this section,
refer to the Return Ribbon Tension Adjustment procedure.
Feed Ribbons
Heated
Cylinder
17. Use a hammer to lightly tap the friction
material at each end to break it off and
create an even edge or use a utility knife
to trim it.
18. Use a nail to pierce the friction material
and expose the holes for the end clamp
screws.
TOC
Cement applied to entire
drive roll surface
Feed Ribbon
Drive Roll
Return Ribbon
Drive Roll
Figure 7-54: Cement secures the friction material to
the return ribbon drive roll.
INDEX
7-59
Repair
GO 20
7.8 Delivery Section–Type
R Unit
For Type R units, ﬂatwork can be delivered
either to the front or rear of the machine. The
delivery section (Figure 7-55) consists of the
following components:
•
Delivery ribbons (A)
•
Delivery drive roll (B)
•
Delivery idler roll (C)
Delivery Ribbon Tension Adjustment
Adjust the tension of the delivery ribbons when
they sag or track to one side of the delivery
section. Both conditions cause excessive wear
on the ribbons and shorten their life.
Required Tools
Wrenches:
3/8”
9/16”
Various components of the delivery section
require periodic adjustment, replacement, or
occasional repair.
These procedures include:
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open both endframe doors.
•
Delivery Ribbon Tension Adjustment
•
Delivery Ribbon Replacement
•
Delivery Ribbon Drive Roll Drive Belt
Tension Adjustment
•
Delivery Ribbon Drive Roll Tracking
Tape Replacement
3. Locate the delivery ribbons idler roll
tension adjustment bolts (Figure 7-56,
A). There is one on each side of the machine.
4. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, loosen its locknut (Figure 7-56,
B).
5. Adjust each bolt the same number of turns
clockwise until the ribbons are snug.
C
A
B
Figure 7-56: Delivery ribbon tension adjustment.
Figure 7-55: Delivery section components.
7-60
A
B
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
6. The machine will not operate while a
safety microswitch is open. As a temporary measure during this work, defeat each
endframe interlock switch by pulling out
on its plunger.
7. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
8. Turn the SPEED knob to the slowest
speed.
9. Set the DELIVERY switch to FRONT.
10. Run the unit brieﬂy and make sure the
ribbons track straight.
TOC
11. If tension on the ribbons is uneven, ribbons
track toward the end of the drive roll where
the tension is highest.
12. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
13. Either turn the adjusting bolt counterclockwise at the high tension end, or turn
the adjusting bolt clockwise at the low
tension end.
14. Repeat Steps 7 to 13 until the ribbons have
the correct tension and track evenly.
15. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
16. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, secure its locknut.
17. Push the interlock switch plungers in; then,
close and secure both endframe doors.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
working correctly.
INDEX
7-61
Repair
GO 20
Delivery Ribbon Replacement
Delivery ribbons stretch and ﬂatwork moves
unevenly and improperly through the delivery
section. When tension on these ribbons can
no longer be adjusted, the entire set must be
replaced.
Replacing Worn Ribbons
Use this procedure to replace ribbons that are
still in place, but are worn out.
Required Tools
Pliers
Wrenches:
3/8”
9/16”
6. Adjust each bolt the same number of turns
clockwise until the ribbons are easily
moved by hand.
WARNING
Never start the unit while
installing the delivery
ribbons. It is dangerous
and unnecessary.
7. Pull the worn ribbons around their tracks
until all the lacing clips are accessible
and aligned at either the back or front of
the unit.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Verify the replacement ribbons are the
correct size and sufﬁcient quantity for
completing the procedure. See the PARTS
LIST.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Open both endframe doors.
4. Locate the delivery ribbons idler roll
tension adjustment bolts (Figure 7-56,
A). There is one on each side of the machine.
7-62
5. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, loosen its locknut (Figure 7-56,
B).
TOC
8. Remove the connecting pin from an old
ribbon and attach a new ribbon to one
end.
9. Pull the old ribbon through until the new
ribbon is in place.
10. Disconnect the old ribbon and secure the
replacement ribbon with a new pin.
11. Repeat Steps 8 to 10 to replace additional
worn ribbons. Stagger the positions of the
lacing clips to give the ﬂatwork a smooth
ﬂow.
12. Adjust ribbon tension following the
Delivery Ribbon Tension Adjustment
procedure earlier in this section.
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
Replacing Broken or Missing Ribbons
Ribbons that break should be replaced
immediately. To avoid excessive stress on only
one new, slightly shorter ribbon, the entire set of
ribbons should be replaced. At a minimum, it is
recommended that ribbons be replaced in pairs.
6. Adjust each bolt the same number of turns
clockwise until the ribbons are easily
moved by hand.
7. Remove a ribbon from both ends of the
unit and use one or both as replacement
ribbons. These end ribbons can then be
replaced by a pair of new ribbons.
Required Tools
WARNING
Never start the unit while
installing the delivery
ribbons. It is dangerous
and unnecessary.
Pliers
Wrenches:
3/8”
9/16”
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Verify the replacement ribbons are the
correct size and sufﬁcient quantity for
completing the procedure. See the PARTS
LIST.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Open both endframe doors.
8. Place the ribbons between the guides and
follow the ribbon path.
9. Bring the ends of the ribbon together and
connect them with a new pin.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 to replace additional
ribbons. Stagger the positions of the lacing
clips to give the ﬂatwork a smooth ﬂow.
NOTE: If the remaining ribbons
are being replaced, refer to
the Replacing Worn Ribbons
procedure.
4. Locate the delivery ribbons idler roll
tension adjustment bolts (Figure 7-56,
A). There is one on each side of the machine.
5. While holding each adjustment bolt in
place, loosen its locknut (Figure 7-56,
B).
TOC
11. Adjust ribbon tension following the
Delivery Ribbon Tension Adjustment
procedure earlier in this section.
INDEX
7-63
Repair
GO 20
Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt Tension
Adjustment
Delivery Ribbon Drive Roll Tracking
Tape Replacement
Over a period of time, the delivery drive belt
(Figure 7-57, A) will stretch from normal wear.
When the belt is noticeably slack or begins to
jump off either of the pulleys, tension must be
adjusted.
Tracking tape (Figure 7-58) helps hold the
delivery ribbons from moving from side to
side or overlapping each other on the drive roll
during operation. Tracking tape is wound around
the outside of the roll, under the center of each
ribbon.
Required Tools
Required Tools
Wrenches: 1/2” (2)
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open the right endframe door.
3. Locate the delivery drive motor on the
inside of the right endframe.
4. Loosen the motor mounting bolts (Figure
7-57, B).
5. Carefully slide the motor until the belt has
the proper tension.
6. Tighten the motor mounting bolts.
7. Close and secure the right endframe door.
8. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch. Start the unit to check the adjustment.
Clean cloth
Permanent marker
Pliers
Protective covering
Scissors/knife
Wrenches:
3/8”
1/2”
9/16”
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Verify there is enough 1” (25 mm) gray
tracking tape (1009-722) available to
replace the old material.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Loosen tension on the delivery ribbons.
Refer to the Delivery Ribbon Tension
Adjustment procedure earlier in this
section.
A
B
B
Figure 7-58: Tracking tape is wound around the
delivery ribbon drive roll at each
ribbon position.
Figure 7-57: Delivery ribbon drive belt tension
adjustment in the right endframe.
7-64
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
4. Loosen tension on the delivery ribbon
drive belt and remove it from the drive
roll pulley so the roll can turn freely.
Refer to the Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt
Tension Adjustment procedure earlier in
this section.
9. To apply tape:
a) Cut an 11” (280 mm) piece for each
placement.
b) Remove the backing from the tape.
c) Line up the tape with the center
mark.
5. Place a tarp, plastic drop cloth, heavy paper, or other temporary protective covering
on the ﬂoor below the work area.
6. Pull the delivery ribbons around their
tracks until all the lacing clips are accessible and aligned. Remove the connecting
pins from all the ribbons and remove them
from the machine.
7. Remove the old tape from the drive roll.
Mark the center position of each tape with
a permanent marker so that new tapes can
be properly positioned.
8. Scrape off any old cement which remains
on the roll using a scraper, coarse sandpaper, or a wire brush. Wipe away any
remaining residue with a clean cloth.
d) Wrap the tape around the roll and butt
the ends together.
10. Repeat Step 9 for each tracking tape location.
11. Remove the temporary protective covering.
12. Re-install and re-tension the delivery
ribbon drive belt. For more information,
refer to the Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt
Tension Adjustment procedure earlier in
this section.
13. Reconnect the ribbons. Stagger the positions of the lacing clips to give the ﬂatwork
a smooth ﬂow.
14. Adjust the tension of the delivery ribbons. For more information, refer to the
Delivery Ribbon Tension Adjustment
procedure earlier in this section.
15. Close and secure both endframe doors.
TOC
INDEX
7-65
Repair
GO 20
7.9 Machine Speed Sensor
The machine speed sensor (Figure 7-59) is
located inside the right endframe. It is mounted
on a bracket very close to the teeth of the ironing
cylinder sprocket.
This sensor generates a magnetic ﬁeld, which
is disturbed by each passing tooth of the sprocket.
This signal is interpreted as the speed of the
ﬂatwork.
Machine Speed Sensor Adjustment
Required Tools
Shim: 1 or 1.5 mm
Wrenches: 11/16” (2)
Perform only when the unit is
RUNNING and COOL.
Use extreme caution.
1. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch.
2. Open the right endframe door.
A
B
Figure 7-59: The machine speed sensor must be
correctly positioned near the teeth of
the ironing cylinder sprocket.
WARNING
This safety interlock switch
is only to be defeated
temporarily while performing
this procedure. Never
operate the unit unless
all safety systems
are working correctly.
Serious Injury Could Result.
3. The unit will not operate while a safety
interlock switch is open. As a temporary
measure during this work, defeat the door
switch in the endframe by pulling out on
its plunger.
4. Start the unit. Turn the SPEED knob to the
slowest speed.
5. Look at the machine speed sensor (Figure
7-59). The LED on the back of the sensor
should blink each time a tooth of the ironing cylinder sprocket passes.
6. If the LED is not blinking, the sensor
may be located too far from the teeth of
the sprocket. The gap between the sensor
and the teeth should be 0.04” to 0.06” (1
to 1.5 mm).
7. Stop the unit and turn the power OFF at
the main disconnect switch.
7-66
TOC
INDEX
GO 20
Repair
CAUTION
Adjust the position of the
machine speed sensor very
carefully. If it is hit by the
sprocket, the sensor must be
replaced.
Machine Speed Sensor Replacement
It the machine speed sensor fails or is erratic,
it must be replaced immediately.
Required Tools
Plastic wire ties
Scissors/knife
Shim: 1 or 1.5 mm
Wrenches: 11/16” (2)
8. Loosen the outer nut (Figure 7-59, A) and
move the sensor closer to the teeth.
9. Tighten the inner nut (B) to hold the sensor
in the new position. Do not position the
sensor closer than 0.04” (1.0 mm) to the
sprocket. The sensor must be replaced if it
is hit by the teeth of the sprocket.
10. Turn power ON at the main disconnect
switch; then, repeat Steps 4 to 9 until the
machine speed sensor is operating correctly.
11. Stop the unit and turn power OFF at the
main disconnect switch.
12. Push the interlock switch plunger in;
then, close and secure the right endframe
door.
WARNING
Never operate the unit unless
all safety covers are in place
and all safety equipment is
operating correctly.
Perform only when the unit is OFF
with power disconnected and COOL.
1. Make sure you have the correct replacement sensor. For more information, refer
to the SCHEMATICS.
2. Turn power OFF at the main disconnect
switch.
3. Open the right endframe door.
4. Trace the sensor’s wiring to its connector
plug and disconnect. Cut any plastic wire
ties securing the sensor wiring along its
path.
5. Unscrew the sensor from its mounting
bracket. Be careful to save the nuts.
6. Using these nuts, secure the new machine
speed sensor in position.
7. Plug the sensor into its connector receptacle. Use plastic wire ties to secure the
sensor wiring along its path as needed.
8. Make sure the new machine speed sensor
is positioned properly. Within this section, refer to the Machine Speed Sensor
Adjustment procedure.
9. Start the unit and process several pieces
of ﬂatwork to make sure the new sensor
is working correctly.
TOC
INDEX
7-67
GO 20
NOTE:
3031-026e
When ordering parts, please provide the serial number and
a complete description of the machine, including any nonstandard features. Electrical part numbers can be found in the
SCHEMATICS section (when available).
GO 20
Picture Parts List
Content
General Components
Front View - Type “F” .................................................................................................................PL-2
Front View - Type “R” .................................................................................................................PL-4
Rear View - Type “F” ..................................................................................................................PL-6
Rear View - Type “R”..................................................................................................................PL-8
Rolls and Ribbons ....................................................................................................................PL-10
Left Endframe Components
Left Side Bearings ....................................................................................................................PL-12
Left Endframe - Misc ................................................................................................................PL-13
Left Indicator Panel ..................................................................................................................PL-14
Right Endframe Components
Right Side Bearings .................................................................................................................PL-15
Drive Side Detail ......................................................................................................................PL-16
Right Indicator Panel ................................................................................................................PL-19
Heating System Components
Gas Heating Assembly .............................................................................................................PL-20
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-1
3031-026e
GO 20
Front View - Type “F”
9
8
5
6
10
7
13
11
12
4
14
3
15
16
2
17
1
22
19
20
21
PART NUMBERS SHOWN ARE FOR 120” MACHINE.
REFER TO CHART FOR CORRESPONDING MACHINE LENGTH
PL-2
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
18
GO 20
3031-026e
Front View - Type “F” continued...
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
2001-368
4019-633
3006-063
4801-100
E18-100
4805-100
4819-220
4819-222
2217-641
4803-451
2801-845
2801-875
3210-089
3006-062
0402-767
3401-255
0603-442
2001-531
2809-275
3402-060
0603-431
2001-532
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DOOR MODEL 20
BUMPER ,DOOR 28-1/4” W/2 END CAPS
LEFT INDICATION PANEL COMPLETE
CANOPY COMPLETE MODEL 16, 20-120” GAS
MINERALLAC HANGER 1/2” IP
COLLAR 9” START 4” LONG
ELBOW 9” DIA 90 DEG
ADAPTOR PIECE
SAIL SWITCH
CANOPY BLOWER ONLY FOR 1 HP MOTOR
MOTOR 1 HP 3/60/208-230/460 1730 RPM
MOTOR 1 HP 3/50/220/440 1440 RPM FR 143T
SAFETY FINGER GUARD ASSY MODEL 20-120”
RIGHT INDICATION PANEL COMPLETE
BEARING HANGER 1” BORE
FEED TABLE 136” MODEL 20-120”
ANGLE IRON R.H. 2” x 2” x 21” x 3/16 GA
ENDFRAME ASSY R.H. MODEL 20
GEARMOTOR, 3/4HP 40.81:1 RATIO INLINE
RECEIVING SHELF FRONT/REAR M16,18,20-120
ANGLE IRON L.H. 2” x 2” x 21” x 3/16 GA
ENDFRAME ASSY L.H. MODEL 20
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-3
3031-026e
GO 20
Front View - Type “R”
9
10
8
4
5
11
13
7
12
6
14
15
3
16
2
17
18
1
23
21
22
20
PART NUMBERS SHOWN ARE FOR 120” MACHINE.
REFER TO CHART FOR CORRESPONDING MACHINE LENGTH
PL-4
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
19
GO 20
3031-026e
Front View - Type “R” continued...
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
2001-368
4019-633
3006-063
4801-100
E18-100
4805-100
4819-220
4803-451
2217-641
4819-222
2801-845
2801-875
3210-089
3006-062
0402-767
3401-255
1402-572
0603-442
2001-531
2809-275
3407-110
0603-431
2001-532
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DOOR MODEL 20
BUMPER ,DOOR 28-1/4” W/2 END CAPS
LEFT INDICATION PANEL COMPLETE
CANOPY COMPLETE MODEL 16, 20-120” GAS
MINERALLAC HANGER 1/2” IP
COLLAR 9” START 4” LONG
ELBOW 9” DIA 90 DEG
CANOPY BLOWER ONLY FOR 1 HP MOTOR
SAIL SWITCH
ADAPTOR PIECE
MOTOR 1 HP 3/60/208-230/460 1730 RPM
MOTOR 1 HP 3/50/220/440 1440 RPM FR 143T
SAFETY FINGER GUARD ASSY MODEL 20-120”
RIGHT INDICATION PANEL COMPLETE
BEARING HANGER 1” BORE
FEED TABLE 136” MODEL 20-120”
SWITCH WORK DELIVERY
ANGLE IRON R.H. 2” x 2” x 21” x 3/16 GA
ENDFRAME ASSY R.H. MODEL 20
GEARMOTOR, 3/4HP 40.81:1 RATIO INLINE
DELIVERY TABLE 137” x 24” x 14 GA
ANGLE IRON L.H. 2” x 2” x 21” x 3/16 GA
ENDFRAME ASSY L.H. MODEL 20
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-5
3031-026e
GO 20
Rear View - Type “F”
11
12
9 10
7
13
8
16
14
15
5
17
4
5
3
18
2
19
1
25
21
22
23
24
PART NUMBERS SHOWN ARE FOR 120” MACHINE.
REFER TO CHART FOR CORRESPONDING MACHINE LENGTH
PL-6
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
20
GO 20
3031-026e
Rear View - Type “F” continued...
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
2001-531
1413-477
3004-273
0608-419
1411-560-01
E18-100
3403-126
2801-875
2801-845
2217-641
4819-222
4803-451
4819-220
4805-100
4801-100
0608-420
4019-633
2001-368
2001-532
2212-760
2212-805
2212-750
2212-770
2809-275
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ENDFRAME ASSY R.H. MODEL 20
SWITCH
ELECTRIAL CONNECTION HERE 3/1-60/110-220
R.H. HOOD SHIELD SUPPORT BRKT
SWITCH STOP 22 MM W/1 N/C CONTACT BLOCK
MINERALLAC HANGER 1/2” IP
REAR COVER INSULATING MODEL 20-120”
MOTOR 1 HP 3/50/220/440 1440 RPM FR 143T
MOTOR 1 HP 3/60/208-230/460 1730 RPM
SAIL SWITCH
ADAPTOR PIECE
CANOPY BLOWER ONLY FOR 1 HP MOTOR
ELBOW 9” DIA 90 DEG
COLLAR 9” START 4” LONG
CANOPY COMPLETE MODEL 16, 20-120” GAS
L.H. HOOD SHIELD SUPPORT BRKT
BUMPER ,DOOR 28-1/4” W/2 END CAPS
DOOR MODEL 20
ENDFRAME ASSY L.H. MODEL 20
MICROPROCESSOR M3 PROGRAMMER
BASE M-SERIES
MICROPROCESSOR M3 CHASSIS W/DISP PORT
UV AMPLIFIER W/4 SECOND PTFI
GEARMOTOR, 3/4HP 40.81:1 RATIO INLINE
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-7
3031-026e
GO 20
Rear View - Type “R”
8
10
9
11
12
6
15
13
7
6
14
16
5
5
4
3
17
2
1
25
24
18
20
21
22
PART NUMBERS SHOWN ARE FOR 120” MACHINE.
REFER TO CHART FOR CORRESPONDING MACHINE LENGTH
PL-8
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
23
19
GO 20
3031-026e
Rear View - Type “R” continued...
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
2001-531
1413-477
3004-273
0608-419
1411-560-01
E18-100
3403-126
2801-875
2801-845
2217-641
4819-222
4803-451
4819-220
4805-100
4801-100
0608-420
4019-633
2001-368
2001-532
2212-760
2212-805
2212-750
2212-770
3402-060
2809-275
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ENDFRAME ASSY R.H. MODEL 20
SWITCH
ELECTRIAL CONNECTION HERE 3/1-60/110-220
R.H. HOOD SHIELD SUPPORT BRKT
SWITCH STOP 22 MM W/1 N/C CONTACT BLOCK
MINERALLAC HANGER 1/2” IP
REAR COVER INSULATING MODEL 20-120”
MOTOR 1 HP 3/50/220/440 1440 RPM FR 143T
MOTOR 1 HP 3/60/208-230/460 1730 RPM
SAIL SWITCH
ADAPTOR PIECE
CANOPY BLOWER ONLY FOR 1 HP MOTOR
ELBOW 9” DIA 90 DEG
COLLAR 9” START 4” LONG
CANOPY COMPLETE MODEL 16, 20-120” GAS
L.H. HOOD SHIELD SUPPORT BRKT
BUMPER ,DOOR 28-1/4” W/2 END CAPS
DOOR MODEL 20
ENDFRAME ASSY L.H. MODEL 20
MICROPROCESSOR M3 PROGRAMMER
BASE M-SERIES
MICROPROCESSOR M3 CHASSIS W/DISP PORT
UV AMPLIFIER W/4 SECOND PTFI
RECEIVING SHELF FRONT/REAR M16,18,20-120
GEARMOTOR, 3/4HP 40.81:1 RATIO INLINE
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-9
3031-026e
GO 20
Rolls and Ribbons
5
4
6
5
16
2
1
3
15
13
12
14
7
11
8
9*
*5
*10
* = Type “R” Machine Only
NOTES: Parts on BOM are for 120” Long Machine.
Refer to chart for other machine lengths.
PL-10
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
1
7
12
11
GO 20
8 3031-026e
9*
Rolls and Ribbons continued...
ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9*
10*
11
12
13
14
15
16
Part Number
Qty
Description
3211-216
3209-237
3203-206
1002-250
3201-715
3208-041
1001-213
3209-242
3209-239
3208-042
3208-028
0607-228
0607-229
1007-723
1
38
1
1
3
20
1
1
33
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
DRIVE ROLL 5-1/2”x126”x11 GA W/RED COVER
POLYESTER RIBBON 3” x 40” W/PIN
DOFFER ROLL 1-1/4” x126”x16 GA W/FELT
10
RAW DRIVE ROLL 5-1/2” x120” x11 GA
RAW IDLER ROLL 3-1/2” x 126” x 11 GA
NOMEX RIBBON 6” x 124” W/PIN
GAS HEATED ROLL MODEL 20-120”
RETURN RIBBON GUIDE ASSY MODEL 16,20-120
CANVAS RIBBON 3” x 68” W/PIN
DRIVE ROLL 3-1/2”x126”x11 GA W/33 RINGS
DRIVE ROLL 5-1/2” x126” x11 GA W/FLEXTRA
FEED RIBBON GUIDE ASSY MODEL 16, 20-120
S/S GUIDE TAPE BAR ASSY 3/4” x 137-1/2”
R.H. GUIDE TAPE SUPPORT MOUNT ASSY
L.H. GUIDE TAPE SUPPORT MOUNT ASSY
IMPREGNATED GUIDE TAPE 1/2” 36 YD ROLL
*3209-417
5
1003-086
^ = Type R Machine
*
* = Type “R” Machine Only
NOTES: Parts on BOM are for 120” Long Machine.
Refer to chart for other machine lengths.
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-11
3031-026e
GO 20
Left Side Bearings
1
OR
2
1
OR
2
3 OR 4
5
9
6
OR
*2
7
OR
2 *
*1
8
*2
OR
1 *
OR
*1
* = Type “R” Machine Only
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0402-793
0402-792
0402-786
0402-787
0402-007
0402-019
0402-020
0402-768
0403-763
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
BEARING 1” BORE PIVOT MNT GF OPPOSITE
BEARING 1” BORE PIVOT MNT GF NEXT PIVOT
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE PIVOT MOUNT CNTRSUNK
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE PIVOT MOUNT CNTRSUNK
BEARING HANGER 1” BORE W/WELDED BRKT
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE PIVOT MOUNT
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE PIVOT MOUNT
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE STAT MOUNT
BEARING CAM FOLLOWER 1-3/4” BORE ASSY
PL-12
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
GO 20
3031-026e
Left Endframe - Misc
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0607-129
4203-000
0601-031
0403-763
0406-059
0601-032
4203-652
0607-200
3603-225
E02-125
2213-601
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
COMPRESSION ROLL TENSION HANDLE ASSY
TOUCHLESS THERMOCOUPLE SCANNER ASSY
BURNER SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
BEARING CAM FOLLOWER 1-3/4” BORE ASSY
HARDENED RING 10-3/4” OD
U-BOLT PILOT MOUNT ASSEMBLY
UPPER SLEEVE INFRARED THERMOCOUPLE
SPRING BRACKET
SPRING 3/4” x 8”
EL BOX 8” x 12” x 4” SCREW COV
IGNITION TRANSFORMER 6000/120 V 60 HZ
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-13
3031-026e
GO 20
Left Indicator Panel
2
GAS HEATING SEQUENCE
1
MAIN
VALVE
PILOT
VALVE
IGNITION
EXHAUST
COMBUSTION
HIGH TEMPERATURE
AIR FLOW
AIR FLOW
LIMIT
ALARM
7
RESET
CAUTION!
This light indicates improper
operating condition. While ironer
cools, consult manual to locate
and correct cause before resetting.
2
OFF
CHICAGO ßF
FLAME
SAFEGUARD
ON
HEAT
3
ACTUAL
6
ON
SET
SEL
ALARM
PYW-4
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
CAUTION!
Before resetting flame safeguard
GAS
check flame safeguard diagnostic
panel to determine cause. Consult
manual for details.
4
CHICAGO
8
R
5
Flatwork Ironer Series
TM
CLEAR FLOW POWER BURNER SYSTEM
STOP
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1416-560
1416-555
1416-550
1402-008
1411-560-01
4202-310
1411-800
3006-056
1
5
2
1
1
1
1
1
INDICATOR LIGHT YELLOW 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT RED 24 VDC
SWITCH W/1 NO CONTACT 2 POSITION RED
SWITCH STOP 22 MM W/1 N/C CONTACT BLOCK
TEMP CONTROL 1/16 DIN TYPE K
SWITCH PUSH BUTTON
PANEL LEFT MEDIUM 1/16 DIN
PL-14
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
GO 20
3031-026e
Right Side Bearings
1 OR 2
3 OR 4
3 OR 4
5
6
13
7
12
8
OR
11
9
10
3 *
*4
OR
*
3 *
4
OR
*3
4
OR
*
* = Type “R” Machine Only
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
0402-786
0402-787
0402-792
0402-793
4003-075
4003-650
5002-505
0402-780
0403-763
0402-768
0402-019
0402-020
0402-007
1
1
5
5
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE PIVOT MOUNT CNTRSUNK
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE PIVOT MOUNT CNTRSUNK
BEARING 1” BORE PIVOT MNT GF NEXT PIVOT
BEARING 1” BORE PIVOT MNT GF OPPOSITE
GREASE FITTING 1/4-28 90 DEG
GREASE EXTENSION PIECE 5”
ELBOW STREET 45 DEG 1/8”
BEARING BALL 2-1/4” BORE
BEARING CAM FOLLOWER 1-3/4” BORE ASSY
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE STAT MOUNT
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE PIVOT MOUNT
BEARING 1-1/4” BORE PIVOT MOUNT
BEARING HANGER 1” BORE W/WELDED BRKT
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-15
3031-026e
GO 20
Drive Side Detail
3
2
1
4
5
20
21
22
6
7
2
19
18
25
23
8
24
9
10 *
17
11 *
16
12 *
15
** 13
** 14
PL-16
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
GO 20
3031-026e
Drive Side Detail continued...
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10*
11*
12*
13**
14**
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1206-350
1201-450
5005-600
2212-825
1201-591
0601-023
4203-655
4203-000
0205-260
1205-820
1203-200
1205-855
2809-544
2809-309
1201-405
2809-275
1211-005
1211-006
1201-430
1204-421
3603-225
0607-200
0603-401
1608-004
0607-129
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BEARING SPROCKET #50 17T 5/8” BORE
SPROCKET #50 20T 1-1/4” BORE KWAY 2 STSC
COUPLING 1/2” STEEL X-HEAVY
UV SCANNER W/3 FT LEADS W/BUL 3023-437
SPROCKET 50B 60T 2-1/4” BORE
BURNER TAIL SUPPORT 3” x 2” x 14 GA
SLEEVE INFRARED THERMOCOUPLE, HIGH LIMIT
TOUCHLESS THERMOCOUPLE SCANNER ASSY
ELBOW 1/8” NPT x 3/8” OD
V BELT SHEAVE 4” OD 1” BORE
V BELT B 35
V BELT SHEAVE 4-3/4” OD 3/4” BORE
GEARMOTOR 1/3HP 58RPM 3/50/60/230-460V R
GEARMOTOR 1/3 HP 58 RPM OUTPUT L.H.
SPROCKET #50 12T 1” BORE KWAY 2 STSCRW
GEARMOTOR, 3/4HP 40.81:1 RATIO INLINE
IDLER ARM FOR CHAIN RIDER
CHAIN RIDER SET #40 CHAIN
SPROCKET #50 16T 1-1/4” BORE KWAY 2 STSC
CHAIN #50 154 LINKS W/CONN LINK
SPRING 3/4” x 8”
SPRING BRACKET
MACHINE SPEED SENSOR BRACKET
MACHINE SPEED SENSOR ASSY
COMPRESSION ROLL TENSION HANDLE ASSY
* = Type R Machine
** = Type R - Voltage Dependent
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-17
3031-026e
GO 20
This page intentionally left blank.
PL-18
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
GO 20
3031-026e
Right Indicator Panel
CHICAGO
R
Flatwork Ironer
1
CAUTION! Only Trained Personnel Should Operate this Equipment.
Consult Manual for Safety, Operating, and Maintenance Instructions.
9
READY
MOTOR
PROTECTORS
LEFT SIDE
INTERLOCKS & STOP BUTTONS
8
RIGHT SIDE
SPEED
SLOW
INTERLOCKS & STOP BUTTONS
FAST
JOG
FWD.
JOG
REV.
7
2
3
SPEED
6
CAUTION! Set SPEED to SLOW before using
JOG. Failure to do so may result in
unsafe condition or damage to ironer.
To prevent excess wear on components
use JOG briefly & only when necessary.
4
5
START
STOP
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1416-555
1414-260-01
1414-410-01
1411-250
1411-560-01
1414-510
1402-551
3006-054
2604-400
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
SELECTOR SWITCH 3 POS RED
BUTTON START GREEN ILLUM 1 N/O CONTACT
SWITCH STOP 22 MM W/1 N/C CONTACT BLOCK
KNOB FOR SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
SPEED CONTROL POT 5K W/WIRE CONNECTOR
PANEL RHT MEDIUM 1/16 DIN
SPEED INDICATOR
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-19
3031-026e
GO 20
Gas Heating Assembly
39
1
38
2
3
9
4
5
37
6
7
36
35
31
32
8
34
33
3
29
12
13
11
10
14
16
30
29
28
19
24
19
18
15
17
20
27 26 25
24
23
* *
22 21
* = VOLTAGE DEPENDENT
PL-20
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
GO 20
3031-026e
Gas Heating Assembly continued...
ID
Part Number
Qty
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21*
22*
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
2204-325
5001-401
5001-251
2211-450
5001-249
2201-015
2201-015
5019-403
2218-625
5002-090
5001-071
5001-402
5001-254
2201-015
5202-560
5002-110
2208-025
2208-433
5001-246
2210-453
2801-145
2801-250
2209-242
4014-100
5010-050
5006-005
5001-002
0205-250
A05-030
5005-130
2206-180
2206-429
5006-475
5002-125
4203-000
0601-032
4203-652
2203-427
2203-426
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BURNER GAS/AIR MIXER
NIPPLE 2” x CLOSE
NIPPLE 1” x 3-1/2”
SPARK PLUG I-101
NIPPLE 1” x 2-1/2”
PILOT ASSY EAGLE EYE GAS SYSTEMS
PILOT ASSY EAGLE EYE GAS SYSTEMS
UNION 1” 250 LB BLK
PRESSURE SWITCH
ELBOW 90 DEG 1/4”
NIPPLE 1/4” x 10-1/2”
NIPPLE 2” x 2-1/2”
NIPPLE 1” x 5”
PILOT ASSY EAGLE EYE GAS SYSTEMS
1/8 STREET ELB 90 DEG BRASS
ELBOW 90 DEG 1”
GAS COCK W/THROTTLE 1/8”
GAS COCK 1”
NIPPLE 1” x CLOSE
FLEXIBLE AIR HOSE 2-1/2” x 24”
MOTOR 1/3 HP 1/60/115/230 3450RPM FR 56C
MOTOR 1/3 HP 3/60/208-230/460 3450 RPM
BURNER BLOWER W/O MOTOR
HOSE CLAMP 1-9/16 TO 2-1/2”
1/8-27 HEADLESS STEEL PIPE PLUG
TEE MALL 1/8 x 1/8 x 1/8
NIPPLE 1/8” x CLOSE
ELBOW 1/8” NPT x 1/4” OD
1/4” ALUMINUM TUBING SCH 40
COUPLING 1”
VALVE 1/4”CC ,24VAC
MAGNETIC VALVE 1” NPT 120 VAC
TEE MALL 2 x 2 x 1/2
ELBOW 90 DEG 2”
TOUCHLESS THERMOCOUPLE SCANNER ASSY
U-BOLT PILOT MOUNT ASSEMBLY
UPPER SLEEVE INFRARED THERMOCOUPLE
BURNER TIP 1-1/2” EXTENSION
BURNER TIP 1-1/2” BRASS
* = Voltage Dependent
TOC
PL-TOC
INDEX
PL-21
GO 20
3031-029b
NOTE:
When ordering parts, please provide the serial number and
a complete description of the machine, including any nonstandard features .
GO 20
Schematics and Parts
Content
Motor Circuits
115V 1-Phase Motor Circuit ...................................................................................................... SC-2
208/230V 3-Phase Motor Circuit ............................................................................................... SC-4
208/230V 1-Phase Motor Circuit ............................................................................................... SC-6
460V 3-Phase Motor Circuit ...................................................................................................... SC-8
Interlock Circuit
Interlock Circuit ....................................................................................................................... SC-10
Gas Ignition Circuit
Gas Ignition Circuit .................................................................................................................. SC-12
Electrical Panels
Single Phase 115V Electrical Panel ........................................................................................ SC-14
Single Phase or 3-Phase 208-230V Electrical Panel .............................................................. SC-15
3-Phase 460V Electrical Panel ............................................................................................... SC-16
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
SC-1
1-Phase Motor Circuit
CHICAGO115V
DRYER COMPANY
6220574 - A
Drawn By:
GO20 & TGO20 GAS w/BRASS BURNER TIPS
115V 1 PHASE MOTOR CIRCUIT
CAD By:
MTB/JEM
MTB/JEM NC Code:
Approved By: MTB/JEM Scale: -
Txxx
N1
Date: 02-15-04
TANDEM &
REGULAR TYPE R
MAIN FUSE
30A
40A
NAMEPLATE 26.4A
32.4A
2.1HP
2.4HP
DISC1
DISC1R
FU1
NOTE: use 60A disconnect for type "R"
MPG
MPE
MPD
BLACK
WHITE
BLUE
75VA
YELLOW
CON2B
153
BLACK T1
BLUE
WHITE
75VA
YELLOW 0
1
154
F-10
24VAC
F-0
24VAC
ADDED FOR TANDEM ONLY
24VAC TO FOLDER CONTROL
TERMINALS 10 & 0
S1
JOG
REV
JOG
FOR
CB1-10A
X1
H4
X2
H3
X3
H2
M0
L1(R)
FU5-30A-JJN
M3
RED
AVI
GND
POT1 5KOHM
MPG 14
T1(U)
MTR1
T2(V)
BLACK
0.75HP
T3(W)
AFM
RED
CW
INHI
INLO
VM1
7
0
SPEED INDICATOR
SPEED CONTROL
CON2
1
RB
RC
1 HP
VFD007M21A
+10V
H1
M1
INV1
L2(S)
L3(T)
ACME #T2-53010-S
1 KVA
RED
54
GND
FU4-30A-JJN
BLACK
CON2A 22
53
20
T2
X4
61
24VAC
+
0
62
RED
CON2A
NEUTRAL
WHITE
21
120VAC
BLACK
90
WHITE
CB2-2A
N
4-6.3 AMP
9-14 AMP
4-6.3 AMP
BROWN
CB1-2A
T3
MPE
MPD
MTR2
1HP
EXHAUST
BLOWER
MTR4
0.33HP
DELIVERY
MTR3
0.33HP
COMBUSTION
BLOWER
DS1
2
1
2
4
3
4
3
1
5
6
5
6
FOR TYPE "R" MACHINES ONLY.
MPG
SC-2
n/a
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
MAIN
DRIVE
MOTOR
GO 20
3031-029b
115V 1-Phase Motor Circuit (6220574)
Reference
Part No.
Description
CB1
CB2
CB3
CON2
CON2A
CON2B
DISC1
DISC1F
DISC1FR
DISC1H
DISC1HR
DISC1R
DISC1S
DISC1SR
DS1
FU1
FU1R
FU4
FU4B
FU5
INV1
MPD
MPE
MPG
MTR1
MTR2
MTR3
MTR4
POT1
POT1A
S1
S1A
S1B
S1C
S1D
T1
T2
T3
VM1
1410-120
1410-120
1410-195
1404-465
1414-710
1414-650
1402-625
1402-626
1408-690
1402-627
1402-627
1402-680
1402-628
1402-628
1402-572
1407-380
1407-640
1407-632
1408-210
1407-632
1615-140
1405-430
1405-470
1405-430
2809-275
2801-825
2801-145
2809-310
1402-550
1414-510
1414-410-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1412-125
1412-870
1412-125
2604-400
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 A 1 POLE
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 A 1 POLE
CIRCUIT BREAKER 10 A 1 POLE
CONTACTOR 18 AMP W/BUL 3023-257
AUXILARY CONTACT 3 N/O 1 N/C
AUX CONTACT 1 N/O 1 N/C FOR CONTACTOR
SWITCH, DISCONNECT 40 AMP
FUSEHOLDER
FUSE BLOCK 60 A SINGLE POLE TYPE J
HANDLE, YELLOW/RED
HANDLE, YELLOW/RED
SWITCH, DISCONNECT 60 AMP
SHAFT, 200MM
SHAFT, 200MM
SWITCH WORK DELIVERY
FUSE 30 A TYPE CC
FUSE 40 AMP TYPE JL 600 V
FUSE 30 AMP TYPE JLL 600 V
FUSE HOLDER DOUBLE
FUSE 30 AMP TYPE JLL 600 V
INVERTER 1 HP 230V M SERIES
MOTOR PROTECTOR 4-6.3 AMP
MOTOR PROTECTOR 9-14 AMP
MOTOR PROTECTOR 4-6.3 AMP
GEARMOTOR, 3/4HP 40.81:1 RATIO INLINE
MOTOR 1 HP 1/60/115/230 1730 RPM FR 143T
MOTOR 1/3 HP 1/60/115/230 3450RPM FR 56C
GEARMOTOR 1/3 HP 58 RPM OUTPUT R.H.
SPEED CONTROL POT 5K
KNOB FOR SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH 3 POS RED
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
TRANSFORMER CL-2 75VA 120/208/240V TO 24
TRANSFORMER 1KVA 240/480PRI 120/240 SEC
TRANSFORMER CL-2 75VA 120/208/240V TO 24
SPEED INDICATOR
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
SC-3
208/230V
3-Phase Motor Circuit
CHICAGO
DRYER COMPANY
6220575 - A
Drawn By:
GO20 & T20 GAS W/ BRASS BURNER TIPS
208/230V 3PHASE MOTOR CIRCUIT
CAD By:
MTB/JEM
MTB/JEM NC Code:
Approved By: MTB/JEM Scale: -
Txxx
n/a
Date: 02-15-04
ADD FOR TANDEM ONLY
RED- 208V
ORANGE- 230V
F10
24VAC TO FOLDER
F0 TERMINALS 10 & 0
154
YELLOW
BLACK
75VA
T1
BLUE
1
YELLOW 0
BLACK
75VA
H2-208V
H3-230V
90
X2
250VA
120VAC
NEUTRAL
CON2A
62
CON2A 22
61
53
54
20
M0
GND
FU4-30A-JJN
L1(R)
FU5-30A-JJN
1.0-1.6
2.5-4.0
1.0-1.6
21
RED
X1
M1
M3
T1(U)
1 HP
VFD007M21A
GND
BLACK
RED
+10V
POT1
AVI
WHITE
L3(T)
5KOHM
MPG 14
RB
RC
INV1
L2(S)
1
MTR1
T2(V)
BLACK
0.75HP
T3(W)
AFM
RED
CW
INHI
INLO
VM1
24VAC
+
CB2-2.0A
MPC
MPE
MPD
JOG
REV
BLACK
H1
S1
JOG
FOR
BROWN
H* T2
TANDEM &
REGULAR TYPE R
MAIN FUSE
10A
12A
230V NAMEPLATE
8.2A
9..7A
9.0A
10.8
208V NAMEPLATE
2.1HP
2.4HP
24VAC
WHITE
CB1-2.0A
RED- 208V
ORANGE- 230V
RED
FU3
FU2
CON2B
BLUE
153
DISC1
FU1
T3
7
0
SPEED INDICATOR
SPEED CONTROL
CON2
MPE
MPD
MTR2
1HP
EXHAUST
BLOWER
MTR4
0.33HP
DELIVERY
MTR3
0.33HP
COMBUSTION
BLOWER
DS1
2
1
2
4
3
4
3
1
5
6
5
6
FOR TYPE "R" MACHINES ONLY.
MPG
SC-4
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
MAIN
DRIVE
MOTOR
GO 20
3031-029b
208/230V 3-Phase Motor Circuit
(6220575)
Reference
Part No.
Description
CB1
CB2
CON2
CON2A
CON2B
DISC1
DISC1F
DISC1H
DISC1S
DS1
FU1
FU1R
FU2
FU2R
FU3
FU3R
FU4
FU4B
FU5
INV1
MPD
MPE
MPG
MTR1
MTR2
MTR3
MTR4
POT1
POT1A
S1
S1A
S1B
S1C
S1D
T1
T2
T3
VM1
1410-220
1410-120
1404-465
1414-710
1414-650
1402-625
1402-626
1402-627
1402-628
1402-572
1407-351
1407-362
1407-351
1407-362
1407-351
1407-362
1407-632
1408-210
1407-623
1615-140
1405-230
1405-405
1405-230
2809-275
2801-845
2801-250
2809-540
1402-550
1414-510
1414-410-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1412-125
1412-380
1412-125
2604-400
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 A 2 POLE
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 A 1 POLE
CONTACTOR 18 AMP W/BUL 3023-257
AUXILARY CONTACT 3 N/O 1 N/C
AUX CONTACT 1 N/O 1 N/C FOR CONTACTOR
SWITCH, DISCONNECT 40 AMP
FUSEHOLDER
HANDLE, YELLOW/RED
SHAFT, 200MM
SWITCH WORK DELIVERY
FUSE 10 A 600 V
FUSE 12 A TYPE CC
FUSE 10 A 600 V
FUSE 12 A TYPE CC
FUSE 10 A 600 V
FUSE 12 A TYPE CC
FUSE 30 AMP TYPE JLL 600 V
FUSE HOLDER DOUBLE
FUSE 20 AMP TYPE JLL 300 V
INVERTER 1 HP 230V M SERIES
MOTOR PROTECTOR 1-1.6 AMP
MOTOR PROTECTOR 2.5-4 AMP
MOTOR PROTECTOR 1-1.6 AMP
GEARMOTOR, 3/4HP 40.81:1 RATIO INLINE
MOTOR 1 HP 3/60/208-230/460 1730 RPM
MOTOR 1/3 HP 3/60/208-230/460 3450 RPM
GEARMOTOR 1/3HP 58RPM 3/208-230/460V RH^
SPEED CONTROL POT 5K
KNOB FOR SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH 3 POS RED
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
TRANSFORMER CL-2 75VA 120/208/240V TO 24
TRANSFORMER 250 VA 208/230/460 TO 120 V
TRANSFORMER CL-2 75VA 120/208/240V TO 24
SPEED INDICATOR
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
SC-5
208/230V
1-Phase Motor Circuit
CHICAGO
DRYER COMPANY
6220576 - A
Drawn By:
208/230V 1 PHASE MOTOR CIRCUIT
-
MTB/JEM
CAD By:
MTB/JEM NC Code:
Approved By: MTB/JEM Scale: -
Txxx
TANDEM &
REGULAR TYPE R
MAIN FUSE
15A
20A
NAMEPLATE 13.2A
16.2A
2.1HP
2.4HP
DISC1
24VAC TO FOLDER
CONTROL
TERMINALS 10 & 0
F0
YELLOW
75VA
T1
75VA
BLUE
X2
1
24VAC
S1
YELLOW 0
H2 FOR 208V
H3 FOR 230V
CB2-2.0A
T2
H*
X1
H1
F10
154
90
120VAC
21
62
61
CON2A 22
CON2A
250VA
53
20
FU4-30A-JJN
54
M0
GND
L1(R)
M1
M3
INV1
T2(V)
AVI
GND
T3(W)
BLACK
L3(T)
RED
+10V
POT1 5KOHM
AFM
BLACK
RED
CW
INHI
INLO
MTR1
0.75HP
VM1
7
0
SPEED INDICATOR
SPEED CONTROL
CON2
MPG 14
T1(U)
1 HP
VFD007S21A
L2(S)
1
RB
RC
WHITE
FU5-30A-JJN
2.5-4 AMP
6-10 AMP
2.5-4 AMP
JOG
REV
JOG
FOR
NEUTRAL
MPC
MPE
MPD
RED
BLACK
153
BLACK
RED-208V
ORANGE-230V
CON2B
BLUE
WHITE
CB1-2.0A
T3
RED
RED-208V
ORANGE-230V
BLACK
BROWN
FU2
ADDED FOR TANDEM ONLY
FU2R
FU1R
FU1
-
n/a
Date: 02-15-04
24VAC
+
GO20 & TGO20 GAS w/BRASS BURNER TIPS
MPE
MPD
MTR2
1HP
EXHAUST
BLOWER
MTR4
0.33HP
DELIVERY
MTR3
0.33HP
COMBUSTION
BLOWER
DS1
2
1
2
4
3
4
3
1
5
6
5
6
FOR TYPE "R" MACHINES ONLY. (NOT ON TANDEM)
MPG
SC-6
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
MAIN
DRIVE
MOTOR
GO 20
3031-029b
208/230V 1-Phase Motor Circuit
(6220576)
Reference
Part No.
Description
CB1
CB2
CON2
CON2A
CON2B
DISC1
DISC1F
DISC1H
DISC1S
DS1
FU1
FU1R
FU2
FU2R
FU4
FU4B
FU5
INV1
MPD
MPE
MPG
MTR1
MTR2
MTR3
MTR4
POT1
POT1A
S1
S1A
S1B
S1C
S1D
T1
T2
T3
VM1
1410-220
1410-120
1404-465
1414-710
1414-650
1402-625
1402-626
1402-627
1402-628
1402-572
1407-352
1407-370
1407-352
1407-370
1407-632
1408-210
1407-632
1615-140
1405-405
1405-455
1405-405
2809-275
2801-825
2801-145
2809-310
1402-550
1414-510
1414-410-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1412-125
1412-380
1412-125
2604-400
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 A 2 POLE
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 A 1 POLE
CONTACTOR 18 AMP W/BUL 3023-257
AUXILARY CONTACT 3 N/O 1 N/C
AUX CONTACT 1 N/O 1 N/C FOR CONTACTOR
SWITCH, DISCONNECT 40 AMP
FUSEHOLDER
HANDLE, YELLOW/RED
SHAFT, 200MM
SWITCH WORK DELIVERY
FUSE 15 A 600 V
FUSE 20 A TYPE CC
FUSE 15 A 600 V
FUSE 20 A TYPE CC
FUSE 30 AMP TYPE JLL 600 V
FUSE HOLDER DOUBLE
FUSE 30 AMP TYPE JLL 600 V
INVERTER 1 HP 230V M SERIES
MOTOR PROTECTOR 2.5-4 AMP
MOTOR PROTECTOR 6-10 AMP
MOTOR PROTECTOR 2.5-4 AMP
GEARMOTOR, 3/4HP 40.81:1 RATIO INLINE
MOTOR 1 HP 1/60/115/230 1730 RPM FR 143T
MOTOR 1/3 HP 1/60/115/230 3450RPM FR 56C
GEARMOTOR 1/3 HP 58 RPM OUTPUT R.H.
SPEED CONTROL POT 5K
KNOB FOR SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH 3 POS RED
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
TRANSFORMER CL-2 75VA 120/208/240V TO 24
TRANSFORMER 250 VA 208/230/460 TO 120 V
TRANSFORMER CL-2 75VA 120/208/240V TO 24
SPEED INDICATOR
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
SC-7
3-Phase Motor Circuit
CHICAGO460V
DRYER COMPANY
6220577 - A
Drawn By:
GO20 & TG0 GAS w/BRASS BURNER TIPS
460V 3 PHASE MOTOR CIRCUIT
FU2
FU1
n/a
Date: 02-15-04
ADD FOR TANDEM ONLY
24VAC TO FOLDER CONTROL TERMINALS 10 & 0
T1
BLACK
BLUE CON2B F10
24VAC
153 154
120VAC
CB2-5.0A
H1
T2
CB1-2.0A
X2
H3
X3
H4
X4
T1
WHITE
NEUTRAL
S1
1
24VAC
YELLOW 0
75VA
MPC
MPE
MPD
54
RED
53
20
M0
GND
L1(R)
M1
M3
INV1
GND
BLACK
RED
+10V
POT1
AVI
WHITE
L3(T)
5KOHM
MPG 14
RB
RC
T1(U)
1 HP
VFD007M21A
L2(S)
1
MTR1
T2(V)
BLACK
0.75HP
T3(W)
AFM
RED
CW
INHI
INLO
VM1
24VAC
+
CON2A 22
0.63-1
1.0-1.6
0.63-1
BLACK
61
WHITE
62
RED
FU5-30A-JJN
FU4-30A-JJN
21
CON2A
REGULAR TYPE R
5A
10A
4.1A
4.9A
2.1HP
2.4HP
MAIN FUSE
NAMEPLATE
BROWN
ACME
#T-2-53010-S
1 KVA
BLUE
JOG
REV
JOG
FOR
F0
75VA
BLACK
X1
H2
YELLOW
WHITE
90
FU3
FU3R
FU2R
MTB/JEM NC Code:
Approved By: MTB/JEM Scale: -
Txxx
DISC1
FU1R
CAD By:
MTB/JEM
7
0
SPEED INDICATOR
SPEED CONTROL
CON2
MPE
MPD
MTR2
1HP
EXHAUST
BLOWER
MTR4
0.33HP
DELIVERY
MTR3
0.33HP
COMBUSTION
BLOWER
DS1
2
1
2
4
3
4
3
1
5
6
5
6
FOR TYPE "R" MACHINES ONLY.
MPG
SC-8
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
MAIN
DRIVE
MOTOR
GO 20
3031-029b
460V 3-Phase Motor Circuit (6220577)
Reference
Part No.
Description
CB1
CB2
CON2
CON2A
CON2B
DISC1
DISC1F
DISC1H
DISC1S
DS1
FU1
FU1R
FU2
FU2R
FU3
FU3R
FU4
FU4B
FU5
INV1
MPD
MPE
MPG
MTR1
MTR2
MTR3
MTR4
POT1
POT1A
S1
S1A
S1B
S1C
S1D
T1
T2
T3
VM1
1410-120
1410-250
1404-465
1414-710
1414-650
1402-625
1402-626
1402-627
1402-628
1402-572
1407-350
1407-351
1407-350
1407-351
1407-350
1407-351
1407-632
1408-210
1407-632
1615-140
1405-205
1405-230
1405-205
2809-275
2801-845
2801-250
2809-540
1402-550
1414-510
1414-410-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1414-260-01
1412-130
1412-870
1412-130
2604-400
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 A 1 POLE
CIRCUIT BREAKER 5 A 2 POLE
CONTACTOR 18 AMP W/BUL 3023-257
AUXILARY CONTACT 3 N/O 1 N/C
AUX CONTACT 1 N/O 1 N/C FOR CONTACTOR
SWITCH, DISCONNECT 40 AMP
FUSEHOLDER
HANDLE, YELLOW/RED
SHAFT, 200MM
SWITCH WORK DELIVERY
FUSE 5 A CLASS CC
FUSE 10 A 600 V
FUSE 5 A CLASS CC
FUSE 10 A 600 V
FUSE 5 A CLASS CC
FUSE 10 A 600 V
FUSE 30 AMP TYPE JLL 600 V
FUSE HOLDER DOUBLE
FUSE 30 AMP TYPE JLL 600 V
INVERTER 1 HP 230V M SERIES
MOTOR PROTECTOR 0.63-1 AMP
MOTOR PROTECTOR 1-1.6 AMP
MOTOR PROTECTOR 0.63-1 AMP
GEARMOTOR, 3/4HP 40.81:1 RATIO INLINE
MOTOR 1 HP 3/60/208-230/460 1730 RPM
MOTOR 1/3 HP 3/60/208-230/460 3450 RPM
GEARMOTOR 1/3HP 58RPM 3/208-230/460V RH^
SPEED CONTROL POT 5K
KNOB FOR SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH 3 POS RED
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
TRANSFORMER CL-2 75VA 208/277/480V
TRANSFORMER 1KVA 240/480PRI 120/240 SEC
TRANSFORMER CL-2 75VA 208/277/480V
SPEED INDICATOR
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
SC-9
24VAC
SC-10
13 14
13
MPDA
13 14
MPEA
G
2
TOC
LT8
REAR
DOOR
LS1
FRONT
PB2
LS2
G
LT9
FRONT
PB3
LS3
BACK
COVER
LS4
SC-TOC
INDEX
1
2
3
4
4
-
1
2
4
RELAY
1612-050
3
5
1
2
PWR
+
S
4
CMI DETAIL
PX1
G LT10
CON2
4
3
14 13
CMI CONTACT CLOSES ON POWER UP
OPENS AFTER 5SEC IF NO ROTATION
DOOR
SPROCKET
SENSOR
REAR
LS5
CMI
1
5
A1
CON2
G
A2
START LAMP
0
Txxx
74
14
MPGA
E-STOP
START
PB5
INTERLOCK CIRCUIT
73
10
MTR1
FINGER
GUARD
RIGHT INTERLOCKS
E-STOP
FINGER
GUARD
PB4
GO 13/16/20 GAS
CON2A
1
RB RC
INV1A
E-STOP
PB1
LEFT INTERLOCKS
COMMON
Interlock Circuit
CHICAGO DRYER COMPANY
6230357 - A
Drawn By:
MTB/JEM
CAD By:
Approved By:
xxx
Scale: -
MTB/JEM NC Code:
n/a
Date: 12/19/02
GO 20
3031-029b
Interlock Circuit (6230357)
Reference
Part No.
Description
CMI
LS1
LS2
LS3
LS4
LS5
LT10
LT8
LT9
MPDA
MPEA
MPGA
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB5B
PX1
1612-052
1413-500
1413-479
1413-479
1413-477
1413-500
1416-555
1416-555
1416-555
1414-680
1414-680
1414-680
1411-560-01
1411-560-01
1411-560-01
1411-560-01
1414-140-01
1414-260-01
1608-002
CYLINDER MOTION INTERLOCK BOARD
SWITCH INTERLOCK
SWITCH
SWITCH
SWITCH
SWITCH INTERLOCK
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
AUX CONTACT FOR MOTOR PROTECTOR
AUX CONTACT FOR MOTOR PROTECTOR
AUX CONTACT FOR MOTOR PROTECTOR
SWITCH STOP 22 MM W/1 N/C CONTACT BLOCK
SWITCH STOP 22 MM W/1 N/C CONTACT BLOCK
SWITCH STOP 22 MM W/1 N/C CONTACT BLOCK
SWITCH STOP 22 MM W/1 N/C CONTACT BLOCK
START BUTTON GREEN ILLUMW/O CONTACT BLK
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
MACHINE SPEED SENSOR-SHORT 12MM
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
SC-11
Gas Ignition Circuit
SC-12
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
GO 20
3031-029b
Gas Ignition Circuit (6240025)
Reference
Part No.
Description
CR1
CR1B
CR2
CR2B
CR3
CR3B
CR4
CR4B
CR5
CR5B
FC1A
FC1B
FC1C
FC1D
FS1
GV1
GV2
GV3
HLT1
ITC1
ITC1F
ITC1W
ITC2
ITC3F
ITC3W
LT11
LT12
LT2
LT3
LT4
LT5
LT6
LT7
PB7
PS1
S3
S3A
SP1
SP1A
SP1B
SP1C
SP1D
T6
TSTAT
UV1
1401-509
1401-506
1401-508
1401-506
1401-508
1401-506
1401-508
1401-503
1401-508
1401-506
2212-750
2212-760
2212-770
2212-805
2217-641
2206-180
2206-429
2206-429
4206-520
4203-000
4208-255
4204-490
4203-000
4208-255
4204-490
1416-555
1416-555
1416-555
1416-550
1416-550
1416-555
1416-555
1416-560
1411-800
2218-625
1414-365-01
1414-260-01
2211-450
2213-464
2213-463
2213-001
2213-002
2213-601
4202-310
2212-825
RELAY 24 VAC 1 POLE
SOCKET FOR 1 POLE RELAY
RELAY 120 VAC 1 POLE
SOCKET FOR 1 POLE RELAY
RELAY 120 VAC 1 POLE
SOCKET FOR 1 POLE RELAY
RELAY 120 VAC 1 POLE
SOCKET FOR 2 POLE RELAY
RELAY 120 VAC 1 POLE
SOCKET FOR 1 POLE RELAY
MICROPROCESSOR M3 CHASSIS W/DISP PORT
MICROPROCESSOR M3 PROGRAMMER
UV AMPLIFIER W/4 SECOND PTFI
BASE M-SERIES
SAIL SWITCH
VALVE 1/4”CC ,24VAC
MAGNETIC VALVE 1” NPT 120 VAC
MAGNETIC VALVE 1” NPT 120 VAC
HI LIMIT TYPE K
TOUCHLESS THERMOCOUPLE SCANNER ASSY
JACK 3 WIRE GRADE TYPE K
WIRE THERMOCOUPLE TYPE K
TOUCHLESS THERMOCOUPLE SCANNER ASSY
JACK 3 WIRE GRADE TYPE K
WIRE THERMOCOUPLE TYPE K
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT RED 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT RED 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT GREEN 24 VDC
INDICATOR LIGHT YELLOW 24 VDC
SWITCH PUSH BUTTON
PRESSURE SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH 2 POS RED ^
CONTACT BLOCK 1 N/O
SPARK PLUG I-101
HI TEMP IGNITION WIRE 14 GA
RUBBER INSULATOR
RAJA CONNECTOR
RAJA CONNECTOR
IGNITION TRANSFORMER 6000/120 V 60 HZ
TEMP CONTROL 1/16 DIN TYPE K
UV SCANNER W/3 FT LEADS
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
SC-13
Single Phase 115V Electrical Panel
INCOMING POWER
TERMINAL BOX
GO13 & GO16 GAS IRONERS
(INSIDE RIGHT REAR END-FRAME)
L1
N
SINGLE PHASE 115 VOLT
G
L16
L17
G
10
11
6
5
4
3
2
1
DISC1
2
5
FU4
+
1 (L1)
23
SC-14
3 (L2) 5 (L3)
24
13
1 (L1)
14 23
3 (L2) 5 (L3)
24
13
14
1 (L1)
23
M3
M4
M2
S
T
M5
GND
M1
AVI
AFM
M0
+10V
0
0
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
21
+10
AVI
GND 20
AFM
M0 22
M1
M3
R
U
V
W
3 (L2) 5 (L3)
24
13
14
MPG
MPE
2 (T1) 4 (T2) 6 (T3)
2 (T1) 4 (T2) 6 (T3)
2 (T1) 4 (T2) 6 (T3)
90
N
G
G
MPD
TOC
SC-TOC
INDEX
5
4 T2 6 T3
1
RA
RB
RC
M01
MCM
5
FOR TGO16
2
A2
1
22 NC
8
84
4
INV1
1/2 HP
C
B
2
NO
74
14 NO
2 T1
18A
NC
NC
62
5
NO
DELTA-S1
NO
120
VAC
CON2
54
1
83
NC
120
VAC
73
NC
120
VAC
61
9
NO
14 13
A1
9
53
4
3 L2 5 L3
13 NO 21 NC
13
1 L1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
0
0
RES
RES
2
3
14
230V
JLLN30
12
FB1
120
VAC
9
T/C
115VAC
NEUT.
1
CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5
9
HLT1
HIGH LIMIT
RESET
COM.
N.O.
N.C.
14 13 14 13
T1 T2 T3
1
1
120V RELAY BOX
(INSIDE LEFT FRONT END-FRAME)
5
T1
5
3
DIN RAIL CENTER
1
4
5
L1 L2 L3
9
CMI
CB1 N1
24VAC
HONEYWELL JOHNSON
HV
120VAC BLK/WHT
WHT/BLK
208VAC BLK/RED
WHT/RED
240VAC BLK/ORG
WHT/YEL
480VAC BLK/BLK(RED)
LV
24VAC
BLUE/YEL
[isolate unused wires] BRN/ORG
1
14 13
CMI BOARD
1
1612-052
CR1
75VA
Single Phase or 3-Phase 208-230V
POWER
GO13,16 & GO20Electrical
GAS IRONERS
Panel INCOMING
TERMINAL BOX
(INSIDE RIGHT REAR END-FRAME)
230 OR 208 VOLT
SINGLE OR THREE PHASE
120V RELAY BOX
FU4
FU5
83
A2
23
24
13
14
23
0
GO2
FOR
4 T2 6 T3
13
&
14 13
9
24VAC
1
+10V
MCM
M1
INV1
1/2 HP
16
FOR TGO16
RA
RB
14
MPG
MPE
2 (T1) 4 (T2) 6 (T3)
2 (T1) 4 (T2) 6 (T3)
2 (T1) 4 (T2) 6 (T3)
90
N
G
G
MPD
TOC
W B1 B2
DELTA-S1
GO
3 (L2) 5 (L3)
24
V
U
GND
AFM
AVI
RC
INV1
2
M0
M1
84
C
B
2
RA
RB
NO
AVI
14
CR1
FOR TGO20
NO
AFM
13
5
INV1
1 HP
1
+10V
24
T
R
SC-TOC
INDEX
M5
GND
+
23
S
M4
M5
-
0
0
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
21
+10
AVI
GND 20
AFM
M0 22
M1
M3
A1
13
1 (L1)
1
22 NC
5
74
1
62
5
4
DELTA-M21A
18A
NC
4
NC
8
NO
1
NC
5
73
NC
120
VAC
61
120
VAC
NO
CON2
CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5
230V
FO
R
3 (L2) 5 (L3)
120
VAC
53
14 NO
1 (L1)
120
VAC
13 NO 21 NC
3 (L2) 5 (L3)
9
2
R
1 (L1)
14 13
FB1
3 L2 5 L3
1 L1
2 T1
9
T/C
X1
120 V
1
3
54
13
T2
X2
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
0
0
RES
RES
H4
250 VA
115VAC
NEUT.
14
H3 H2
H1
12
HLT1
HIGH LIMIT
RESET
N.O.
N.C.
9
COM.
14 13
T1 T2 T3
5
DISC1
4
1
2
1
(INSIDE LEFT FRONT END-FRAME)
9
T1
5
3
L2 L3
14 13
4
5
L1
CB1
M3
M4
CMI
3
M2
JOHNSON
HONEYWELL
HV
WHT/BLK
120VAC BLK/WHT
WHT/RED
208VAC BLK/RED
WHT/YEL
240VAC BLK/ORG
480VAC BLK/BLK(RED)
LV
24VAC
BLUE/YEL
[isolate unused wires] BRN/ORG
1
M2
M3
6
5
4
3
2
1
CMI BOARD
M1
1612-052
M0
75VA
L1
L2
L3
G
L16
L17
L18
G
10
11
S
T
U
V
RC
M01
MCM
W
SC-15
3-Phase 460V Electrical Panel
GO13, 16 & 20 GAS IRONERS
INCOMING POWER
TERMINAL BOX
(INSIDE RIGHT REAR END-FRAME)
THREE PHASE 460 VOLT
A2
FU5
FU4
0
GO2
FOR
23
24
13
MPG
MPE
2 (T1) 4 (T2) 6 (T3)
2 (T1) 4 (T2) 6 (T3)
2 (T1) 4 (T2) 6 (T3)
90
N
G
G
MPD
TOC
9
+10V
MCM
M1
M2
M3
RA
RB
14
SC-TOC
INDEX
M5
GND
14
M3
M4
13
FOR TGO16
1 (L1) 3 (L2) 5 (L3)
M2
24
INV1
1/2 HP
16
M1
14 23
&
+10V
13
W B1 B2
AFM
M0
+
SC-16
24
V
U
DELTA-S1
GO
13
23
RC
INV1
2
M0
M1
RA
RB
FOR TGO20
C
B
3
AVI
-
0
0
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
21
+10
AVI
GND 20
AFM
M0 22
M1
M3
INV1
1 HP
FO
R
1 (L1) 3 (L2) 5 (L3)
14 13
5
22 NC
1
NO
5
1
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
1 (L1) 3 (L2) 5 (L3)
T
DELTA-M21A
NO
84
1
14 NO
NC
74
5
NC
62
4
NO
S
83
18A
8
NC
1
73
NC
120
VAC
61
120
VAC
NO
CON2
120
VAC
53
9
A1
14 13
4
R
13 NO 21 NC
54
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
0
0
RES
RES
3 L2 5 L3
1 L1
9
3
13
230V
JLLN20
14
FB1 2
12
T/C
115VAC
NEUT.
1
120
VAC
9
HLT1
HIGH LIMIT
RESET
N.O.
N.C.
CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5
9
N1
COM.
14 13 14 13
T1 T2 T3
24VAC
DISC1
4
2
1
5
5
3
120V RELAY BOX
(INSIDE LEFT FRONT END-FRAME)
5
T1
4
CB2
L2 L3
DIN RAIL CENTER
1
5
L1
1
CMI
3
1
CR1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CMI BOARD
JOHNSON
HONEYWELL
HV
WHT/BLK
120VAC BLK/WHT
WHT/RED
208VAC BLK/RED
WHT/YEL
240VAC BLK/ORG
480VAC BLK/BLK(RED)
LV
24VAC
BLUE/YEL
[isolate unused wires] BRN/ORG
GND
AFM
AVI
1612-052
M4
M5
75VA
L1
L2
L3
G
L16
L17
L18
G
10
11
R
S
T
U
V
RC
M01
MCM
W
GO 20 - 60
Gas
07/09/09
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6500-406
App:GW
Production
Variable Speed Drive Output
Feet per Minute (m/min)
Minimum
Maximum
8
50
(2.5)
(15.0)
210,000
55-65% of max.
200-400
1
(95-200)
(DN 25)
Total
Drive , HP (kW)
Exhaust Blower 1 , HP (kW)
Combustion Blower
Delivery Drive
2 5/12
3/4
1
1/3
1/3
(1.81)
(0.56)
(0.75)
(0.25)
(0.25)
Electrical
Frequency : All Models 50 / 60 Hz
10.3
9.3
5.6
6.4
9.2
8.2
5.0
4.1
208
230
380
460
Heating
Gas
Maximum Gas Input per Hour , BTU*
Average Gas Input per Hour , BTU**
Operating Temperature Range , F ( C )
Gas Supply Connection , inch (DN)
Motors
Total Amps
Type R
Type F
Three Phase Voltage
Total Amps
Type R
Type F
Single Phase Voltage
32.0
26.0
115
16.0
13.0
230
Main
1450
10
(41)
(255)
Canopy
Air Discharge
CFM , (m3/min) max. at 1” S.P.
Vent Diameter , inches (mm)
Rolls
Number of Rolls
Roll Diameter , inch (mm)
Usable Length , inch (mm)
20
60
(711)
(1524)
Approximate Shipping Weight
Domestic , lb (kg)
Export , lb (kg)
Ironer
3190
3665
(1447)
(1662)
* Based on operation with natural gas at less than 1,500ft.(450m)altitude. BTU input will vary slightly on other types of
gas and will be reduced at higher altitudes.
** Depends on speed, temperature, moisture retention, demand, production, and other local factors.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
GO 20 - 100
Gas
07/08/09
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6500-408
App:GW
Production
Variable Speed Drive Output
Feet per Minute (m/min)
Minimum
Maximum
8
50
(2.5)
(15.0)
385,000
55-65% of max.
200-400
1
(95-200)
(DN 25)
Total
Drive , HP (kW)
Exhaust Blower 1 , HP (kW)
Combustion Blower
Delivery Drive
2 5/12
3/4
1
1/3
1/3
(1.81)
(0.56)
(0.75)
(0.25)
(0.25)
Electrical
Frequency : All Models 50 / 60 Hz
10.3
9.3
5.6
6.4
9.2
8.2
5.0
4.1
208
230
380
460
Heating
Gas
Maximum Gas Input per Hour , BTU*
Average Gas Input per Hour , BTU**
Operating Temperature Range , F ( C )
Gas Supply Connection , inch (DN)
Motors
Total Amps
Type R
Type F
Three Phase Voltage
Total Amps
Type R
Type F
Single Phase Voltage
32.0
26.0
115
16.0
13.0
230
Main
1450
10
(41)
(255)
Canopy
Air Discharge
CFM , (m3/min) max. at 1” S.P.
Vent Diameter , inches (mm)
Rolls
Number of Rolls
Roll Diameter , inch (mm)
Usable Length , inch (mm)
20
110
(711)
(2794)
Approximate Shipping Weight
Domestic , lb (kg)
Export , lb (kg)
Ironer
3840
4315
(1742)
(1957)
* Based on operation with natural gas at less than 1,500ft.(450m)altitude. BTU input will vary slightly on other types of
gas and will be reduced at higher altitudes.
** Depends on speed, temperature, moisture retention, demand, production, and other local factors.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
G0 20-120
Gas
07/08/09
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6500-360
App:GW
Production
Variable Speed Drive Output
Feet per Minute (m/min)
Minimum
Maximum
8
50
(2.5)
(15.0)
420,000
55-65% of max.
200-400
1
(95-200)
(DN 25)
Total
Drive , HP (kW)
Exhaust Blower 1 , HP (kW)
Combustion Blower
Delivery Drive
2 5/12
3/4
1
1/3
1/3
(1.81)
(0.56)
(0.75)
(0.25)
(0.25)
Electrical
Frequency : All Models 50 / 60 Hz
10.3
9.3
5.6
6.4
9.2
8.2
5.0
4.1
208
230
380
460
Heating
Gas
Maximum Gas Input per Hour , BTU*
Average Gas Input per Hour , BTU**
Operating Temperature Range , F ( C )
Gas Supply Connection , inch (DN)
Motors
Total Amps
Type R
Type F
Three Phase Voltage
Total Amps
Type R
Type F
Single Phase Voltage
32.0
26.0
115
16.0
13.0
230
Main
1450
10
(41)
(255)
Canopy
Air Discharge
CFM , (m3/min) max. at 1” S.P.
Vent Diameter , inches (mm)
Rolls
Number of Rolls
Roll Diameter , inch (mm)
Usable Length , inch (mm)
20
120
(711)
(3050)
Approximate Shipping Weight
Domestic , lb (kg)
Export , lb (kg)
Ironer
4050
4525
(1840)
(2050)
* Based on operation with natural gas at less than 1,500ft.(450m)altitude. BTU input will vary slightly on other types of
gas and will be reduced at higher altitudes.
** Depends on speed, temperature, moisture retention, demand, production, and other local factors.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
GO 20-136
Gas
07/08/09
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6500-361
App:GW
Production
Variable Speed Drive Output
Feet per Minute (m/min)
Minimum
Maximum
8
55
(2.5)
(17.0)
473,000
55-65% of max.
200-400
1
(95-200)
(DN 25)
Total
Drive , HP (kW)
Exhaust Blower 1 , HP (kW)
Combustion Blower
Delivery Drive
2 5/12
3/4
1
1/3
1/3
(1.81)
(0.56)
(0.75)
(0.25)
(0.25)
Electrical
Frequency : All Models 50 / 60 Hz
10.3
9.3
5.6
6.4
9.2
8.2
5.0
4.1
208
230
380
460
Heating
Gas
Maximum Gas Input per Hour , BTU*
Average Gas Input per Hour , BTU**
Operating Temperature Range , F ( C )
Gas Supply Connection , inch (DN)
Motors
Total Amps
Type R
Type F
Three Phase Voltage
Total Amps
Type R
Type F
Single Phase Voltage
32.0
26.0
115
16.0
13.0
230
Main
1450
10
(41)
(255)
Canopy
Air Discharge
CFM , (m3/min) max. at 1” S.P.
Vent Diameter , inches (mm)
Rolls
Number of Rolls
Roll Diameter , inch (mm)
Usable Length , inch (mm)
20
136
(711)
(3454)
Approximate Shipping Weight
Domestic , lb (kg)
Export , lb (kg)
Ironer
4250
4725
(1930)
(2143)
* Based on operation with natural gas at less than 1,500ft.(450m)altitude. BTU input will vary slightly on other types of
gas and will be reduced at higher altitudes.
** Depends on speed, temperature, moisture retention, demand, production, and other local factors.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
3045-001a
®
3045-102c
SC-102
JULY 17, 2009
®
FIREYE
FLAME SCANNERS
UV90
UV1A
UV non self-checking Scanner Models:
UV1A3, UV1A6, UV8A, UV2, UV2A6, UV2C,45UV2,
45UV3, UV90-3. UV90-6, UV90-9
UV1A
UV8A
For UV self-check Scanners refer to SC-101
For Infrared Photocell Scanners refer to SC-103
UV8A
APPROVED
45UV2
45UV2
45UV3
45UV3
DESCRIPTION
The UV1A3/6, UV2/UV2A6/UV2C, 45UV2, 45UV3, UV90-3/6/9 Scanners are used with the
M-Series, M-Series II, MicroM, FlameWorx, MB-2 and D-Series controls as well as the Fireye
FLAME-MONITORTM, BurnerLogix and Nexus System. The UV1A3/6 scanners come with 3 ft. and
6 ft. shielded flexible cables. The UV2 scanner comes with 36 inch (915mm) shielded flexible cable.
The UV2C comes with 36 inch (915mm) unshielded lead wires. The UV90-3/6/9 is available with 3
ft., 6 ft. and 9 ft. shielded flexible cables.
The UV8A Scanner is a 90° right angle ultraviolet flame scanner used in conjunction with the
M-Series, M-Series II, MicroM, FlameWorx, MB-2 and D series controls as well as the Fireye®
FLAME-MONITORTM, Burner Logix and the Nexus System. It is available only with 72 inch
(1830mm) unshielded lead wires.
The 45UV2 Scanner is a non self-checking scanner in a die cast aluminum housing with a 1 inch
NPT threaded mount.
The 45UV3 Scanner has a rugged cast housing that mounts on a 3/4 inch pipe with sleeve and setscrew. The replaceable UV tube is mounted in a vertical position for greater sensitivity. Non selfchecking.
The UV90 Series Scanners are designed for front and lateral (90°) mounting which, in some applications allow the scanners to obtain a clearer view of the flame. The UV90, with its exclusive snug-fit
mounting block, eliminates the need for a threaded sight pipe.
The UV tube is made of quartz and is filled with a gas that ionizes when struck by UV radiation from
the flame. In the absence of UV radiation, the gas acts as an insulator between two electrodes which
are mounted inside the tube. These electrodes are energized continuously by a high voltage. During
combustion, UV radiation ionizes the gas, causing current pulses to flow between the electrodes.
These current pulses result in a flame signal which is transmitted to the amplifier in the control,
where it is processed to energize or hold in the flame relay.
WARNING: When installing or replacing UV scanners, a minimum pilot turndown test on
pilot ignited burners and a spark pickup test on all burners must be performed. Refer to bulletins E-1101, C-4000, MC-5000 or BurnerLogix for recommended procedures.
1
®
APPLICATION
UV scanners are recommended for detecting flames from standard fuel gases, some waste gases and
light oil fuels such as No. 2 oil. Flames from heavier oils can be detected with UV scanners but the
unburned fuel shroud and/or atomization shroud can block passage of the UV from the flame zone to
the UV tube, causing nuisance burner/boiler trips. Infrared detection is recommended for fuel oil
heavier than No. 2, and some installations where waste gases are burned together with natural gas as
a main flame.
NOTE: Certain safety codes and regulations require the use of self-checking ultraviolet scanners.
For information on self-checking UV scanners, refer to Bulletin SC-101.
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage:
(S1-S2): 560 VAC @120V (230V) 50/60 Hz applied
Operating Temperature Limits: Maximum: 200° F (94° C)
Minimum: -40° F (-40° C)
Humidity:
85% RH maximum non-condensing
1
UV1A3:
UV1A6:
UV8A:
/2" NPT, 36" (915mm) shielded leads
/2" NPT, 72" (1830mm) shielded leads
1
/2" NPT, 72" (1830mm) unshielded leads,
90° right angle mount
3
UV2:
/8" NPT, 36" (915mm) shielded leads
3
UV2A6:
/8" NPT, 72" (1830mm) shielded leads
3
UV2C:
/8" NPT, 36" (915mm) unshielded leads
45UV2-1020
1" NPT mount 60 Hz, 72" (1830mm) unshielded leads
3
45UV3-1050
/4" Sleeve/setscrew mount, 72" (1830mm) unshielded
leads
UV90-3
36" (915mm) shielded leads
UV90-6
72" (1830mm) shielded leads
UV90-9
108 " (3660mm) shielded leads
For scanner dimensions refer to Figures 2 and 4.
Consult factory for custom lead lengths.
1
IMPORTANT NOTE
The information provided in this bulletin is directed to assist boiler and combustion service technicians who are experienced in the installation and operation of Fireye Flame Safety equipment. Persons not familiar with Fireye products should contact the nearest Fireye representative or other
qualified service group.
The UV1A, UV2, UV8A, 45UV2, 45UV3 and UV90 as well as all other Fireye scanners, are
designed to be used exclusively with the appropriate Fireye Flame safeguard and Burner Management controls. The application of these scanners to other than Fireye equipment should be reviewed
for approval by Fireye.
APPLICATION REFERENCE
UV1A, UV2, UV8A, 45UV2, 45UV3 and UV90 can be used only with the following FIREYE flame
safeguard controls.
2
FIREYE
FLAME-MONITOR
MB-2 SERIES
MicroM &
M-SERIES II
D SERIES
PFM
ADAPTOR KITS
FLAMEWORX
NEXUS
BURNERLOGIX
To be used with
EUV1 Amplifier
Card
Use with
61-3359
UV Amplifier
MAUV1
MAUV1T
MEUV1
MEUV4
All D-Series
using
72DUV1
Amplifier
PFM2UV
PFM3UV
MBUV-300D
MBUV-310D
NX3000
NX3100
NX4000
NX4100
YB110UV
YB230UV
®
CAUTION: The UV1A, UV2, UV8A, 45UV2, 45UV3 and UV90 ultra-violet flame scanners
and associated amplifier modules are non-self checking UV systems and should be applied
only to burners that cycle often (e.g.: a minimum of once per 12 hours) in order for the safety
checking circuit to be exercised. If component checking is required during burner operation
for constantly fired burners, utilize the self-checking ultra-violet flame scanners (45UV5)
with associated amplifier module (EUVS4), (MEUVS, (MBUVS) or YB110UVSC or the
infrared flame scanner (48PT2) with associated Auto Check amplifier (E1R1, E1R2, E1R3,
MEIR1, MEIR4, YB110IR).
FIGURE 1.
TYPICAL SCANNER MOUNTING
BURNER FRONT PLATE
1/2'' SWIVEL MOUNT
#60-302
1/2'' SWIVEL MOUNT
#60-302
UV1A
1/2'' NIPPLE
1/2'' NIPPLE
AIR ENTRY (PURGE
AND COOLING)
1/2'' NIPPLE
UV1A
2"
2"
STANDARD MOUNTING
STANDARD MOUNTING WITH
PURGING/COOLING AIR
1/2'' SIGHT PIPE
1/2'' SWIVEL MOUNT
#60-302
1/2'' NIPPLE
UNION COUPLING
#60-1257 WITH QUARTZ WINDOW
#60-1290 WITH QUARTZ LENS
1/2'' NIPPLE
UV1A
2"
ALTERNATE STANDARD MOUNTING
(NOT ADJUSTABLE)
1/2'' SWIVEL MOUNT
#60-302
MOUNTING FOR EXCESSIVE FURNACE
OR WINDBOX PRESSURE
HEAT INSULATOR
#35-69
UV1A
1/2'' NIPPLE
2"
MOUNTING WITH HEAT INSULATING NIPPLE
NOTE: UV1A AND UV8A SCANNERS MOUNT ON 1/2" NPT PIPE, UV2 AND UV2C SCANNERS MOUNT ON 3/8" NPT PIPE.
FIGURE 2.
SCANNER MOUNTING FOR UV90
1.406"
(35.7mm)
TIGHTEN SCREW TO SECURE
SCANNER IN MOUNTING BLOCK TO
A MINIMUM OF 6 IN/LB.TORQUE
POSITION SCANNER FOR
OPTIMUM VIEW OF FLAME
UV90
DRILL (2).1065 IN FOR
#6/32 SELF TAPPING
SCREWS
0.880"
(22.3mm)
1.48"
(37.6mm)
1.90"
(48.2mm)
0.875"
(37.6mm)
3.75"
(95.7mm)
0.5"
(12.7mm)
UV90 MOUNTING BLOCK
(INCLUDED WITH UV90)
3
®
ACCESSORIES
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
60-302
35-69
60-1257
60-1290
4-314-1
1/ " Swivel Union
2
Heat Insulator 1/2" NPT threads each end, (male x female).
1/ " NPT Union with quartz window
2
1
/2" NPT Union with quartz lens to increase sensitivity
Replacement UV tube for 45UV2, 45UV3
INSTALLATION OF UV1A, UV2, UV8A, 45UV2, 45UV3, UV90 SCANNERS
WARNING: THE LEADS FROM THE UV8A AND UV2C SCANNER TO THE
CONTROL MUST BE SHIELDED TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL NOISE FROM
GENERATING A FALSE FLAME SIGNAL TO THE CONTROL.
Where possible, obtain the Burner Manufacturer’s Instructions for mounting the scanner.
This information is available for most standard burners. The scanner mounting should comply with the following General Instructions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The quartz UV tube is brittle. Care must be exercised to avoid dropping or otherwise striking the
scanner with force. Keep the scanner protected until mounted.
Position the UV scanner within 36 inches of the flame to be monitored.
Select a scanner location that will remain within the ambient temperature limits of the UV
Scanner (200°F). If cooling is required, use an insulating coupling (Fireye P/N 35-69).
The UV Scanners are designed to seal off against pressures up to 1 PSI. To seal against higher
pressures, install a union coupling with quartz window (P/N 60-1257). Add cooling air to reduce
the scanner sight pipe temperature. (Not applicable to UV90).
Install the scanner on a standard 1/2 in. NPS (3/8 in. for UV2/UV2A6/UV2C, 1 in. NPT for
45UV2, 3/4 in. for 45UV3) pipe whose position is rigidly fixed. If the scanner mounting pipe
sights through the refractory, do not extend it more than halfway through. Swivel flanges are
available if desired (P/N 60-302). The sight pipe must permit an unobstructed view of the pilot
and/or main flame, and both pilot and main flames must completely cover the scanner field of
view. Oil and gas flames radiate more ultraviolet energy from the base of the flame than from
further out in the flame. This fact should be considered when installing the scanner sight pipe.
SCANNER MUST HAVE UNOBSTRUCTED
VIEW OF FLAME
NOT THIS
NOT THIS
6.
BUT THIS
FLAME MUST COMPLETELY COVER
SIGHT OPENING
NOT THIS
NOT THIS
BUT THIS
Since the radiated energy from an electric spark ignitor is very rich in the UV region, the field of
view should be aimed so that it does not see an electric spark ignitor nor any reflector that is
close to the spark.
CAUTION: The unprotected leads must be run in electrical conduit in order to eliminate
pickup of electrical noise which could present an unsafe condition.
7.
8.
4
To prevent spark pickup by the UV detector, close and/or disconnect all pilot and main fuel
valves. Operate the control through a burner startup cycle to determine that ignition spark cannot
be detected. Burner will not ignite if spark is detected.
Avoid running the scanner cables or conduit in close proximity to hot surfaces at the burner.
Avoid running the scanner conduit in close proximity to high energy ignition wires.
®
9.
Smoke or unburned combustion gases absorb ultraviolet radiation. On installations having negative pressure combustion chamber, a small hole drilled in the scanner sight pipe will assist in
keeping the pipe clean and free of smoke. For positive pressure furnaces, provide clean air to
pressurize the sight pipe, if necessary.
10. Two UV Scanners may be installed on one burner if it is necessary to view two areas to obtain
reliable detection of the flame. They should be wired in parallel.
11. To increase scanner sensitivity with the UV Scanners, a quartz lens permits location of the scanner at twice the normal distance. (Union w/quartz lens P/N 60-1290).
12. Request the assistance of any Fireye Field Office for recommendations of a proper scanner
installation on a non-standard application.
CAUTION: Ultra-violet tubes can simulate flame when exposed to high levels of “X” and
GAMMA radiation. The table below indicates the maximum dose of radiation that a UV tube
can be exposed to safely.
SOURCE
MAXIMUM DOSE
Cobalt 60 (CO60)
7.5mR/Hr
Iridium 192 (IR192)
1.0mR/Hr
X-Ray
4mR/Hr
150kV @ 0.2mA
X-Ray
1mR/Hr
150kV @ 5mA
Minimum Pilot Test
This test assures that the flame detector will not detect a pilot flame too small to reliably light
off the main flame. The test should be made on every new installation and following any repositioning of the flame detector. THE MINIMUM PILOT TESTS MUST BE ACCOMPLISHED BY A TRAINED AND QUALIFIDED BURNER TECHNICIAN.
FIGURE 3.
REFRACTORY
PILOT
FLAME
REFRACTORY
MAIN
FLAME
PILOT
FLAME
MAIN
BURNER
PILOT
BURNER
REFRACTORY
MAIN
FLAME
MAIN
BURNER
PILOT
BURNER
SCANNER
MAIN
BURNER
PILOT
BURNER
SCANNER
INSUFFICIENT PILOT
MAIN
FLAME
PILOT
FLAME
MINIMUM PILOT
SCANNER
NORMAL PILOT
SPARK REJECTION TEST. CAUTION: The scanner must not sight the ignition spark
directly or any part of the burner that can reflect the spark back to the scanner. the scanner
must not see a a pilot flame that is too small to reliably ignite the main flame. Test procedures
vary according to the control used. See procedures as described in the technical bulletin for
the control being installed.
5
®
WIRING - UV SCANNERS
To connect the scanner to the control, the UV1, UV2 and UV90 Scanners are supplied with up to 96"
of flexible cable. Consult factory for custom lead lengths.
The 45UV2 and 45UV3 are supplied with 72 in. (1830mm) lead wires. Install them in a suitable
length of flexible armor cable and connect it to the control. A conduit connector is supplied with the
scanner. Connect black wires (UV tube) of the 45UV2 to terminals 14 & 15 of the appropriate PSeries and for the 45UV3, to terminals S1 & S2.
If it is necessary to extend the scanner wiring, the following instructions apply:
Scanner wires should be installed in a separate conduit. The wires from several scanners may be
installed in a common conduit.
The voltage applied to UV scanners is nominally 560 VAC with no flame present.
Selection of Wire
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use #14, 16, or 18 wire with 75° C, 600 volt insulation for up to 100 foot distances (signal loss
approximately 20% at 100 feet).
For extended scanner wiring up to 500 feet, or for shorter lengths to reduce signal loss, use a
shielded wire (Belden 8254, RG-62/U coaxial cable, or equal) for each scanner wire. The ends
of the shielding must be taped and not grounded.
Asbestos insulated wire should be avoided.
Multiconductor cable is not recommended.
High voltage ignition wiring should not be installed in the same conduit with flame detector
wires.
CAUTION: Keep scanner leads well clear of ignition high voltage wiring or any other high
voltage or high current wiring in order to prevent false signal pickup in the scanner leads.
WARNING: Protective filtered lenses should be worn when viewing flame. Infrared and
ultraviolet energy can be damaging to the eyes.
MAINTENANCE
Ultraviolet Scanners
The viewing area of the scanner must be kept clean. Even a small amount of contamination on the
lens will reduce the flame signal reaching the detector by a measurable amount. Wipe the viewing
area routinely using a soft cloth dampened with concentrated detergent, then wipe dry.
Flame Signal Strength
Routine observation of the flame signal strength will forewarn any deterioration in the capability of
the flame detector or its application.
Periodic Safety Check
It is recommended that a procedure be established to test the complete flame safeguard system at
least once a month,. This test should verify the proper operation of all limit switches and safety interlocks as well as flame failure protection and fuel safety shutoff valve tightness.
Rotation
It is recommended that control and scanner units purchased as spares be installed periodically to
ensure proper operation.
6
®
TROUBLESHOOTING NON SELF-CHECKING UV SCANNERS
ZERO OR LOW FLAME SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Zero volts at test jacks on control.
— Make sure scanner has good view of the first 1/3 of flame. Reposition scanner for best flame
signal. If no signal . . .
Check for approximately 560 VAC across S1-S2 on control, with no flame present, as follows:
— Use meter with 20k ohms/volt sensitivity.
— Deenergize control.
— Close and secure all fuel valves.
— Energize control and measure voltage across S1-S2.
If voltage across S1-S2 is acceptable . . .
— With control energized, remove scanner from burner and bring it to within a few inches of a
UV source such as a gas lighter or propane torch.
— Check for flame signal at control.
If no flame signal . . .
— Make sure scanner lens is clean and dry.
— Deenergize control and check continuity of leads between scanner and control.
— Replace scanner
— Replace amplifier or control.
If voltage across S1-S2 is low, check L1-L2 for proper line voltage. If line voltage is good:
— Deenergized control, remove scanner lead wires from terminals S1 and S2.
— Energize control and recheck for proper voltage across S1 and S2.
— If voltage across S1 and S2 is good, replace scanner or lead wires.
— If voltage across S1 and S2 is low, replace amplifier or control.
FALSE FLAME SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Control will not start burner.
— Check control wiring, all limits and interlocks.
— Verify flame signal at test jacks upon energizing control.
Flame signal appears at test jacks when no flame is in combustion chamber.
— Deenergize control to remove scanner leads from S1-S2.
— Close and secure all fuel valves.
— Energize control.
— Check for induced voltage pickup to amplifier.
Burner starts up with scanner removed from S1-S2.
— Deenergize control and connect scanner to S1-S2.
— Energize control.
— Check scanner for runaway condition. Look for a blue glow in the UV tube.
— If glow is present, replace scanner.
— If no glow is present, check to see that scanner leads are well clear of ignition or other noise
carrying lines.
Burner does not start up even with scanner removed from S1-S2.
— Check control wiring, all limits and interlocks.
— Replace control/amplifier.
7
®
FIGURE 4.
UV SCANNER OUTLINE DIMENSIONS
UV8A
UV1A3/6
1/2" NPT
2 1/4"
(57.2mm)
UV2/UV2C/UV2A6
2"
(50.8mm)
3/8" NPT
(9.5mm)
2"
(50.8mm)
1 1/2"
(38.1mm)
1" OD
(25.4mm)
0.70" Dia. fitting (17.8mm)
for water-tight conduit
UV1A3 - 36" (915mm) Flexible Cable
UV1A6 - 72" (1830mm)Flexible Cable
7/8"
(22.2mm)
UV2
36" (915mm) Flexible Cable
UV2C 36" (915mm) Lead Wire (shielding required)
Shielding of 72" (1830mm) leads is required
2” (51mm) CLEARANCE REQUIRED TO REMOVE
2 7/8"
(73mm)
HOLE FOR
3/4”
(19mm)
SIGHTING
PIPE
SCREW,
1/4" - 20 THD
UV NON SELF-CHECK
SCANNER
TYPE 45UV5/45UV2
MODEL 1020
72” LEAD
1830mm)
UV SCANNER
TYPE 45UV3
MODEL 1050
2"
(50.8mm)
4" (102mm)
1 11/
16"
HEX
(43mm
2"
(51mm)
3 1/4"
(82mm)
1 5/8"
(41mm)
8 1/4"
(210mm)
3/8" - 18 NPT FOR
PURGE AIR CONNECTION
1" - 11 NPT
FOR SIGHT
TUBE
WARNING: The leads from the UV1A, UV8A, UV2C and UV90 Scanners to the control must
be shielded to prevent electrical noise from generating a false flame signal to the control.
NOTICE
When Fireye products are combined with equipment manufactured by others and/or integrated into
systems designed or manufactured by others, the Fireye warranty, as stated in its General Terms and
Conditions of Sale, pertains only to the Fireye products and not to any other equipment or to the
combined system or its overall performance.
WARRANTIES
FIREYE guarantees for one year from the date of installation or 18 months from date of manufacture
of its products to replace, or, at its option, to repair any product or part thereof (except lamps, electronic tubes and photocells) which is found defective in material or workmanship or which otherwise
fails to conform to the description of the product on the face of its sales order. THE FOREGOING
IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND FIREYE MAKES NO WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. Except as
specifically stated in these general terms and conditions of sale, remedies with respect to any product
or part number manufactured or sold by Fireye shall be limited exclusively to the right to replacement or repair as above provided. In no event shall Fireye be liable for consequential or special damages of any nature that may arise in connection with such product or part.
®
8
FIREYE
3 Manchester Road
Derry, New Hampshire 03038 USA
www.Fireye.com
SC-102
JULY 17, 2009
Supersedes December 2008
3045-105
Redesign of UV1A / UV2 Flame Scanners
)LUH\HKDVUHGHVLJQHGWKH89$DQG89IODPHVFDQQHUV7KHQHZGHVLJQUHSODFHVWKHIOH[LEOH
FRQGXLWZLWKDFDEOHWKDWLVUDWHGIRUTray Cable – Exposed Run (TC-ER)DQGFRPSOLHVZLWK
WKHFUXVKDQGLPSDFWUHTXLUHPHQWVRIWKH6WDQGDUGIRU0HWDO&ODG&DEOH8/
7KHIROORZLQJ8/VWDQGDUGVKDYHEHHQUHYLVHGDQGQRZDOORZWKHXVHRI7&(5UDWHGFDEOHRQ
&RPPHUFLDOERLOHUVDQGEXUQHUV
x 8/&RPPHUFLDO,QGXVWULDO*DV%XUQHUV±6HFWLRQVDQG
x 8/2LO%XUQHUV±6HFWLRQVDQG
x 8/2LOILUHG%RLOHU$VVHPEOLHV±6HFWLRQVDQG
x 8/&RPPHUFLDO,QGXVWULDO*DV+HDWLQJ(TXLSPHQW±6HFWLRQ
Wiring Instructions:
:LUHWKHEODFNDQGUHGZLUHV $:* RQWKH89$89IODPHVFDQQHUWRWHUPLQDOV6DQG
6RQWKH)LUH\HIODPHVDIHJXDUGFRQWUROThere is no polarity associated with the wire
colors. Either wire (red or black) can be wired to either terminal (S1 or S2).
Shield and Drain Wire:
7KHVFDQQHUSURYLGHVDVKLHOGDQGGUDLQZLUHWKDWDUHLQWHUQDOO\ERQGHGWRWKHPHWDOWKUHDGHGò´
137FRXSOLQJQXW7KLVDOORZVDFRQGXLWFODPSWRSURYLGHDQHOHFWULFDOJURXQGDURXQGWKH
H[SRVHGVKLHOGZKHQHQWHULQJDPHWDOMXQFWLRQER[RUFRQWUROFDELQHWRUFRQQHFWWKHGUDLQZLUH
WRDVXLWDEOHJURXQGFRQQHFWLRQZKHQXVLQJDQRQPHWDOLF RUPHWDOOLF MXQFWLRQER[RUFRQWURO
FDELQHW
Installation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting:
7KHUHGHVLJQHGVFDQQHUXVHVWKHVDPH89WXEHDVWKHRULJLQDOGHVLJQDQGLVVXLWDEOHDVDGLUHFW
UHSODFHPHQWIRUWKHRULJLQDOGHVLJQ)ROORZDOOLQVWDOODWLRQH[WHQGHGZLULQJPDLQWHQDQFHDQG
WURXEOHVKRRWLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVGHWDLOHGLQ%XOOHWLQ6&
UV2 flame scanner:
7KH89YHUVLRQRIWKHIODPHVFDQQHULVILWWHGZLWKD´137)HPDOHWRò´1370DOHDGDSWHU
ILWWHGRQWRWKHò´WKUHDGHGFRXSOLQJ
Several points concerning the new design:
x
x
x
x
x
x
7KHVFDQQHUSDUWQXPEHUVDUHQRWEHLQJFKDQJHG
7KHVFDQQHUERG\LVPROGHGSODVWLF 9DOR[ LPEHGGHGZLWKWKH)LUH\HORJRRYHUDPHWDO
FDVLQJ
7HPSHUDWXUHUDWLQJRIWKHVFDQQHULV) & &WR) & 7KHVFDQQHULVUDWHGIRU1(0$;
$ODEHOZLWKWKHVFDQQHUSDUWQXPEHUFDEOHOHQJWK$JHQF\$SSURYDOV 8/FDQG)0 DQGGDWHFRGHLVDIIL[HGWRWKHVFDQQHUFDEOH
7KHVFDQQHULVDYDLODEOHLQOHQJWKVRIIW P IW P IW P DQGIW P 133-737 REV. 1
Conduit required:
2QWKRVHDSSOLFDWLRQVZKHUHFRQGXLWLVUHTXLUHG)LUH\HUHFRPPHQGVWKH7KRPDVDQG%HWWV
7% RUVXLWDEOH ILWWLQJZKLFKLVXVHGWRFRXSOHIOH[LEOHPHWDOFRQGXLWWR(07FRQGXLW
7KHVHWVFUHZRQWKHILWWLQJELWHVLQWRWKHSODVWLFRQWKH89$89VFDQQHUDQGVHDWVRQWRWKH
PHWDOFDVLQJEHORZSURYLGLQJDVHFXUHFRQQHFWLRQ
Dimensions:
133-737 REV. 1
®
3045-500c
MC-5000
OCTOBER 14, 2009
FIREYE
MODULAR
MicroM
FLAME SAFEGUARD CONTROLS
APPROVED
WARNING: Selection of this control for a particular application should be made by a competent professional, licensed by a state or other government agency. Inappropriate application
of this product could result in an unsafe condition hazardous to life and property.
DESCRIPTION
The Fireye MicroM Series Flame Safeguard Control is a compact, microprocessor based, modular
burner management system designed to provide automatic ignition and continuous flame monitoring
for commercial sizes of heating and process equipment firing any type of fuel.
The MicroM is designed to be backward compatible with existing TFM, UVM and M-Series II controls. The MicroM MEC120 and MEC230 chassis with the appropriate MEP100, MEP200 and
MEP500 series programmers provide operation similar to its predecessors and is usually directly
interchangeable. The MEC320 and MEC480 chassis with the appropriate MEP300, MEP400 and
MEP600 series programmers provide additional enhancements such as early spark termination, pilot
proving, and interrupted pilot.
The advantages of the MicroM are zero dependence on discrete components previously used for timing functions. The MicroM, through the use of micro-controller technology, incorporates smart diagnostic LED's, smart reset function for multi-burner applications, optional alpha-numeric display
output (ED510), and serial communications via a Modbus or E500 Communication Interface. The
MicroM system also provides additional amplifier selections. Along with the standard UV and
Flame Rod amplifiers are UV self-check, Infrared, Cadmium Sulfide and a dry contact amplifier for
use with the Fireye Phoenix scanner. All amplifiers are available with flame failure response times of
0.8 seconds or 3 seconds nominal (4 second maximum) and each provide a set of test jacks with a
uniform range of 0-10 VDC for the measurement of flame signal intensity.
A complete MicroM system includes the appropriate flame detector, plug-in amplifier and programmer modules which connect into a standard chassis and wiring base. Interchangeable programmer
and amplifier modules allow for complete versatility in selection of control function, timing and
flame scanning means. Functions such as relight, recycle, non-recycle, two stage capability, nonrecycle air flow, proof of air flow open at start, purge timing, early spark termination, pilot proving
and pilot cutoff are determined by the appropriate programmer module. Type of flame scanner (UV,
Repetitive UV Self-Check, Flame Rod, IR or Cadmium Sulfide or dry contact) and the flame failure
response time (FFRT) are determined by the amplifier module. Optional plug-in daughter boards
provide additional features such as remote reset, alpha-numeric display and serial communications.
The MicroM programmers are micro-controller based modules that control the sequence of operation and also interface with plug-in amplifiers, meter boards, display drivers and external communication devices. The programmers are available in an assortment of configurations necessary to
resolve the application requirement. Current families of programmers for use with the MEC120 and
1
®
MEC230 type chassis include the MEP100, MEP 200 and MEP500 series. Programmers for use with
the MEC320 and MEC480 type chassis include the MEP300, MEP400 and MEP600 series.
Some programmer modules are equipped with a series of dipswitches to select Purge Timing, Pilot
Trial for Ignition (PTFI) timing, Proof of Air flow open at start, Post Purge, Recycle and Non-Recycle operation. LED indicators on the programmer modules indicate the current operating status of the
control and during a lockout condition displays the fault as a coded sequence, simplifying the troubleshooting of a shutdown.
In the event of pilot ignition failure, or following a safety shutdown, the control locks out, activating
an alarm circuit and displays the cause of lockout on the integrated LED’s and on the optional ED510
display. Unless otherwise specified, manual reset is required. Remote reset is available on the
MEC120R, MEC120RC, MEC320RD, MEC230RC, MEC320R, MEC320RC and MEC320RD
chassis. A detailed description of the various programmer, amplifier and chassis modules is found
later in this document. A “run-check” switch, provided to assist in testing size, position and stabilization of the pilot, is provided on some specific models and all MEP500 and MEP600 series programmers.
Modular MicroM controls incorporate a safety checking circuit that is operative on each start. If
flame (real or simulated) is detected prior to a start or during purge, the fuel valves will not be energized and the unit will lock out.
The modular MicroM controls use the same wiring base as the Fireye UVM, TFM and M- Series II
controls and are designed to be interchangeable with most models with little or no rewiring. See
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL, SCANNERS AND FLAME DETECTORS (page 8 and 47) for
temperature and wiring requirements.
?
NOTE: The individual MicroM modules, i.e. MEC chassis, MEP programmers and amplifiers are
not interchangeable with M-Series II modules, i.e. MC chassis, MP programmers and amplifiers.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply:
120 VAC (min. 102, max. 132) 50/60 Hz. (MEC1XX, MEC3XX)
230 VAC (min. 196, max. 253) 50/60 Hz. (MEC2XX, MEC4XX)
Power Consumption:12 VA (Operating)
Shipping Weight (Approx): 3 lbs (1.4 kg)
Operating Temperature:-40°F (-40°C) to 140°F (60°C)
Table 1:
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE LIMITS
MAXIMUM
2
MINIMUM
Control
140°F
60°C
- 40°F
- 40°C
Scanner UV1A, UV2, UV8A,
45UV3, UV90
200°F
93°C
- 40°F
- 40°C
45UV5-1007, 45UV5-1009;
55UV5-1007, -1009
200°F
93°C
- 40°F
- 40°C
Photocell 45CM1 (OBSOLETE)
165°F
74°C
- 40°F
- 40°C
Flame Rod
(Tip 2460 F)
1500°F
816°C
- 40°F
- 40°C
48PT2
140°F
60°C
-40°F
-40°C
CSIA5
140°F
60°C
-40°F
-40°C
®
Table 2:
LOAD RATINGS: All Ratings are 120V, 60 Hz
Fireye Terminal
Typical Load
Maximum Rating @120V 60 Hz
3 or 4
Individual or combined
Pilot valve(s)
Solenoid valve
Ignition Transformer
125 VA pilot duty (solenoid valve) plus
250 VA (Transformer)
5
Main Fuel Valve(s)
125 VA pilot duty (solenoid) or
25 VA pilot duty (solenoid) and
400 VA (opening) motorized, 250 VA hold
8
Motor or contactor
Terminal 8 rated to energize and de-energize 9.8 FLA,
58.8 LRA on safety lockout.
A
Alarm
125 VA, pilot duty
Minimum load requirement = 100mA
Table 3:
Table 4:
ALTERNATIVE LOAD RATINGS:
COMBINATION NUMBER
PILOT FUEL TERMINAL
3
IGNITION TERMINAL 4
MAIN VALVE TERMINAL
5
1
C
NO LOAD
E
2
B
NO LOAD
E
3
NO LOAD
NO LOAD
E
4
E
A
E
5
NO LOAD
A
E
6
D
A
E
7
D
A
D
8
NO LOAD
A
D
COMPOSITION OF EACH COMBINATION
A
B
C
D
E
4.5A Ignition
50 VA Pilot Duty
plus 4.5A ignition
180 VA Ignition
plus motor values with: 600VA
inrush., 360 VA
open, 250 VA
hold
2A Pilot Duty
65 VA Pilot Duty
plus Motor valves
with: 3850 VA
in rush., 700 VA
open, 250 VA
hold
3
®
MOUNTING BASE
3/16” DIA. MOUNTING
HOLES (4)
S1
7
KNOCKOUTS (12)
FOR 1/2”
CONDUIT
S2
8
3
5 3/16”
2/N
5
4”
A
4
μΜ
6
1
3/16” MOUNTING
HOLES
(4)
1/2”
5 3/16”
5 5/16”
13/16” HEX
(20.6)
2 3/8”
(60.3)
4”
1/2”
(12.7)
3/8” PIPE THREAD
36” (1m APPROX.)
FLEXIBLE CABLE
UV2 UV SCANNER
1/2”-14 NPT
”L” LENGTH AS SPECIFIED: 12”, 18”, 24” (304.8, 457.2, 609.6)
2”
(50.8)
69ND1 FLAME ROD
1.406"
(35.7MM)
1” DIA
(25.4)
UV90 MOUNTING BLOCK
(Included with Scanner)
1.48"
(37.6MM)
1.90
(48.2MM)
36” FLEXIBLE CABLE (UV-1A-3)
72” FLEXIBLE CABLE (UV-1A-6)
0.875"
(37.6MM)
SCREW,
1/4”-20 THD
0.5"
(12.7MM)
3 3/16”:(81)
HOLE FOR
3/4”
SIGHTING
PIPE
WHEN ASSEMBLED
1” DIA.
(25.4)
2 1/4”
(57)
9/16” DIA.
(143)
1/2”-14
STRAIGHT PIPE THD
3 1/4”
(82)
2 1/2”
(63.5)
1 1/4”
DIA.
7/16” FLEXIBLE
(11) CONDUIT
HEAT INSULATOR
1/2”-14
TAPERED
PIPE THD
UV SCANNER
Type: 45UV3
Model: 1050
2”
(50.8)
1 5/8”
(41)
2” (51) CLEARANCE REQUIRED TO REMOVE
UV SELF-CHECK
SCANNER
TYPE 45UV5
MODEL 1009
48PT2-1000 SERIES INFRARED SCANNER
4” (102)
1 1/2”
(38)
1/2”-14 STRAIGHT
FEMALE PIPE THREAD
UV1A UV SCANNER
2 7/8”
(73)
3.75"
(95.7MM)
0.880"
(22.3MM)
UV90 SCANNER
3 1/8”
(79.4)
WHEN ASSEMBLED
1” DIA.
(25.4)
2 1/2”
(63.5)
1 1/4”
DIA.
9/16” DIA.
(143)
1/2”-14
STRAIGHT PIPE THD
7/16” DIA. (11) FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
45O
13/32” (10)
2 5/16”
(58.7)
2”
(51)
8 1/4”
(210)
72” LEAD
4” (102)
1 11/16”
HEX
(43)
HEAT INSULATOR
1/2”-14
TAPERED
PIPE THD
48PT2-9000 SERIES INFRARED SCANNER
All dimensions in inches (millimeters in parentheses).
4
13/16” DIA.
(206)
2”
(50.8)
”L”
1 3/16”
(30)
15/16” HEX
(23.8)
1/2”’
3/8”-18 NPT FOR
PURGE AIR CONNECTION
1”-11 1/2 NPT
FOR SIGHT
TUBE
®
WARNING: This equipment is a Class B digital apparatus which complies with the Radio
Interference Regulations, CRC c.1374.
CAUTION: Published load ratings assume that no control be required to handle inrush
current more often than once in 15 seconds. The use of control switches, solenoids, relays,
etc. which chatter will lead to premature failure. It is important to run through a test
operation (with fuel shut off) following the tripping of a circuit breaker, a blown fuse, or
any instance of chattering of any external current consuming devices.
APPROVALS
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
MCCZ File MP 1537
Controls, Primary Safety - Listed
MCCZ2 File MP1537
Controls, Primary Safety - Component
MCCZ7 File MP1537
Controls, Primary Safety Certified for Canada
MCCZ8 file MP1537
Controls, Primary Safety Certified for Canada - Component
Factory Mutual System (FM) Approved
UL approval does not apply to 230VAC operations.
WARNING: Selection of programmer and amplifier type for a particular application should
be made by a competent professional, such as a Boiler/Burner technician licensed by a state
or government agency, engineering personnel of the burner, boiler or furnace manufacturer
(OEM) or in the performance of duties based on the information from the OEM.
WARNING: This equipment generates and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to
radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart J of part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in
which case the user, at his own expense, will be equipped to take whatever measures that
may be required to correct the problem.
?
In order for the MicroM to gather and retain statistical and historic data such as burner
hours, burner cycles, system hours and average flame signal, it is necessary that Terminal 1
be powered at all times. Removing power from Terminal 1 at the end of the firing cycle
causes all data gathered during the previous 16 hours or last 9 cycles to be lost. For conversions or upgrades from older TFM or M-Series II controls that use MART1 amplifiers, it is
necessary that Terminal 1 be directly powered with 120 VAC.
5
®
ORDERING INFORMATION
MEC120
MEC120R
MEC120D
MEC120RD
MEC120C
MEC120RC
MEC230
MEC230RC
MEC320
MEC320R
MEC320D
MEC320RD
MEC320C
MEC320RC
MEC320TS
MEC480
MEC480RC
MEP100
MEP101
MEP102
MEP103
MEP104
MEP105
MEP106
MEP107
MEP108
MEP109
MEP100P
MEP130
MEP230
MEP230H
MEP235
MEP236
MEP237
MEP238
MEP290
MEP560
MEP561
MEP562
MEP564
MEP536
MEP537
MicroM Chassis Types (For use with MEP1XX, MEP2XX, and MEP5XX, includes dust cover)
120 VAC input with standard plug-in board.
120 VAC input with remote reset capability.
120 VAC input with alpha-numeric display interface to ED510.
120 VAC input with alpha-numeric display interface to ED510 and remote reset capability.
120 VAC input with interface to E500 Communication Interface and Modbus capability.
120 VAC input with remote reset capability, alpha-numeric display interface to ED510, interface to E500 Communication Interface and Modbus capability.
230 VAC input with standard plug-in board.
230 VAC input with remote reset capability, alpha-numeric display interface to ED510, and Modbus capability.
MicroM Chassis Types (For use with MEP3XX, MEP4XX, and MEP6XX, includes dust cover)
120 VAC input with standard plug-in board.
120 VAC input with remote reset capability.
120 VAC input with alpha-numeric display interface to ED510.
120 VAC input with alpha-numeric display interface to ED510 and remote reset capability.
120 VAC input with interface to E500 Communication Interface and Modbus capability.
120 VAC input with remote reset capability, alpha-numeric display interface to ED510, interface to E500 Communication Interface and Modbus capability.
120 VAC input with display interface to ED510, Modbus interface and auxiliary relay output with dry contact for controller interface (MED8).
230 VAC input with standard plug-in board.
230 VAC input with remote reset capability, alpha-numeric display interface to ED510, and Modbus capability.
MicroM Programmer Models (For use with MEC120 and MEC 230 Chassis)
Relight operation, 10 sec. PTFI.
Relight operation, allow flame signal until 60 seconds after interlock closed.
Non-recycle on flame fail, 5 second PTFI.
Fixed 10 second SISP*, 10 second MTFI, re-try once on igniter failure, fixed 30 second post purge.
Non-recycle on flame fail, 10 second PTFI.
Non-recycle on flame fail, lockout on air-flow open with flame present, 10 second PTFI.
Same as MEP100. 12 second pre-purge, added reset from lockout via line voltage.
Same as MEP100. Force 5 minute purge delay after main flame fail.
Same as MEP100 with 0 second purge, 15 second PTFI, non-recycle on flame fail. Not FM approved.
Immediate ignition and pilot, 10 second fixed PTFI, 10 second MTFI, intermittent pilot, non-recycle on flame fail.
Relight operation, 10 sec PTFI, fixed 15 second post purge.
Same as MEP100, 30 second PTFI. Not FM approved.
Selectable purge timing (7, 30, 60, 90 sec.) 10 sec PTFI timing, recycle/non-recycle, post purge, prove air open at start.
Same as MEP230 with 8 second pilot stabilization.
Same as MEP230 with lockout on air flow open 10 seconds after the start of a cycle, selectable recycle/nonrecycle lockout
on air flow open after flame is proven and dedicated lockout after loss of flame.
Same as MEP230 with additional 6 second igniter on time with main fuel. To be used with intermittent pilot only.
Same as MEP230 with fixed PTFI timing and check/run switch. Used with MEDC2 amplifier to provide operation with 85
Series (Phoenix) and 95 Series (InSight) scanners.
Same as MEP230. Ignition de-energized 3 seconds after pilot flame detected. Provides 8 second pilot stabilization period.
Same as MEP230 except selectable post purge is 0 or 90 seconds.
Same as MEP230H, 10 second main trial for ignition, run-check switch.
Same as MEP560 without 8 second pilot stabilization. Selectable purge time of 7s, 10s, 15s, 30s.
Same as MEP560, lockout on loss of air flow, non-recycle operation only.
Same as MEP560. Selectable purge time of 7s, 30s, 60s, 240s.
Same as MEP230, 10 second main trial for ignition, run-check switch, will not lockout on air flow open during purge.
Same as MEP536 except provides one recycle on main flame failure.
*Spark Igniter Sensing Period
6
®
MEP300
MEP304
MEP335
MEP397
MEP437
MEP696
MEP697
MEUV1
MEUV4
MEUVS1
MEUVS4
MERT1
MERT4
MEIR1
MEIR4
MECD1
MECD4
MEDC2
MicroM Programmer Models (For use with MEC320 and MEC 480 Chassis)
Relight operation, 10 sec. fixed PTFI, 5 sec.pilot proving period, 5 second MTFI. lockout on flame fail during PTFI, pilot
proving and MTFI. Recycle on air flow open. No post purge. Reset on line voltage.
Non-recycle on flame fail, 5 sec. purge, 10 sec.fixed PTFI, 5 sec. pilot proving, 10 sec.MTFI, interrupted pilot, early
spark termination.
Non-recycle on flame fail, 30 second purge, 35 second hot surface ignition on terminal 4, 3 second PTFI on terminal 3,
5 second pilot proving period, intermittent pilot, 15 second post purge. Manual reset only.
Recycle on main flame fail, 15 sec. purge, 7 second fixed PTFI, 5 sec. pilot proving 5 sec. MTFI, early spark termination
and interrupted pilot. Recycle on air flow failure. No post purge, run/check switch. Reset on line voltage.
Recycle once on main flame failure, selectable 5 or 10 sec. fixed PTFI, selectable interrupted or intermittent pilot, 5 sec.
MTFI, selectable purge time to 240 seconds, main valve proof of closure, 15 sec. post purge. Reset on line voltage.
Provides 30 sec. pre-purge, lockout on airflow after 10 sec., 10 sec. PTFI, 5 sec. pilot proving, early spark termination,
5 sec. MTFI, interrupted pilot, selectable recycle/non-recycle on flame fail, 60 sec. post purge, selectable baud rate for
communications, output for external controller operation.
Provides dip-switch selectable pre-purge, selectable air flow proving at startup, selectable post purge, selectable 5/10
sec. PTFI, 5 sec. pilot proving early spark termination, 5 sec. MTFI, interrupted pilot, selectable recycle/non recycle on
flame fail, output for external controller operation.
MicroM Amplifier Models:
UV amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses UV1A, UV2, UV8A, UV90 and 45UV3-1050 scanners.
UV amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses UV1A, UV2, UV8A, UV90 and 45UV3-1050 scanners.
UV Self-Check amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses 45UV5-1009 scanner.
UV Self-Check amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses 45UV5-1009 scanner.
Flame Rod amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses 69ND1.
Flame Rod amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses 69ND1.
Infrared amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses 48PT2 scanner.
Infrared amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses 48PT2 scanner.
Cadmium sulfide amplifier, 0.8 second FFRT, uses CS1A5 scanner.
Cadmium sulfide amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses CS1A5 scanner.
Contact input amplifier for use with MEP237 to provide operation with 85 Series (Phoenix) and 95 Series
(InSight) scanners
Optional Plug-In Board Modules:
MED1
Standard local reset switch.
MED2
Same as MED1 with display output.
MED3
Same as MED1 with remote reset.
MED4
Same as MED1 with display output and remote reset.
MED5
Same as MED1 with display output and RS485 communications.
MED6
Same as MED1 with display output, remote reset and RS485 communications.
MED7
Same as MED1 with RS485 communications.
MED8
Same as MED1 with display output, RS485 Modbus interface and auxiliary relay output
with normally closed dry contact for controller interface.
MED9
Same as MED1 with display output, RS485 Modbus interface and auxiliary relay output
with normally open dry contact for controller interface.
Wiring Base (Common for all Controls):
61-3060
Closed wiring base, surface mounting.
61-5042
Open wiring base, cabinet mounting.
7
®
Accessories
ED510
Two line by 16 character, back lit LCD display with keypad.
ED580-2, -4, -8
Remote display cable with RJ45 connection in 2, 4 or 8 foot long lengths. To be used with the appropriate daughter
board.
EC485
RS232 to RS485 converter with power supply and RJ12 jack.
UC485
USB to RS485 converter. Supplied with USB cable.
SMDK-1004
Serviceman’s display kit used for diagnosing MicroM system. Consists of ED510 equipped with back plate, MED
daughter board and ED580-4.
129-145-1, -2, -3
ED510 remote display mounting kit with 4’, 8’ or 2’ cable respectively. Provides NEMA 4 protection.
IT1000
Monitoring device using cellular networks. Provides various reporting methods
FLAME SCANNERS
CAUTION: The UV1A, UV2, UV8A, UV90 and 45UV3 ultra-violet flame scanners and associated amplifier modules are non self-checking UV systems and should be applied only to
burners that cycle often (e.g.: a minimum of once per 12 hours) in order for the safety checking circuit to be exercised. If component checking is required during burner operation for
constantly fired burners, utilize the self-checking ultra-violet flame scanners (45UV5) with
associated amplifier module (MEUVS1, MEUVS4) or the infrared flame scanner (48PT2)
with associated AutoCheck amplifier (MEIR1, MEIR4).
For a complete system, choose one of each of the following:
- Chassis
- Flame Detector
- Programmer Module
- Wiring Base
- Amplifier Module
8
®
WARNING: Installer must be trained and qualified. Follow the burner manufacturer’s
instructions, if supplied. Otherwise, proceed as follows:
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL, SCANNERS AND FLAME DETECTORS
Wiring Base
Mount the wiring base on the burner or on a panel. The location should be free from excessive vibration and within the specified ambient temperature rating. The base may be mounted in any angular
position.
All wiring should comply with applicable electrical codes, regulations and local ordinances. Use
moisture resistant wire suitable for at least 90 degrees C. Good electrical wiring practice should be
followed to ensure an adequate ground system. Refer to Fireye Service Note SN-100 separately and
General Grounding Rules later in this document for grounding methods.
A good ground system should be provided to minimize the effects of AC quality problems. A properly designed ground system meeting all the safety requirements will ensure that any AC voltage
quality problems, such as spikes, surges and impulses have a low impedance path to ground. A low
impedance path to ground is required to ensure that large currents involved with any surge voltages
will follow the desired path in preference to alternative paths, where extensive damage may occur to
equipment.
Circuit recommendations are found on pages 38 through 43. Consult the factory for assistance with
non-standard applications.
WARNING: Controls require safety limits utilizing isolated mechanical contacts.
Electronic limit switches may cause erratic operation and should be avoided.
Care must be taken to NOT route the high energy ignition wire in close proximity to the flame sensor wiring, particularly when using MERT amplifier.
9
®
INSTALLING THE PROGRAMMER AND AMPLIFIER MODULES
WARNING: Remove power from the control before proceeding.
FIGURE 1.
.
AMPLIFIER
PROGRAMMER
Select the appropriate programmer and amplifier modules for your application. Remove the dust
cover from the chassis. Insert the amplifier module into the slot in the corner of the chassis and gently push the module into position. Insert the programmer module into the slot at the right side of the
chassis and gently push the module into position.
NOTE: Refer to programmer dipswitch settings on page 11 for the proper setting of the dipswitches
for those programmers with this feature.
WARNING: Turn off the power when installing or removing the control.
Replaceable Fuse
The chassis modules are designed with a field replaceable fuse. The fuse is located on the printed circuit board below the transformer. In the event the fuse becomes OPEN, the Operating Control, PTFI,
and Flame LED’s will light. However, KL or KF (Wiring Arrangements section on pages 33 through
38) will not be energized and the control will lock out and indicate Lockout, Check Blown Fuse. The
fuse will blow as a result of an overload condition on Terminals 3, 4, or 5. To replace the fuse,
remove power from the system and using a small screwdriver or similar tool, install a Fireye replacement fuse (P/N 23-197) or equivalent 10 amp fuse (e.g. Wickman # 19373-071-K).
FOR MEC230, ORDER FIREYE REPLACEMENT FUSE P/N 23-198 OR EQUIVALENT 4 AMP
FUSE (E.G. WICKMAN # 19373-062-K).
WARNING: Disconnect power before servicing.
10
®
Function
Any MicroM chassis type with the appropriate plug-in board installed provides remote reset capabilities in the event of a lockout condition. A remote reset switch consists of a dry contact such as a
remote momentary push-button wired to the two (2) terminals located on the plug-in board as shown
in Figure 5. The reset switch will also force the MicroM to recycle if depressed and released during
the purge or run period.
A plug-in board (MED8) is pre-installed in the MEC320TS chassis to provide local reset, remote
alpha-numeric display, serial communications and normally closed relays.
FIGURE 5.
REMOTE RESET
RELAY CONTACTS
REMOTE DISPLAY
RJ45 JACK
(-)
(+)
REMOTE DISPLAY
RJ45 JACK
REMOTE RESET
B
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
B
A
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
A
(RS485)
(RS485)
MED8 - Normally Closed
MED9 - Normally Open
(used only with MEP696/MEP697)
CAUTION: Remote reset is recommended only on a control solely for proved ignition programming (pilot ignited burner) or a control for use only with applications in which
unburned fuel cannot accumulate and that is intended for installation in inaccessible locations such as open-flame, ceiling-suspended gas heaters. The remote reset location must be
within sight and sound of the fired equipment.
ADVANCED RESET FUNCTIONS
Multiple functions have been integrated into the reset push button located on the MicroM and provided by way of the remote reset terminals. Among these are reset/recycle, reset from lockout only,
recycle only and set unit address. The functions of the switch is determined by the length of time
the push button is depressed and released.
The MicroM allows the connection of the remote resets to be connected together, usually in a multiburner system where multiple MicroM’s are mounted in a common panel. The reset push button
located on the MicroM daughter board is in parallel with the remote reset terminals when provided
by the other MED daughter boards.
Normal Operation
If the push button is depressed and released for greater than 1/2 second but less than 3 seconds, the
MicroM will either reset if in lockout, or shutdown and revert back to the start of the cycle. If the
MicroM is in the Idle state, this action will cause the LED’s to sequence from the bottom to top and
serves as a LED test.
Smart Reset
If the push button is depressed and released greater than 3 seconds but less than 5 seconds, the
24
®
line of the display. Pressing and releasing the RESET key will cause the address to increment. The
address after 31 is 0. The second method is to use the local reset located on the plug-in board. It is
first necessary to open the operating control (L1-7) to have the MicroM in the IDLE or STANDBY
position. Depressing the reset switch for greater than 10 seconds will cause the address of the
MicroM to be displayed in a binary format on the LEDs located on the programmer board. Because
the default is address 0, and since address 0 would mean no LEDs would be lit; the ALARM LED is
made to flash when the address is 0. The OP CTRL LED is the least significant bit while the
ALARM relay is the most significant bit. To increment the address counter, depress and release the
RESET push button and observe the LED pattern. If the RESET switch is untouched for 30 seconds
the current address displayed will be stored to memory and the MicroM will automatically exit the
address mode.
TEST JACK VOLTAGE
For all amplifiers, the MicroM provides a uniform 0-10 volt signal to represent the flame signal
strength. A signal reading greater than 4 volts is considered sufficient to provide reliable operation.
This same signal is also available in a numerical format on the ED510 display. The chart below correlates the test jack voltage to the numerical value. The signal clamps at 10 volts at a numerical value
greater than 42 and the numerical value clamps at 80.
10
9
TEST JACK VOLTAGE
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
60
80
AMPLIFIER TEST JACK VOLTAGE VS. ED510 DISPLAY BOARD
34
®
EXTERNAL METER CONNECTIONS
The test jacks are located on the amplifier card. If external access is desired for a panel meter the
shown below will assist you in locating the position to drill through on the front cover. The hole
sizes should be large enough to accommodate the body of the meter probes. The tests accept meter
probes up to .080” or 2mm diameter.
2.963
2 31/32
ADDING HOLES IN COVER TO ACCESS TEST JACKS
1.759
1 3/4
3.134
3 1/8
RECOMMEND
5/16” TO 3/8” HOLES
TO ACCOMMODATE
METER PROBES
μΜ
INSTALLATION TESTING
Use of Test Meter (All Controls)
Testing the Fireye MicroM Controls requires the use of a test AC/DC multimeter, with a minimum
1000 ohm/volt AC scale and 20,000 ohm/volt DC scale.
With the test meter on the DC scale, and the test meter leads inserted into the test jacks on the amplifier (Red for positive (+) polarity, Black for minus (-) polarity), a DC voltage reading of 4.0 to 10
volts for all amplifier types should be obtained when the control is detecting flame and 0 volts when
no flame is present. Wildly fluctuating readings are an indication of an unstable flame or flame sensor requiring maintenance. Inadequate flame signal may be improved by:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Assuring that the flame detector and wiring installations have followed the instructions beginning on page 46.
Assuring that the flame detector is clean and within the ambient temperature limits.
Assuring that the flame is sufficiently large to detect.
Assuring that the flame quality (fuel to air ratio, combustion air velocity) is satisfactory.
Trying a shorter sight pipe or increasing the sight pipe diameter. (The burner manufacturer
should be consulted before mechanical changes are made).
When using a flame rectification amplifier, a micro-ammeter may be connected in series with the
wire to Terminal S2. Normal flame will produce a meter reading between 4 and 10 micro-amps.
With the test meter on the AC scale, line and load voltages may be measured at the identified test
points on the chassis.
WARNING: Before making a pilot flame test, manually shut off the fuel supply to the main
burner.
Normal Pilot Flame Test (Programmers with Run/Check Switch)
1.
2.
At pilot trial for ignition (PTFI) place the Run/Check switch in the Check position.
During the pilot flame test and adjustment period, if flame is not detected within 30 seconds, the
control will lock out and require manual reset to initiate another cycle.
35
®
3.
Observe the pilot flame signal on the test meter or the ED510 display. If the flame signal is
below 4.0 volts DC or a reading of 10 on a remote display, re-adjust the pilot flame or realign
the flame detector.
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH a flame rectification rod with power applied.
4.
5.
When using UV detection, a test is required to verify that UV radiation from the ignition spark
is not being detected. To accomplish this, manually shut off both the pilot and main fuels. Initiate a normal start-up. Observe the test meter which should read no more than 1/2 volt DC. If
higher levels are observed, realign the UV scanner, and/or shield the spark from the scanner’s
view.
Move the Run/Check switch to the Run position, check pilot flame response time by manually
shutting off the pilot fuel and initiate a normal start-up. With no pilot flame present, the control
will de-energize the pilot assembly at the end of the trial for ignition interval (selectable by
dipswitch #4) and go into safety shutdown.
WARNING: The minimum pilot test must be accomplished by a trained and qualified
burner technician.
Minimum Pilot Test
This test assures that the flame detector will not sense a pilot flame too small to light a the main
flame reliably. It must be made on every new installation as well as following the repositioning or
replacement of the flame detector. This procedure should not be used on a direct spark burner.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Manually shut off the fuel to the main burner.
Place the Run/Check switch in the Check position. (MEP500 Series Programmers only).
Connect a test meter to the test jacks on the Amplifier Module or observe the reading on the
ED510 display.
Initiate a normal start-up.
Reduce the fuel to the pilot until the DC voltmeter reads 4.0 volts. This is the minimum pilot.
For flame rectification the flame signal for minimum pilot varies depending on the application.
See WARNING below.
Return the Run/Check switch to the Run position (MEP500 Series Programmers only).
Slowly turn on the main fuel and insure the main flame lights off promptly and normally.
WARNING: If light off is delayed, shut off the power to the installation. Realign the flame
detector so a larger pilot flame is required before flame is detected. Repeat this test until
the main flame lights reliably with minimum pilot.
Flame Failure Test
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
36
Temporarily connect spark ignition and pilot to Terminal #3.
Initiate a normal start-up.
Manually shut off all fuel and observe the loss of flame signal on the test meter.
If flame signal does not reduce to zero within the flame failure response time of the control
(FFRT determined by the selection of the amplifier), verify the UV flame detector is not actuated by the ignition spark. If spark is detected, a metallic shield or relocation of the UV detector
is required.
IMPORTANT: When the test is completed, reconnect the spark ignition to Terminal #4.
®
Wiring Arrangements
IMPORTANT: Use moisture resistant wire rated 90°C minimum.
CAUTION: When powered, 560 VAC across S1, S2 with MEUV4, MEUV1, MEUVS4 and
MEUVS1; 260 VAC across S1, S2 with MERT4 and MERT1.
CAUTION: Control wiring procedures which deviate from those shown in the diagrams
may bypass safety functions designed in the control. Check with the Fireye Representative
before deviating from the recommended wiring diagrams.
FIGURE 6.
WIRING ARRANGEMENT FOR PILOT IGNITED BURNERS USING MEP100 AND MEP200 SERIES PROGRAMMERS
AIR FLOW
OPERATING
CONTROLS
T
INTERLOCK
P
FLAME
SCANNER
H
7
S2
6
KL
(WATCHDOG)
1
120VAC
50/60Hz
FLAME
ROD
ONLY
S1
FLAME AMPLIFIER
F1
2
N
KB
KA
A
8
KF-2
3
4
KF-1
5
*
PV
ALARM
BLOWER MOTOR
OR
CONTACTOR
INTERMITTENT
PILOT VALVE
MV
SPARK
IGNITION
MAIN VALVE
*For intermittent ignition, connect to terminal 3
39
®
SUGGESTED GROUNDING RULES
The MicroM system, being microprocessor based, requires a ground system that provides a zerovoltage reference. The voltage measured from L2 to all other terminals except L1 should be 0 volts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The most effective ground is to run the ground wire in the same raceway as the hot and neutral
from the main distribution service panel (not intermediate sub-panels) to the burner control
panel and insure that this ground wire is well bonded to the control panel.
The wiring base of the MicroM must have earth ground providing a connection between the
sub-base and the control panel or the burner.
The earth ground wire must be capable of conducting the current to blow the 20A fuse in event
of an internal short circuit. A number 14 AWG copper conductor is adequate, wide straps or
brackets are preferred rather than lead wires.
The ground path needs to be low impedance (less than 1 ohm) to the equipment frame which in
turn needs a low impedance to earth ground. For a ground path to be low impedance at RF frequencies, the connection must be made with minimum length conductors having maximum surface areas.
All connections should be free of nonconductive coatings and protected against rust.
Utilizing conduit as a means of providing a ground must be avoided.
Installing ground rods at the burner control panel defeats the purpose of a single point ground as
described above and could also present a safety hazard.
INSTALLATION
Do not run high voltage ignition transformer wires in the same conduit with flame detection wiring.
Do not run scanner wires in a conduit with line voltage circuits.
Ensure the frame of the ignition transformer is securely connected to control panel frame or preferably the burner frame.
The MicroM chassis (MEC120) contains a transient suppressing device connected internally across
hot and neutral and then to the internal bracket. For this to be effective the chassis must be screwed
securely into the wiring subbase.
REMOTE DISPLAY
When the ED510 is to be remotely mounted on the front of the control panel, the ED580 cable must
contain a ferrite core, currently supplied by Fireye with the cable. The cable end with the ferrite core
must be mounted at the control end. High frequency currents flow more to the surface of the conductor. The 60 Hz ground system, properly designed, has sufficient low-impedance at 60 Hz to maintain
all metal surfaces at the same ground reference. But, this same system is unable to provide this at
higher frequencies, because of the increased impedance caused by the ‘skin effect’. The purpose of
the ferrite core is to provide a low-impedance at these higher frequencies and absorb this unwanted
energy.
Care must be taken not to route the ED580 cable in close proximity to any starter motor contactors
located in the control panel or across any high voltage ignition wires. Refer to Fireye bulletin E-8002
for proper installation.
45
®
COMMUNICATIONS
When interfacing Fireye controls to a communication system, be it an E500, PLC or other microprocessor based device, ferrite cores should also be utilized. Proper twisted shielded pair cable must be
utilized. In a multi-drop system, the shields should be tied together within a cabinet and not to any
ground point. The shield at the source end of the cable of the multi-drop connection can then be terminated to ground. Source end is defined as the originating end of the communication system
Care must be taken not to route communication cables in close proximity to any starter motor contactors located in the control panel or across any high voltage ignition wires. Refer to Fireye bulletin E8002 for proper installation.
SCANNERS
The armored cable supplied with the Ultra-Violet and Infrared scanners should be connected to
equipment by means of a good mechanical connection such as a conduit fitting. It may be necessary
to utilize heat insulator (P/N 35-69) to isolate the sensing end of the scanner from boiler ground.
Care must be taken not to route the scanner cable across the high voltage ignition cable. The high
energy ignition cable should be checked periodically for cracking, connections and aging.
In applications using flame rod units and the MERT amplifier, it may be beneficial to route a separate
return wire from the S1 terminal to the flame rod assembly. This will minimize the effects of transient currents flowing into the MicroM.
In all cases, scanner wires should be routed in separate conduit and not joined with any high voltage
AC or ignition cables.
MAINTENANCE
Periodically, the spark electrode should be inspected for proper gapping and cracked ceramics. At
ignition time, the high energy from the ignition transformer will attempt to conduct to the point of
least resistance and with an improper spark gap, where the conduction takes place will no longer be
controlled.
The VA rating of the control transformer must be sized to handle the inrush currents of the pilot solenoid and ignition transformer at PTFI and then the inrush currents of the main fuel valve assembly at
MTFI time.
Inspect neatness of wiring in junction boxes and cabinets. It is best to have connections short and
direct and also not having wires bunched up and tied off. Also, connections should be periodically
inspected for tightness and corrosion.
INSTALLATION - UV SCANNERS
Where possible, obtain the burner manufacturer’s instructions for mounting the scanner. This information is available for most standard burners. The scanner mounting should comply with the following general instructions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
46
Position the UV1A, UV2 scanner within 30 inches of the flame to be monitored; the 45UV5
within 72 inches, closer if possible.
Select a scanner location that will remain within the ambient temperature limits of the UV Scanner. If cooling is required, use an insulating coupling (Fireye P/N 35-69 for UV1A, UV2 Scanners, P/N 35-127-1 for 45UV5) to reduce conducted heat.
The UVlA, UV2, 45UV5 Scanners are designed to seal off the sight pipe up to 1 PSI pressure.
Higher furnace pressures should be sealed off. To seal off positive furnace pressure up to 100
PSI for UV1A, UV2 Scanners, install a quartz window coupling (#60-1257) For 45UV5 Scanners, use #60-1199 coupling. Add cooling air to reduce the scanner sight pipe temperature.
Install the scanner on a standard NPT pipe (UV1A: 1/2", UV2: 3/8", 45UV5: 1") whose position
is rigidly fixed. If the scanner mounting pipe sights through the refractory, do not extend it more
®
NOTICE
When Fireye products are combined with equipment manufactured by others and/or integrated into
systems designed or manufactured by others, the Fireye warranty, as stated in its General Terms and
Conditions of Sale, pertains only to the Fireye products and not to any other equipment or to the combined system or its overall performance.
WARRANTIES
FIREYE guarantees for one year from the date of installation or 18 months from date of manufacture
of its products to replace, or, at its option, to repair any product or part thereof (except lamps and photocells) which is found defective in material or workmanship or which otherwise fails to conform to
the description of the product on the face of its sales order. THE FOREGOING IS IN LIEU OF
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND FIREYE MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. Except as specifically
stated in these general terms and conditions of sale, remedies with respect to any product or part number manufactured or sold by Fireye shall be limited exclusively to the right to replacement or repair as
above provided. In no event shall Fireye be liable for consequential or special damages of any nature
that may arise in connection with such product or part.
®
FIREYE
3 Manchester Road
Derry, New Hampshire 03038 USA
www.fireye.com
MC-5000
OCTOBER 14, 2009
Supersedes January 9, 2009
£
3045-501
MAMP-1
AUGUST 3, 2007
MEUV1, MEUV4,MEUVS1,
MEUVS4, MEIR1, MEIR4,
MERT1, MERT4,
MECD1 and MECD4
AMPLIFIER MODULES FOR USE WITH THE
FIREYE® MODULAR MicroM™ CONTROL
APPROVED
DESCRIPTION
The Fireye MEUV1, MEUV4, MEUVS1, MEUVS4, MERT1, MERT4, MEIR1, MEIR4, MECD1
and MECD4 are Amplifier Modules used with the Fireye Modular MicroM control. These amplifier
modules provide flame scanning capabilities using any of the Fireye standard ultraviolet scanners,
self-check scanners, infrared scanners, cadmium sulfide scanners and flame rods. The Flame Failure
Response Time (FFRT) of the control is determined by the selection of the amplifier module (see
Ordering Information). Test jacks are provided on the amplifier modules to permit flame signal measurement during operation and is a uniform 0-10 vdc for all models.
After scanner selection, the proper amplifier module must be used in the Modular MicroM chassis
(see Ordering Information). The amplifier module incorporates a plug-in design for ease of installation.
The programmer module determines the operational characteristics of the control (e.g. relight, purge
timing, etc.).
For proper and safe application of this product, you must refer to bulletin MC-5000 for a detailed
description of the operation of the Modular MicroM control, including installation instructions,
operating sequences for the programmer modules, etc. Also follow the scanner installation and wiring instructions found in bulletins MC-5000 for proper flame scanning operation.
WARNING: Selection of this control for a particular application should be made by a competent professional, licensed by a state or other government agency. Inappropriate application
of this product could result in an unsafe condition hazardous to life and property. Installation
should not be considered complete until pilot turndown and other appropriate performance
tests have been successfully completed.
1
£
ORDERING INFORMATION
Flame Amplifier Selection:
MicroM Amplifier Models:
MEUV1
MEUV4
MEUVS1
MEUVS4
MERT1
MERT4
MEIR1
MEIR4
MECD1
MECD4
UV amplifier,0.8 second FFRT, uses UV1A, UV2, UV8A and 45UV3-1050 scanners.
UV amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses UV1A, UV2, UV8A and 45UV3-1050 scanners.
UV Self-Check amplifier,0.8 second FFRT, uses 45UV5-1009 scanner.
UV Self-Check amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses 45UV5-1009 scanner.
Flame Rod / Photocell amplifier,0.8 second FFRT, uses 69ND1 or 45CM1 (obsolete).
Flame Rod / Photocell amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses 69ND1 or 45CM1 (obsolete).
Infrared amplifier0,.8 second FFRT, uses 48PT2 scanner.
Infrared amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses 48PT2 scanner.
Cadmium sulfide amplifier,0.8 second FFRT, uses CS1A5 scanner.
Cadmium sulfide amplifier, 3 second FFRT, uses CS1A5 scanner.
FLAME SCANNERS
CAUTION: The UV1, UV2, UV8A, UV90 and 45UV3 ultra-violet flame scanners and associated
amplifier modules are non self-checking UV systems and should be applied only to burners that
cycle often (e.g.: a minimum of once per 12 hours) in order for the safety checking circuit to be
exercised. If component checking is required during burner operation for constantly fired burners,
utilize the self-checking ultra-violet flame scanners (45UV5) with associated amplifier module
(MEUVS1, MEUVS4) or the infrared flame scanner (48PT2) with associated Auto Check amplifier
(MEIR1, MEIR4).
UV SCANNERS:
UV1A3
UV1A6
UV2
UV8A
45UV3-1050
45UV5-1009
UV90-3
UV90-6
UV90-9
1/2” NPT connector, 3 ft. (914mm) flexible cable, non self-checking.
1/2” NPT connector, 6 ft. (1828mm) flexible cable, non self-checking.
3/8” NPT connector, 3 ft. (914mm) flexible cable, non self-checking.
1/2” NPT 90° head, 6 ft. unshielded leads.
3/4” sleeve/set screw mount. Non self-checking.
UV self-check scanner 8 ft. (2400mm) leads. 1” NPT threads.
120 VAC shutter. Use with MEUVS type amplifier.
UV, 90° lateral view, 3 ft. (914mm) flex conduit
UV, 90° lateral view, 6 ft. (1828mm) flex conduit
UV, 90° lateral view, 9 ft. (2742mm) flex conduit
FLAME DETECTORS:
45CM1-1000
45CM1-1000Y
69ND1-1000K4
69ND1-1000K6
69ND1-1000K8
2
Photocell with filter.
Photocell without filter.
12 inch flame rod, 1/2” NPT connector.
18 inch flame rod, 1/2” NPT connector.
24 Inch flame rod, 1/2” NPT connector.
BULLETIN
SC-102
SC-102
SC-102
SC-102
SC-102
SC-101
SC-102
SC-102
SC-102
BULLETIN
OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE
SC-103
SC-103
SC-103
£
INFRARED SCANNERS:
BULLETIN
48PT2-1003
48PT2-1007
48PT2-9003
48PT2-9007
48PT2-9007W
Infrared scanner 8 ft. (2400mm) shielded cable, straight head.
Infrared scanner 4 ft. (1200mm) shielded cable, straight head.
Infrared scanner 8 ft. (2400mm) shielded cable, 90° head.
Infrared scanner 4 ft. (1200mm) shielded cable, 90° head.
Infrared scanner 4 ft. (1200mm) shielded cable, 90° head, water
repellent.
CS1A5
Cadmium sulfide 5’, with mounting bracket
SC-103
SC-103
SC-103
SC-103
SC-103
CADMIUM SULPHIDE:
Parts and Accessories
Part Number
Description
4-263-1
Firetron cell for 48PT2 only.
4-314-1
UV tube for 45UV5-1005-1009, 45UV2, 45UV3.
10-88
Set of 3 orifice plugs (1/16'', 1/8'', 3/16'') for 48PT1, 48PT2.
19-30
Pyrex window for 60-801 union.
35-69
Heat insulator, 1/2" connection for 48PT, UV1A.
35-75
Water cooled adapter for 48PT, UV1A.
35-127-1
Heat insulator. 1" NPT for 45UV5.
46-38
Replacement lens (1.25" dia.) for 45UV5,.
46-56
Quartz magnifying lens for 45UV3, (1" dia.).
46-58
Quartz (1”dia.) lens for 60-1290 union.
60-302
Swivel mtg. adapter, 1/2" NPT for 48PT1, 48PT2, UV1A.
60-801
1/ " union with Pyrex window for 48PT1, 48PT2.
2
60-1199
Union with quartz window, 1" NPT for 45UV2, 45UV3, 45UV5.
60-1257
Union with quartz window, 1/2" NPT for UV1A.
60-1290
Union with quartz lens, 1/2" NPT for UV1A.
60-1664-3
Swivel mount adapter, 1" NPT for 45UV5 scanners.
61-436
Lens cap (standard) for 48PT scanners.
61-2914
Shutter and bracket assembly only for 45UV5-1009.
61-3263
Shutter, bracket and lens assembly with lens holder and gasket for 45UV5-1005-1009,
1105 (includes a 61-2914).
82-95
Lens holder for 45UV5 scanner.
92-45
Quartz window used in 45UV3-1050 and 60-1237 union.
92-48
Quartz window used in 60-1199 union.
124-13
“O” Ring used in 60-1199 union.
124-14
“O” Ring used in 60-801, 60-1257, 60-1290.
Remove power from the control and remove the control from its wiring base before
proceeding.
3
£
INSTALLATION
The amplifier modules are used with the Fireye
Modular MicroM Base Chassis (P/N MEC120,
MEC120C, MEC120R, MEC120D, MEC120RC
for 120VAC, P/N MEC230, for 230VAC). They
are installed in the chassis by grabbing hold of the
amplifier module by the edges of its printed circuit board, aligning the module with the guide
slots on the opening in the middle of the chassis,
and inserting the module into the pin connectors.
The amplifier modules are designed to fit in the
proper slot only. DO NOT FORCE THEM.
12
11
10
AMPLIFIER TEST JACK VOLTAGE
9
8
7
6
CORRELATION BETWEEN
AMPLIFIER TEST JACK
VOLTAGE AND OPTIONAL
ED510 REMOTE DISPLAY
FLAME SIGNAL READING
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
ED510 DISPLAY FLAME SIGNAL
WARRANTIES
FIREYE guarantees for one year from the date of installation or 18 months from date of manufacture of its products to
replace, or, at its option, to repair any product or part thereof (except lamps, electronic tubes and photocells) which is found
defective in material or workmanship or which otherwise fails to conform to the description of the product on the face of its
sales order. THE FOREGOING IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND FIREYE MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. Except as specifically
stated in these general terms and conditions of sale, remedies with respect to any product or part number manufactured or sold
by Fireye shall be limited exclusively to the right to replacement or repair as above provided. In no event shall Fireye be liable
for consequential or special damages of any nature that may arise in connection with such product or part.
£
4
FIREYE£
3 Manchester Road
Derry, New Hampshire 03038 USA
www.fireye.com
MAMP-1
AUGUST 3, 2007
Supersedes Oct. 1, 2005
®
3045-502
MP-5101
MARCH 27, 2009
C
U L US
MEP100, MEP100P, MEP101, MEP102,
MEP103, MEP104, MEP105, MEP106,
MEP107, MEP108,MEP109,
MEP141 and MEP149
PROGRAMMER MODULES
®
APPROVED
LISTED
FOR USE WITH THE FIREYE® MODULAR
MicroM™ CONTROL TO BE USED
WITH MEC120 AND MEC230 CHASSIS
DESCRIPTION
The Fireye MEP100, MEP100P, MEP101, MEP102, MEP103, MEP104, MEP105, MEP106 MEP107,
MEP108, ME109, MEP141 and MEP149 Programmer Modules are used with the Fireye Modular
MicroM control. The operational characteristics of the control are determined by the selection of the programmer module (e.g. re-light, 2-stage capability, pilot cutoff, etc.). The programmer module incorporates
a plug-in design for easy installation.
The advantages of the Micro M are zero dependence on discrete components previously used for timing
functions. The MicroM, through the use of micro-controller technology, incorporates smart diagnostic
LED’s, smart reset function for multi-burner applications, optional alpha-numeric display output (ED510)
and serial communications via a Modbus-RTU.
Flame Failure Response Time (FFRT) is determined by the selection of the amplifier module. Test jacks
are also provided on the flame amplifier module to permit flame signal measurement during operation.
For proper and safe application of this product, you must refer to Fireye bulletin MC-5000 for a detailed
description of the various programmer modules, including installation instructions, amplifier selection,
operating sequences for each programmer module, etc.
WARNING: Selection of this control for a particular application should be made by a competent
professional, licensed by a state or other government agency. Inappropriate application of this
product could result in an unsafe condition hazardous to life and property. Installation should not
be considered complete until pilot turndown and other appropriate performance tests have been
successfully completed.
PROGRAMMER MODULE SELECTION
MicroM Programmer Models
MEP100
Relight operation, 10 sec. PTFI.
MEP101
Relight operation, allow flame signal until 60 seconds after interlock closed.
MEP102
Non-recycle on flame fail, 5 second PTFI.
MEP103
Fixed 10 second SISP*, 10 second MTFI, re-try once on igniter failure, fixed 30 second post purge.
MEP104
Non-recycle on flame fail, 10 second PTFI.
MEP105
Non-recycle on flame fail, lockout on air-flow open with flame present, 10 second PTFI.
MEP106
Same as MEP100. 12 second pre-purge, added reset from lockout via line voltage.
MEP107
Same as MEP100. Force 5 minute purge delay after main flame fail.
MEP108
Immediate ignition and pilot, 15 second PTFI, non-recycle on flame fail. Not FM approved.
MEP109
Immediate ignition and pilot, 10 second fixed PTFI, 10 second MTFI, intermittent pilot, non-recycle on flame fail.
MEP100P
Relight operation, 10 second PTFI, fixed 15 second post purge.
MEP141
Non-recycle on flame fail, 30 second purge, 5 second fixed PTFI, 8 second pilot stabilization period,
intermittent pilot, 15 second post purge, prove air open at start.
MEP149
Non-recycle on flame fail, 30 second purge, 5 second fixed PTFI, 8 second pilot stabilization period,
intermittent pilot, 90 second post purge, prove air open at start.
*Spark Igniter Sensing Period
1
®
WARNING: Remove power from the control and remove the control from its wiring base
before proceeding.
INSTALLATION
The Programmer Modules are used with the
Fireye modular MicroM Chassis
(P/N MEC120, MEC120RC, MEC120R,
MEC120D and MEC120C for 120VAC and
MEC230 for 230 VAC). They are installed in
the chassis by grabbing hold of the programmer
module by the ridged finger grips on the side
on the module, aligning the module with the
guide slots on the opening farthest from the
transformer, and inserting the module into the
pin connectors.
The programmer modules are
designed to fit into the proper
slot only.
DO NOT FORCE THEM
LOCKOUT CODES
MSGN
DESCRIPTION
DEC
HEX
6
6
Lockout Line Frequency Noise Detected
7
7
Lockout Flame Fail - PTFI
15
0F
Lockout Fault Unknown
16
10
Lockout Amplifier High Count Fail
19
13
Lockout Flame Fail - MTFI
20
14
Lockout False Flame - STANDBY
21
15
Lockout Intrlck Open
22
16
Lockout Intrlck Closed
24
18
Lockout Chassis Opto
37
25
Lockout Flame Fail - AUTO
39
27
Lockout Fuel Valve State Change
54
36
Lockout Check Chassis
55
37
Lockout Check Programmer
56
38
Lockout Check Amplifier
58
3A
Lockout Amplifier Auto Check Fail
59
3B
Lockout Check BLOWN FUSE
76
4C
Lockout Check Scanner
OP
CTRL
AIRFLOW
INTLCK
PTFI
FLAME
ALARM
= NOT LIGHTED
= LIGHTED
= FLASHING
All MicroM chassis are shipped with a convenient peel off label that can be applied to any surface (inside cover) for future reference.
®
2
FIREYE
3 Manchester Road
Derry, New Hampshire 03038 USA
www.Fireye.com
MP-5101
MARCH 27, 2009
Supersedes Oct. 2003
3010-025
GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATION CHART
These torque values are approximate and should not be accepted as accurate limits. Indeterminate
factors (surface finish, type of plating and lubrication) in specific applications preclude the publication
of accurate values for universal use.
DO NOT USE the below values for gasketed joints or joints of soft materials.
DO NOT USE your torque wrench for values greater than its maximum scale reading.
FOR ENGLISH FASTENERS (In Foot Pounds)
SIZE
1/4-20
1/4-28
5/16-18
5/16-24
3/8-16
3/8-24
7/16-14
7/16-20
1/2-13
1/2-20
9/16-12
9/16-18
5/8-11
5/8-18
SAE 2
6
7
13
14
23
26
37
41
57
64
80
91
111
128
SAE 5
11
13
21
23
38
40
55
60
85
95
125
140
175
210
SAE 8
12
15
25
30
50
60
85
95
125
140
175
195
245
270
Socket Head
Cap Screws
13
16
27
33
52
60
86
95
130
145
180
210
255
290
Brass
5
6
8
9
15
16
23
25
32
34
44
48
68
73
Stainless
Type 303
5
7
9
10
17
18
25
28
37
40
50
54
75
80
FOR METRIC FASTENERS (In Newton Meters)
SIZE
M5
M6
M8
M 10
M 12
M 14
M 16
M 20
4.6
3
5
12
23
40
65
100
200
4.8
4
6
16
32
56
90
140
5.8
5
8
20
40
70
110
170
330
8.8
7
12.5
30
60
103
167
270
520
9.8
8
14
34
70
120
190
290
10.9
11
17
44
85
150
240
380
740
12.9
12
20
50
100
180
280
440
860
OPERATING STANDARD
1 BURNER IRONER
Model:
S erial #:
FLATWOR K / FAB R IC C ON TE N T
D ate:
/
/
TE MP E R AT U R E SETTING
Approved by:
OP E R ATIN G S P E E D
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tip - Flatwork
Warm Rinse
A warm rinse allows more water to be extracted from the material. This means the ironer needs to
remove less moisture from the flatwork to produce a dry, high quality finish. Furthermore, the ironer can be
run faster if the final rinse is warm.
Moisture Retention (MR)
After extraction, the optimum MR is 30% - 35% for mixed-fiber-content fabrics and 45% - 50% for cotton
fabrics. To determine the MR after extraction, use a precise scale to measure the “still wet, but extracted”
flatwork; then weigh again after the same flatwork is “completely dry”. Subtract the weight of the “still wet, but
extracted” flatwork from the “completely dry” flatwork. Divide the weight difference by the “completely dry”
flatwork weight. Finally, multiply the resulting weight by 100 to determine the MR percentage.
The optimum MR after ironing is 4% or less. Ironing is not intended to remove 100% of the moisture
from the flatwork. Therefore, feel the flatwork when it first comes out of the unit; there should be a slight
moisture content. Allow the flatwork to sit for a few minuts to allow excess steam and heat to dissipate in the
air. Check the flatwork again; it should now feel dry to the touch. For more information, review the Instruction
Manual, Flatwork Handling procedure.
NOTE: This Operating Standard form needs to be completed and approved by the laundry manager at each facility. Each laundry facility uses different means to
accomplish a quality finish, including wash formulas, extraction, number of personnel, etc.; the Chicago Dryer Company does not assume any responsibility how this
form is completed or used.
3010900
GO 20
Index
INDEX
A
C
Alarm Circuit, Flame Safeguard 5-13
Alignment and Positioning, Feed Table 7-15
Change Oil in Delivery Drive Gear Reduction Unit
(Type R Unit) 4-20
Check
Compression Roll Cover 4-6
Compression Roll Pressure 4-18
Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt 4-7
Gas Pressure 4-20
Gas Regulator Vent 4-19
Guide Tapes 4-4
Ironing Cylinder 4-6
Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield 2-16
Mechanical and Electrical Connections 4-23
Ribbon Condition 4-15
Safety Equipment 4-5
Setscrews 4-16
Check and Clean
Combustion Blower Wheel 4-14
Inverter 4-8
Motors 4-13
Sail Switch and Exhaust Blower Wheel 4-13
Spark Plug and Pilot Assembly 4-21
Clean
Behind Service Panels 4-7
Combustion Blower Air Filter 4-4
Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield 4-12
Touchless Temperature Sensors and UV Flame
Scanner 4-17
Clearing a Jam Safely 3-12
Combustion Blower Motor Rotation Checkout 2-17
Compression Roll 7-17
Cover
Check 4-6
Replacement 7-19
Pressure
Adjustment 7-19
Check 4-18, 7-18
Unit Settings 3-15
Conditioning Flatwork Before Ironing 3-13
Final Rinse 3-14
Moisture Retention 3-14
Timing Between Washing and Ironing 3-14
Wash Load 3-13
Controls, Operating. See Operating Controls
Control Function Check 2-20
Cover Replacement
Compression Roll 7-19
Doffer Roll 7-13
B
Bearings, Greasing
Monthly 4-16
Weekly 4-9
Broken or Missing Ribbon Replacement
Delivery 7-63
Feed 7-7
Return 7-56
Burner System 5-11, 7-30. See also Heating System
Burner Gas/Air Mixer
Check and Adjustment 7-33
Cleaning 7-37
Burner Removal/Replacement 7-39
Burner Tip Maintenance 7-45
Check and Clean Spark Plug and Pilot Assembly
4-21
Components 5-11
Fail-Safe Protection Stage, Sequence of Operation
5-19
Heat Shield Replacement 7-46
Ignition, Heating System Troubleshooting 6-18
Normal Operation Stage, Sequence of Operation
5-18
Flame Control Diagnostics 5-18
Pilot Flame Ignition Trial 5-19
Start-Up 5-18
Operation, Heating System Troubleshooting 6-20
Pilot Gas/Air Mixture Check and Adjustment 730
Repair Procedures 7-30
Temperature Control Replacement 7-52
Touchless Temperature Sensor Replacement 7-51
UV Flame Scanner
Alignment Check/Adjustment 7-47
Replacement 7-50
TOC
INDEX
I-1
Index
GO 20
D
Electrical System
About 5-2
Additional Electrical Components 5-6
Disconnect Switch and Fuses 5-3
Main Electrical Panel 5-4
Troubleshooting 6-4
Endframe Controls. See Operating Controls
Exhaust Blower
About 5-9
Installation 2-5
Ductwork 2-5
Electrical Connection 2-7
Installing the Exhaust Blower 2-6
Locating the Exhaust Blower 2-5
Ventilating the Work Area 2-6
Motor Rotation Checkout 2-18
Exhaust System 5-9
Exhaust Blower, About 5-9
Sail Switch, About 5-9
Troubleshooting 6-24
Daily Operating Procedures 3-8
Clearing a Jam Safely 3-12
Flatwork Handling 3-11
Shut-Down 3-13
Start-Up 3-8
Waxing 3-9
Daily Operation Safety 1-3
Daily PM (8 Hours) 4-3
Check
Guide Tapes 4-4
Safety Equipment 4-5
Clean Combustion Blower Air Filter 4-4
General Cleanliness 4-3
Watch and Listen for Anything Abnormal 4-3
Wax Ironing Cylinder 4-5
Delivery Section (Type R Unit) 7-60
Drive Belt
Check 4-7
Tension Adjustment 7-64
Drive Roll Tracking Tape Replacement 7-64
Drive System 5-7
Gear Reduction Unit, Change Oil 4-20
Ribbon
Replacement 7-62
Tension Adjustment 7-60
Disconnect Switch and Fuses 5-3
Doffer Roll Cover Replacement 7-13
Drive Belt Tension Adjustment
Delivery Ribbon Drive Roll 7-64
Drive Chain
Oil 4-18
Tension Adjustment 7-25
Drive Roll Friction Material Replacement
Feed Ribbon 7-8
Return Ribbon 7-57
Ductwork 2-5
F
E
Electrical
Checkout Connection 2-17
Combustion Blower Motor Rotation Checkout
2-17
Exhaust Blower Motor Rotation Checkout 2-18
Check Mechanical and Electrical Connections
4-23
Connection 2-7
Main Power Connection 2-9
Sail Switch and Exhaust Blower Motor 2-7
Electrical Connection, Temperature Control 5-14
I-2
TOC
Feed Section 7-4
Doffer Roll Cover Replacement 7-13
Drive Roll Friction Material Replacement 7-8
Feed Table Alignment and Positioning 7-15
Guide Tape Replacement 7-10
Ribbon
Replacement 7-6
Tension Adjustment 7-4
Fill Grease Gun 4-10
Final Rinse, Conditioning Flatwork Before Ironing
3-14
Flame Control Diagnostics, Burner Normal Operation Stage 5-18
Flame Safeguard 5-12
Indicator LEDs 5-13
Inputs 5-12
Lockout LEDs, Heating System Troubleshooting
6-14
Operation, Heating System Troubleshooting 6-13
Outputs 5-13
Reset Button 5-13
Flatwork Handling 3-11
Ironing Cylinder 3-11
Maximum Efﬁciency 3-11
Safety 3-11
Friction Material Replacement
Feed Ribbon Drive Roll 7-8
Return Ribbon Drive Roll 7-57
INDEX
GO 20
Index
G
I
Gas/Air Mixer, Burner
Check and Adjustment 7-33
Cleaning 7-37
Gas Burner Removal/Replacement 7-39
Gas Connection
Checkout 2-22
Gas Supply 2-22
Inspect Gas Piping 2-23
Operating Gas Pressure Check and Ignition Test
2-24
Installation 2-10
Regulator and Valve Installation 2-11
Venting the Installed Regulator 2-12
Gas Pressure
Check 4-20
Check/Ignition Test 2-24
Gas Safety Interlock Circuit 5-12
Gas Supply Checkout 2-22
Gas Valve Circuit, Flame Safeguard 5-13
Gear Reduction Unit, Delivery Drive (Type R Unit),
Change Oil 4-20
General Cleanliness 4-3
Grease
Monthly Bearings 4-16
Using Other 4-9
Weekly Bearings 4-9
Grease Gun
Filling 4-10
Using 4-10
Guide Tape
Check 4-4
Replacement 7-10
Ignition Transformer Circuit, Flame Safeguard 5-13
Indicator LEDs, Flame Safeguard 5-13
Inputs, Flame Safeguard 5-12
Inspect
Gas Piping 2-23
Installation 2-3
Installation Procedures 2-3
Electrical Connection 2-7
Exhaust Blower Installation 2-5
Gas Connection 2-10
Inspection 2-3
Protective Wrapper Removal 2-14
Receiving Shelf Set-Up 2-13
Uncrating and Positioning 2-4
Installing the Exhaust Blower 2-6
Ironer Drive System 5-7
Ironing Cylinder
Check 4-6
Flatwork Handling 3-11
Hardened Ring Replacement 7-28
Heat Shield
Check 2-16
Clean 4-12
Replacement 7-46
Paper Removal 2-21
Reconditioning 7-26
Temperature, Unit Settings 3-15
Waxing 4-5
Ironing Quality Troubleshooting 6-10
Ironing Section 7-24
Drive Chain Tension Adjustment 7-25
Ironing Cylinder Hardened Ring Replacement
7-28
Ironing Cylinder Reconditioning 7-26
Ironing Speed, Unit Settings 3-15
Ironing System, Processing Standards 3-16
H
Hardened Ring Replacement, Ironing Cylinder 7-28
Heating System 5-9. See also Burner System
Burner System Components 5-11
Flame Safeguard 5-12
Temperature Control 5-14
Touchless Temperature Sensors and UV Flame
Scanner 5-15
Troubleshooting 6-13
Burner Ignition 6-18
Burner Operation 6-20
Flame Safeguard Lockout LEDs 6-14
Flame Safeguard Operation 6-13
Pilot Ignition 6-15
Heat Shield
Clean 4-12
Installation Check 2-16
Replacement 7-46
TOC
J
Jams, Clearing Safely 3-12
JOG Operation Stage, Sequence of Operation 5-16
L
Left Endframe Controls 3-6
Locating the Exhaust Blower 2-5
INDEX
I-3
Index
GO 20
M
P
Machine Speed Sensor 7-66
Adjustment 7-66
Replacement 7-67
Maintenance and Repair Safety 1-3
Main Disconnect Switch 1-4, 3-2
Main Electrical Panel 5-4
Main Power Connection 2-9
Manual Scope 1-2
Maximum Efﬁciency, Flatwork Handling 3-11
Maximum Productivity 3-16
Mechanical Start-Up Stage, Sequence of Operation
5-17
Mechanical System
About 5-7
Delivery Drive System 5-7
Ironer Drive System 5-7
Ribbon Sets 5-8
Troubleshooting 6-7
Missing or Broken Ribbon Replacement
Delivery 7-63
Feed 7-7
Return 7-56
Moisture Retention, Conditioning Flatwork Before
Ironing 3-14
Monthly PM (200 Hours) 4-15
Check
Compression Roll Pressure 4-18
Setscrews 4-16
Clean Touchless Temperature Sensors and UV
Flame Scanner 4-17
Grease Bearings 4-16
Oil Drive Chain and Tension Springs 4-18
Parts Availability, Repair 7-3
Pilot Flame Ignition Trial, Burner Normal Operation
Stage 5-19
Pilot Gas/Air Mixture Check and Adjustment 7-30
Pilot Gas Valve Circuit, Flame Safeguard 5-13
Pilot Ignition, Heating System Troubleshooting
6-15
PM Task Table 4-1
Positioning the Unit 2-4
Pre-Operational Checkout 2-14
Checkout Completion 2-27
Cleaning the Unit 2-27
Electrical Connection Checkout 2-17
Gas Connection Checkout 2-22
Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield Check 2-16
Ironing Cylinder Paper Removal 2-21
Safety Device and Control Function Checkout
2-19
Security of Hardware 2-15
Pressure Adjustment, Compression Roll 7-19
Pressure Check, Compression Roll 7-18
Preventive Maintenance
Daily PM (8 Hours) 4-3
Monthly PM (200 Hours) 4-15
Semi-Annual PM (1000 Hours) 4-19
Task Table 4-1
Weekly PM (50 Hours) 4-5
Processing Standards 3-16
Ironing System 3-16
Protective Wrapper Removal 2-14
O
Receiving Shelf Set-Up 2-13
Reconditioning, Ironing Cylinder 7-26
Regulator and Valve Installation 2-11
Repair
Parts Availability 7-3
Safety Considerations 7-2
Reset Button, Flame Safeguard 5-13
Return Section 7-53
Drive Roll Friction Material Replacement 7-57
Ribbon
Replacement 7-55
Tension Adjustment 7-53
Oil
Change, Delivery Drive Gear Reduction Unit
(Type R Unit) 4-20
Drive Chain and Tension Springs 4-18
Roll Bearing Pivots 4-11
Operating Controls 3-4
Left Endframe Controls 3-6
Right Endframe Controls 3-4
Operating Gas Pressure Check and Ignition Test
2-24
Operating Techniques 3-13
Conditioning Flatwork Before Ironing 3-13
Maximum Productivity 3-16
Processing Standards 3-16
Unit Settings 3-15
Operation, Temperature Control 5-14
Outputs, Flame Safeguard 5-13
I-4
TOC
R
INDEX
GO 20
Index
Ribbon
Condition Check 4-15
Replacement
Delivery 7-62
Feed 7-6
Return 7-55
Sets 5-8
Tension Adjustment
Delivery 7-60
Feed 7-4
Return 7-53
Right Endframe Controls 3-4
S
Safety 1-3, 5-2
Flatwork Handling 3-11
Repair Safety Considerations 7-2
Safety Features 1-4
Safe Work Habits 1-3
Safety Considerations, Repair 7-2
Safety Device and Control Function Checkout 2-19
Control Function Check 2-20
Safety Device Check 2-20
Safety Features 1-4, 3-2
Main Disconnect Switch 1-4, 3-2
Safety Guards 1-5, 3-2
Safety Interlock Switches 1-5, 3-3
Safety Labels 1-5, 3-3
Safety Messages in this Manual 1-6
Safety Stop Buttons 1-4, 3-2
Safety Guards 1-5, 3-2
Safety Interlock Switches 1-5, 3-3
Safety Labels 1-5, 3-3
Safety Messages in this Manual 1-6
Safety Stop Buttons 1-4, 3-2
Safe Work Habits 1-3
During Daily Operation 1-3
Maintenance and Repair 1-3
Sail Switch
About 5-9
Sail Switch and Exhaust Blower Motor Electrical
Connection 2-7
Sail Switch and Exhaust Blower Wheel Check and
Clean 4-13
Scope of the Manual 1-2
Security of Hardware 2-15
TOC
Semi-Annual PM (1000 Hours) 4-19
Change Oil in Delivery Drive Gear Reduction
Unit (Type R Unit) 4-20
Check
Gas Pressure 4-20
Gas Regulator Vent 4-19
Mechanical and Electrical Connections 4-23
Check and Clean Spark Plug and Pilot Assembly
4-21
Sequence of Operation 5-16
Burner Fail-Safe Protection Stage 5-19
Burner Normal Operation Stage 5-18
JOG Operation Stage 5-16
Mechanical Start-Up Stage 5-17
Stand-By Stage 5-16
Setscrews, Check 4-16
Shut-Down 3-13
Temporary Shut-Down 3-13
Site and Utility Requirements 2-2
Spring
Oil Tension 4-18
Stand-By Stage, Sequence of Operation 5-16
Start-Up 3-8
Start-Up, Burner Normal Operation Stage 5-18
T
Task Table, PM 4-1
Temperature Control 5-14
Electrical Connection 5-14
Operation 5-14
Replacement 7-52
Temporary Shut-Down 3-13
Tension Adjustment
Delivery Ribbon 7-60
Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt 7-64
Drive Chain 7-25
Feed Ribbon 7-4
Return Ribbon 7-53
Tension Spring
Oil 4-18
Timing Between Washing and Ironing, Conditioning
Flatwork Before Ironing 3-14
Tip Maintenance, Burner 7-45
Touchless Temperature Sensors
About 5-15
Replacement 7-51
Tracking Tape Replacement
Delivery Ribbon Drive Roll 7-64
INDEX
I-5
Index
GO 20
W
Troubleshooting
Electrical 6-4
Exhaust System 6-24
Heating System 6-13
Ironing Quality 6-10
Mechanical System 6-7
Symptoms 6-2
Warranty 1-2
Wash Load, Conditioning Flatwork Before Ironing
3-13
Watch and Listen for Anything Abnormal 4-3
Waxing 3-9
Wax Ironing Cylinder 4-5
Weekly PM (50 Hours) 4-5
Check
Compression Roll Cover 4-6
Delivery Ribbon Drive Belt 4-7
Ironing Cylinder 4-6
Ribbon Condition 4-15
Check and Clean
Combustion Blower Wheel 4-14
Inverter 4-8
Motors 4-13
Sail Switch and Exhaust Blower Wheel 4-13
Clean
Behind Service Panels 4-7
Ironing Cylinder Heat Shield 4-12
Grease Weekly Bearings 4-9
Oil Roll Bearing Pivots 4-11
Worn Ribbon Replacement
Delivery 7-62
Feed 7-6
Return 7-55
U
Uncrating and Positioning 2-4
Unit Settings 3-15
Compression Roll Pressure 3-15
Ironing Cylinder Temperature 3-15
Ironing Speed 3-15
UV Flame Scanner
About 5-15
Alignment Check/Adjustment 7-47
Circuit 5-12
Replacement 7-50
V
Ventilating the Work Area 2-6
Venting the Installed Regulator 2-12
I-6
TOC
INDEX

Руководство по эксплуатации гладильного катка GO 20

Разделы

Поддержка

Руководство по эксплуатации гладильного катка GO 20

Добавить этот документ в коллекции

Добавить этот документ в сохраненные

Предложите, как улучшить Pubdoc